俱舍論 器世間·身量·壽量Abhidharmakośabhāṣya · The Receptacle World · Bodily Measure · Lifespan

〔T29 0057a02〕
心要Essence

有情世間既訖,論主一句「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」轉身講外器。自下而上:風輪水輪金輪三層底座、九山八海、四大洲與八中洲、黑山無熱池;再往下探八熱八寒與十六增,再往上循日月、妙高四層級、三十三天以至有色諸天;末以三千大千收其廣,以身量、壽量、中夭收其久。八目一圖,兩表一收。

一句話:這一卷把一個世界從最下一層排到最上一層、從最短的十年排到八萬劫——而通篇沒有一位建築師,只有一句反覆出現的「諸有情業增上力」。

位置(先立)

本卷之界是全品最強的一道科界:論文自標「器世間今當說」,三家古德在此各自分卷而界線全同,光記、寶疏、頌疏皆判為世品全體的大文第二。器世間之下三分——所居器、能居量、三分齊;本卷占前二分,第三分屬下一卷。所居器再細分八目(三輪、九山、八海、四洲、黑山等、地獄、日月、天器),三家所標亦全同。真諦舊譯此段作「器世界」而不作「器世間」,且其世間品只分四卷,本卷所對之段橫跨其兩卷之界。

三個眼目

  1. 世界不是誰造的,是共業感的。風輪從虛空生起,是「諸有情業增上力」;水上結金、眾寶生成、日月不墜繞山而行,一律是它。連四洲的形狀與四洲人的臉相應——「隨其洲相人面亦然」——也是這條線的證據:器與有情同出一份共業,不是兩套東西。所以讀這一卷的第一步,是把『誰造的』換成『誰的業感的』;這一換,滿卷的數字才落到修行的帳上。也正因如此,本卷順手破了數論的『轉變』一義:有部說因滅果生、體不俱有,數論說體常而相變,論主一句斷之——「即是此物而不如此,如是言義曾所未聞」。

  2. 量表的骨架是換單位,不是堆數字。四洲人身量從東洲起倍增,欲天以俱盧舍等差、色天先等差後等比而中間「唯無雲減三踰繕那」——論未給其由,光記並存數解;壽量則先立天上的晝夜(人間五十年為最下一天的一晝夜),再以天壽為地獄的一晝夜。同一個手法用了三次。天處相去之量更省——「如彼去下量,去上數亦然」,一句話取代二十二個數字。而數目大到無感時,論就改用譬喻:寒地獄之壽以百年取一粒胡麻顯其「難盡」,不給定值。凡遇一串規則忽然出現例外,先驗算首尾;凡遇譬喻取代數字,那正是數已越出可感之處。

  3. 異說之多,恰是誠實的痕跡。水為何不流散,二說;地獄如何排列,三說;三十三天頂量,八萬與二萬並存;天宮依處之量,四說並列。器世間的細節多半經無明文,論多錄異說而不判;但須逐段辨認「理實」「此義無定」一類判語——所以讀本卷要先學會分辨哪一句是論的正說、哪一句是所錄的別說。真正被定死的不是地圖,是每一處『何業感何果』的對應。而論主標「應思」「此義無定」「諸軌範師於此二門俱許無失」處,是他自己劃出的未收束之處,不是缺口。

一義(附):三十三天山頂那一組相反的數字

玄奘頌本主張山頂每邊八萬,而以「四邊各唯二萬」為餘師之說;真諦偈本卻主張每邊二萬,反以八萬為餘師之說。同一組數字,二本的正說與餘師說恰好對調——這不是譯語之異,是二本所承頌文的異讀之異,二譯各自忠實其所據底本。光記還替持二萬之說把算式補了出來,說四層級「漸次却入侵山體成」,一層層向內收,到頂只剩每邊二萬。並錄不判。

通於全卷

本卷最後一段值得回頭再讀。滿卷數字鋪陳到極處之後,論說「諸處壽量皆有中夭」,隨即補一層:「此約處說,非別有情,有別有情不中夭故」——就處所說是一回事,就個人說是另一回事。不中夭的那幾類人是誰?待成佛的一生所繫菩薩、最後有者、佛所記者、佛所使者、隨信行者、隨法行者,以及懷菩薩胎與懷輪王胎的母親。他們的共同點是身上有一件未了之事。

於是這幅世界圖有了一個出口:一切處所的壽量都可以逐格記帳,而擔著必成之事的人不受這張表的支配。從最下的風輪到最上的色究竟,從十年到八萬劫,全卷所量的是器與身;末後這一句所指的,是量表之外。

The world of sentient beings being finished, the author turns with a single sentence — “Thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated” — and speaks of the outer receptacle. From the bottom upward: the three-tiered base of wind circle, water circle, and golden circle; the nine mountains and the eight seas; the four great continents and the eight intermediate continents; the black mountains and the Lake Without Heat; then downward to the eight hot and the eight cold hells and the sixteen Increases; then upward along the sun and moon, the four terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and so on to the gods possessed of form; at the end the three-thousandfold great thousand gathers up its breadth, and bodily measure, lifespan, and untimely death gather up its length. Eight headings make one map; two tables make one close.

In one sentence: This fascicle sets a world in order from its lowest tier to its highest and from the shortest span of ten years to eighty thousand aeons — and through the whole of it there is no architect, only one sentence recurring again and again, “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings.”

Placement (established first)

The boundary of this fascicle is the strongest outline boundary in the whole chapter: the text marks itself with “the receptacle world is now to be stated,” and the three ancient masters each divide their fascicles here with boundaries exactly alike, Puguang’s Record, Fabao’s Commentary, and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary all judging it the second major division of the chapter on the world as a whole. Beneath the receptacle world there are three parts — the receptacle dwelt in, the measure of those who can dwell, and the divisions of the least measures; this fascicle occupies the first two, and the third belongs to the next. The receptacle dwelt in divides further into eight headings (the three circles, the nine mountains, the eight seas, the four continents, the black mountains and the rest, the hells, the sun and moon, and the receptacles of the gods), and here too the three masters mark them alike. Paramārtha’s older translation writes this passage as “the receptacle world-sphere” and not “the receptacle world,” and his chapter on the world is divided into four fascicles only, so that the passage answering to this one straddles the boundary between two of his.

Three Points to Watch

  1. The world is not made by anyone; it is called forth by shared action. The wind circle arises out of space by “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings”; gold congealing upon the water, the several gems coming into being, the sun and moon not falling but circling the mountain — all of it is that same force. Even the correspondence between the shapes of the four continents and the faces of the people who live upon them — “as the continent has its shape, so likewise the faces of its people” — is evidence on this same line: the receptacle and sentient beings issue from one and the same shared action and are not two separate sets of things. So the first step in reading this fascicle is to put “whose action called it forth” in place of “who made it”; and once that is done, the numbers that fill the fascicle fall onto the ledger of practice. It is for just this reason that the fascicle refutes in passing the Sāṃkhya sense of “transmutation”: the Sarvāstivādins say that the cause ceases and the result arises and their entities do not exist together, while the Sāṃkhya say that the entity is permanent and its characteristics change; and the author settles it in one sentence — “that it should be this very thing and yet not be thus: such a statement I have never heard.”

  2. The skeleton of the tables is a change of unit, not a heap of numbers. The bodily measure of the people of the four continents doubles from the eastern continent onward; the gods of desire increase by a constant difference reckoned in krośas, while the gods of form increase first by a constant difference and then by a constant ratio, with “only the Anabhraka subtracting three yojanas” in the middle — for which the treatise gives no reason and Puguang’s Record keeps several explanations side by side. For lifespan, the day and night of the heavens are established first (fifty human years being one day and night of the lowest heaven), and then the lifespan of a heaven is made one day and night of a hell. One and the same device is used three times. The measures of distance between the places of the gods are more economical still — “as is a heaven’s measure of distance downward, so likewise is its number upward” — one sentence in place of twenty-two figures. And when a number grows too great to be felt, the treatise turns to simile instead: the lifespan of the cold hells is shown to be “hard to exhaust” by taking away one sesame seed every hundred years, with no fixed value given. Whenever an exception suddenly appears in a run of regular values, verify the two ends first; and whenever a simile takes the place of a number, that is exactly where the count has passed beyond what can be felt.

  3. The abundance of divergent accounts is precisely the mark of honesty. Why the water does not flow away: two accounts. How the hells are arranged: three. The measure of the summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three: eighty thousand and twenty thousand stand side by side. The measure of the supports of the heavenly palaces: four accounts listed together. For most of the details of the receptacle world the scriptures have no express text, and the treatise records divergent accounts for the most part without adjudicating them; yet one must recognize, passage by passage, such verdict-words as “in truth of principle” and “this sense is not settled” — so that reading this fascicle begins with learning to tell which sentence is the treatise’s own position and which is a separate account that it merely records. What is fixed beyond change is not the map but the correspondence, at every single point, of “which action calls forth which result.” And where the author writes “it should be pondered,” “this sense is not settled,” and “the preceptors allow both gates without fault,” those are places he has himself marked as not yet brought to a close, and are not gaps.

One Further Point (Appended): The Opposed Pair of Numbers at the Summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three

Xuanzang’s stanza text holds that each side of the summit is eighty thousand and gives “each of the four sides is only twenty thousand” as the account of other masters; Paramārtha’s verse text, on the contrary, holds that each side is twenty thousand and gives eighty thousand as the account of other masters. With one and the same pair of figures, what is the position and what is the account of other masters are exactly interchanged between the two versions — this is not a difference of rendering but a difference in the variant readings of the stanza text that each version received, each translator being faithful to the base text before him. Puguang’s Record even supplies, on behalf of the account holding twenty thousand, the reckoning that lies behind it, saying that the four terraces are formed “by cutting successively inward into the body of the mountain,” drawing in tier by tier, so that at the summit only twenty thousand a side is left. Both are recorded without adjudication.

Through the whole fascicle

The last passage of this fascicle deserves a second reading. After the numbers that fill it have been set out to their utmost, the treatise says that “in every place the lifespan admits of untimely death,” and at once adds a further layer: “this is said with respect to place and not with respect to particular sentient beings, for there are particular sentient beings who do not die untimely” — what holds of a place is one thing, what holds of a person another. Who are the several classes that do not die untimely? The bodhisattva bound to one more birth who awaits buddhahood, one in his last existence, one to whom the Buddha has given prediction, one whom the Buddha has sent, one who follows through faith, one who follows the dharma, and the mothers who carry a bodhisattva in the womb and who carry a wheel-turning monarch in the womb. What they have in common is that each carries about him a matter not yet finished.

So this map of the world is given an exit: the lifespan of every place can be entered in the ledger square by square, and yet one who bears a matter that must be brought to completion is not governed by that table. From the wind circle lowest down to the Akaniṣṭha highest up, from ten years to eighty thousand aeons, what the whole fascicle measures is the receptacle and the body; what its last sentence points to lies outside the table of measures.

原典Canonical · verbatim

阿毘達磨俱舍論卷第十一 〔T29 0057a02〕

分別世品第三之四 〔T29 0057a06〕

〔T29 0057a〕 如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說。頌曰:

〔頌·正45–47 T29 0057a08〕   安立器世間,風輪最居下,
  其量廣無數,厚十六洛叉,
  次上水輪深,十一億二萬,
  下八洛叉水,餘凝結成金,
  此水金輪廣,徑十二洛叉,
  三千四百半,周圍此三倍。
論曰:許此三千大千世界如是安立形量不同。謂諸有情業增上力,先於最下依止虛空有風輪生,廣無數、厚十六億踰繕那。如是風輪其體堅密,假設有一大諾健那,以金剛輪奮威懸擊,金剛有碎風輪無損。又諸有情業增上力,起大雲雨澍風輪上,滴如車軸積水成輪。如是水輪於未凝結位,深十一億二萬踰繕那。如何水輪不傍流散?有餘師說:一切有情業力所持令不流散。如所飲食未熟變時,終不流移墮於熟藏。有餘部說:由風所持令不流散,如篅持穀。有情業力感別風起,搏擊此水上結成金,如熟乳停上凝成膜,故水輪減唯厚八洛叉,餘轉成金,厚三億二萬。二輪廣量其數是同,謂徑十二億三千四百半。周圍其邊數成三倍,謂周圍量成三十六億一萬三百五十踰繕那。頌曰:

〔頌·正48–51 T29 0057b02〕   蘇迷盧處中,次踰健達羅,
  伊沙馱羅山,朅地洛迦山,
  蘇達梨舍那,頞濕縛羯拏,
  毘那怛迦山,尼民達羅山,
  於大洲等外,有鐵輪圍山,
  前七金所成,蘇迷盧四寶,
  入水皆八萬,妙高出亦然,
  餘八半半下,廣皆等高量。
論曰:於金輪上有九大山,妙高山王處中而住,餘八周匝繞妙高山。於八山中前七名內,第七山外有大洲等。此外復有鐵輪圍山,周匝如輪圍一世界。持雙等七唯金所成。妙高山王四寶為體,謂如次四面北、東、南、西,金、銀、吠琉璃、頗胝迦寶。隨寶威德色顯於空,故贍部洲空似吠琉璃色。如是寶等從何而生?亦諸有情業增上力。復大雲起雨金輪上滴如車軸,積水奔濤,其水即為眾寶種藏。由具種種威德猛風鑽擊變生眾寶類等。如是變水生寶等時,因滅果生,體不俱有,非如數論轉變所成。數論云何執轉變義?謂執有法自性常存,有餘法生、有餘法滅。如是轉變何理相違?謂必無容有法常住,可執別有法滅法生。誰言法外別有有法?唯即此法於轉變時異相所依名為有法。此亦非理。非理者何?即是此物而不如此,如是言義曾所未聞。如是變生金寶等已,復由業力引起別風,簡別寶等攝令聚集成山成洲,分水甘醎令別成立內海外海。如是九山住金輪上,入水量皆等八萬踰繕那,蘇迷盧山出水亦爾。餘八出水半半漸卑,謂初持雙出水四萬,乃至最後鐵輪圍山出水三百一十二半。如是九山一一廣量,各各與自出水量同。頌曰:

〔頌·正52·正53 T29 0057c06〕   山間有八海,前七名為內,
  最初廣八萬,四邊各三倍,
  餘六半半陿,第八名為外,
  三洛叉二萬,二千踰繕那。
論曰:妙高為初、輪圍最後,中間八海,前七名內。七中皆具八功德水:一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹。如是七海初廣八萬,約持雙山內邊周量,於其四面數各三倍,謂各成二億四萬踰繕那。其餘六海量半半陿,謂第二海量廣四萬,乃至第七量廣一千二百五十。此等不說周圍量者,以煩多故。第八名外,醎水盈滿,量廣三億二萬二千。頌曰:

〔頌·正54–57 T29 0057c19〕   於中大洲相,南贍部如車,
  三邊各二千,南邊有三半;
  東毘提訶洲,其相如半月,
  三邊如贍部,東邊三百半;
  西瞿陀尼洲,其相圓無缺,
  徑二千五百,周圍此三倍;
  北俱盧畟方,面各二千等,
  中洲復有八,四洲邊各二。
論曰:於外海中大洲有四,謂於四面對妙高山。南贍部洲北廣南陿,三邊量等,其相如車。南邊唯廣三踰繕那半,三邊各有二千踰繕那。唯此洲中有金剛座,上窮地際下據金輪,一切菩薩將登正覺皆坐此座上起金剛喻定,以無餘依及餘處所有堅固力能持此故。東勝身洲東陿西廣,三邊量等,形如半月。東三百五十,三邊各二千。西牛貨洲圓如滿月,徑二千五百,周圍七千半。北俱盧洲形如方座,四邊量等,面各二千。等言為明無少增減。隨其洲相人面亦然。復有八中洲,是大洲眷屬,謂四大洲側各有二中洲。贍部洲邊二中洲者,一遮末羅洲、二筏羅遮末羅洲。勝身洲邊二中洲者,一提訶洲、二毘提訶洲。牛貨洲邊二中洲者,一舍搋洲、二嗢怛羅漫怛里拏洲。俱盧洲邊二中洲者,一矩拉婆洲、二憍拉婆洲。此一切洲皆人所住。有說:唯一邏剎娑居。頌曰:

〔頌·正58 T29 0058a16〕   此北九黑山,雪香醉山內,
  無熱池縱廣,五十踰繕那。
論曰:此贍部洲從中向北,三處各有三重黑山。有大雪山在黑山北,大雪山北有香醉山。雪北香南有大池水,名無熱惱,出四大河:一殑伽河、二信度河、三徙多河、四縛芻河。無熱惱池縱廣正等,面各五十踰繕那量,八功德水盈滿其中,非得通人無由能至。於此池側有贍部林,樹形高大其果甘美,依此林故名贍部洲,或依此果以立洲號。復於何處置㮈落迦、大㮈落迦?何量有幾?頌曰:

〔頌·正59·正60 T29 0058a28〕   此下過二萬,無間深廣同,
  上七㮈落迦,八增皆十六。
  謂煻煨屍糞,鋒刃烈河增,
  各住彼四方,餘八寒地獄。
論曰:此贍部洲下過二萬,有阿鼻旨大㮈落迦。深廣同前,謂各二萬故。彼底去此四萬踰繕那。以於其中受苦無間,非如餘七大㮈落迦受苦非恒,故名無間。且如等活㮈落迦中,諸有情身雖被種種斫刺磨擣,而彼暫遇涼風所吹還活如本,由斯理故立等活名。阿鼻旨中無如是事。有餘師說:阿鼻旨中無樂間苦故名無間,餘地獄中有樂間起,雖無異熟而有等流。七㮈落迦在無間上重累而住。其七者何?一者極熱、二者炎熱、三者大叫、四者號叫、五者眾合、六者黑繩、七者等活。有說:此七在無間傍。八㮈落迦增各十六,故薄伽梵說此頌言: 〔引頌·非本頌 T29 0058b16〕   此八㮈落迦,我說甚難越,
  以熱鐵為地,周匝有鐵牆,
  四面有四門,關閉以鐵扇,
  巧安布分量,各有十六增,
  多百踰繕那,滿中造惡者,
  周遍焰交徹,猛火恒洞然。
十六增者,八㮈落迦四面門外各有四所:一煻煨增,謂此增內煻煨沒膝,有情遊彼纔下足時,皮肉與血俱燋爛墜,舉足還生平復如本。二屍糞增,謂此增內屍糞泥滿,於中多有娘矩吒蟲,𭪿利如針身白頭黑,有情遊彼皆為此蟲鑽皮破骨𠯗食其髓。三鋒刃增,謂此增內復有三種:一刀刃路,謂於此中仰布刀刃以為大道,有情遊彼纔下足時,皮肉與血俱斷碎墜,舉足還生平復如本。二劍葉林,謂此林上純以銛利劍刃為葉,有情遊彼風吹葉墜,斬刺支體骨肉零落,有烏駁狗摣掣食之。三鐵刺林,謂此林上有利鐵刺長十六指,有情被逼上下樹時,其刺銛鋒下上鑱刺,有鐵𭪿鳥探啄有情眼睛心肝爭競而食。刀刃路等三種雖殊,而鐵杖同故一增攝。四烈河增,謂此增量廣,滿中熱醎水,有情入中或浮或沒,或逆或順或橫或轉,被蒸被煮骨肉糜爛。如大鑊中滿盛灰汁置麻米等,猛火下燃,麻等於中上下迴轉舉體糜爛,有情亦然。設欲逃亡,於兩岸上有諸獄卒,手執刀槍禦捍令迴,無由得出。此河如塹,前三似園,四面各四增,故言皆十六。此是增上被刑害所,故說名增,本地獄中適被害已重遭害故。有說:有情從地獄出更遭此苦,故說為增。今於此中因論生論。諸地獄卒是有情不?有說:非情。如何動作?有情業力,如成劫風。若爾,云何通彼大德法善現說?如彼頌言: 〔引頌·非本頌 T29 0058c21〕   心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,
  見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒。
琰魔王使諸邏剎娑擲諸有情置地獄者名琰魔卒。是實有情非地獄中害有情者,故地獄卒非實有情。有說:有情。若爾,此惡業何處受異熟?即地獄中,以地獄中尚容無間所感異熟,此何理遮?若爾,何緣火不燒彼?此定由業力所隔礙故,或感異大種故不被燒。熱㮈落迦已說有八。復有餘八寒㮈落迦。其八者何?一頞部陀、二尼剌部陀、三頞唽吒、四臛臛婆、五虎虎婆、六嗢鉢羅、七鉢特摩、八摩訶鉢特摩。此中有情嚴寒所逼,隨身聲變以立其名。此八并居贍部洲下,如前所說大地獄傍。此贍部洲其量無幾,下寧容受無間等耶?洲如穀聚,上尖下闊,是故大海漸陿漸深。如上所論十六地獄,一切有情增上業感。餘孤地獄各別業招,或多或二或一所止,差別多種、處所不定,或近江河山邊曠野,或在地下空及餘處。諸地獄器安布如是,本處在下、支𣲖不定。傍生住處謂水陸空,本處大海,後流餘處。諸鬼本處琰魔王國,於此贍部洲下過五百踰繕那有琰魔王國,縱廣量亦爾,從此展轉散居餘處。或有端嚴具大威德,受諸富樂自在如天,或有飢羸顏貌醜陋,如是等類廣說如經。日月所居量等義者,頌曰:

〔頌·正61–63 T29 0059a18〕   日月迷盧半,五十一五十,
  夜半日沒中,日出四洲等。
  雨際第二月,後九夜漸增,
  寒第四亦然,夜減晝翻此。
  晝夜增臘縛,行南北路時,
  近日自影覆,故見月輪缺。
論曰:日月眾星依何而住?依風而住。謂諸有情業增上力共引風起,繞妙高山空中旋環,運持日等令不停墜。彼所住去此幾踰繕那?持雙山頂齊妙高山半。日月徑量幾踰繕那?日五十一,月唯五十。星最小者唯一俱盧舍,其最大者十六踰繕那。日輪下面頗胝迦寶火珠所成,能熱能照;月輪下面頗胝迦寶水珠所成,能冷能照。隨有情業增上所生,能於眼身果花稼穡藥草等物,如其所應為益為損。唯一日月普於四洲作所作事、一日所作事為四洲同時不?不爾。云何?北洲夜半東洲日沒,南洲日中西洲日出。此四時等,餘例應知。日行此洲路有差別,故令晝夜有減有增。從雨際第二月後半第九日夜漸增,從寒際第四月後半第九日夜漸減,晝增減位與此相違。夜漸增時晝便漸減,夜若漸減晝則漸增。晝夜增時一晝夜增幾?增一臘縛。晝夜減亦然。日行此洲向南向北,如其次第夜增晝增。何故月輪於黑半末白半初位見有缺耶?世施設中作如是釋:以月宮殿行近日輪,月被日輪光所侵照,餘邊發影自覆月輪,令於爾時見不圓滿。先舊師釋:由日月輪行度不同現有圓缺。日等宮殿何有情居?四大天王所部天眾。是諸天眾唯住此耶?若空居天唯住如是日等宮殿,若地居天住妙高山諸層級等。有幾層級?其量云何?何等諸天住何層級?頌曰:

〔頌·正64·正65 T29 0059b22〕   妙高層有四,相去各十千,
  傍出十六千,八四二千量。
  堅手及持鬘,恒憍大王眾,
  如次居四級,亦住餘七山。
論曰:蘇迷盧山有四層級,始從水際盡第一層相去十千踰繕那量,如是乃至從第三層盡第四層亦十千量。此四層級從妙高山傍出圍繞盡其下半,最初層級出十六千,第二、第三、第四層級,如其次第八、四、二千。有藥叉神名為堅手住初層級,有名持鬘住第二級,有名恒憍住第三級,此三皆是四大天王所部天眾,第四層級四大天王及諸眷屬共所居止故,經依此說四大王眾天。如妙高山四外層級四大王眾及眷屬居,如是持雙、持軸山等七金山上亦有天居,是四大王所部封邑,是名依地住四大王眾天。於欲天中此天最廣。三十三天住在何處?頌曰:

〔頌·正66–69 T29 0059c11〕   妙高頂八萬,三十三天居,
  四角有四峯,金剛手所住。
  中宮名善見,周萬踰繕那,
  高一半金城,雜飾地柔軟。
  中有殊勝殿,周千踰繕那,
  外四苑莊嚴,眾車麁雜喜。
  妙池居四方,相去各二十,
  東北圓生樹,西南善法堂。
論曰:三十三天住迷盧頂,其頂四面各八十千,與下四邊其量無別。有餘師說:周八十千,別說四邊各唯二萬。山頂四角各有一峯,其高廣量各有五百。有藥叉神名金剛手,於中止住守護諸天。於山頂中有宮名善見,面二千半,周萬踰繕那,金城量高一踰繕那半,其地平坦亦真金所成,俱用百一雜寶嚴飾,地觸柔軟如妬羅綿,於踐躡時隨足高下,是天帝釋所都大城。於其城中有殊勝殿,種種妙寶具足莊嚴,蔽餘天宮故名殊勝,面二百五十,周千踰繕那。是謂城中諸可愛事。城外四面四苑莊嚴,是彼諸天共遊戲處:一眾車苑、二麁惡苑、三雜林苑、四喜林苑,此為外飾莊嚴大城。四苑四邊有四妙池,中間各去苑二十踰繕那,是彼諸天勝遊戲處,諸天於彼捔勝歡娛。城外東北有圓生樹,是三十三天受欲樂勝所。盤根深廣五十踰繕那,聳幹上昇枝條傍布,高廣量等百踰繕那,挺葉開花妙香芬馥,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若逆風時猶遍五十。順風可爾,云何逆熏?有餘師言:香無逆熏義,依不越樹界故說逆熏。理實圓生有如是德,所流香氣能逆風熏,雖天和風力所擁遏。然能相續流趣餘方,漸劣漸微近處便歇,非能遠至如順風熏。如是花香,為依自地隨風相續轉至餘方、為但熏風別生香氣?此義無定,諸軌範師於此二門俱許無失。若爾,何故薄伽梵言: 〔引頌·非本頌 T29 0060a18〕   花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾;
  善士功德香芬馥,逆風流美遍諸方。
據人間香故作是說,以世共了無如是能。化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十。外西南角有善法堂,三十三天時集於彼詳論如法不如法事。如是已辯三十三天所居外器,餘有色天眾所住器云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正70前半 T29 0060a26〕   此上有色天,住依空宮殿。
論曰:此前所說三十三天上有色諸天,住依空宮殿。云何名上有色諸天?謂夜摩天、覩史多天、樂變化天、他化自在天。及前所說梵眾天等有十六處,并前合有二十二天,皆依外器。如是所說諸天眾中,頌曰:

〔頌·正70後半 T29 0060b03〕   六受欲交抱,執手笑視婬。
論曰:唯六欲天受妙欲境,於中初二依地居天,形交成婬與人無別。然風氣泄熱惱便除,非如人間有餘不淨。夜摩天眾纔抱成婬,覩史多天但由執手,樂變化天唯相向笑,他化自在相視成婬。毘婆沙師作如是釋:六天皆以形交成婬。世施設中說相抱等,但為顯彼時量差別。以上諸天欲境轉妙、貪心轉捷故使之然。隨彼諸天男女膝上,有童男童女欻爾化生,即說為彼天所生男女。初生天眾身量云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正71前半 T29 0060b14〕   初如五至十,色圓滿有衣。
論曰:且六欲諸天初生,如次如五六七八九十歲人,生已身形速得成滿。色界天眾於初生時,身量周圓具妙衣服。一切天眾皆作聖言,謂彼言詞同中印度。欲樂生別云何應知?頌曰:

〔頌·正71後半 T29 0060b20〕   欲生三人天,樂生三九處。
論曰:欲生三者,有諸有情樂受現前諸妙欲境,彼於如是現欲境中自在而轉,謂全人趣及下四天。有諸有情樂受自化諸妙欲境,彼於自化妙欲境中自在而轉,謂唯第五樂變化天。有諸有情樂受他化諸妙欲境,彼於他化妙欲境中自在而轉,謂第六他化自在天。依受如生現前欲境故,依受如樂自化欲境故,依受如樂他化欲境故,於欲界中分別欲生差別三種。樂生三者,三靜慮中於九處生受三種樂,謂彼安住離生喜樂、定生喜樂,離喜樂故,長時安住、長時離苦、長時受樂,故名樂生。生靜慮中間都無喜樂應思,何故亦號樂生天?所說諸天二十二處,上下相去其量云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正72前半 T29 0060c06〕   如彼去下量,去上數亦然。
論曰:一一中間踰繕那量,非易可數,但可總舉彼去下量,去上例然。隨從何天去下海量,彼上所至與去下同。謂妙高山從第四層級去下大海四萬踰繕那,是四大王本所住處,從彼上去三十三天,亦如彼天去下海量。如三十三天去下大海,上去夜摩天其量亦爾。如是乃至如善見天去下大海踰繕那量,從彼上去色究竟天亦與彼天去下海等。從此向上無復所居,此處最高名色究竟。有餘師說:彼名礙究竟天。彼謂礙名目積集色至彼礙盡,得究竟名。於下處生昇見上不?頌曰:

〔頌·正72後半 T29 0060c19〕   離通力依他,下無昇見上。
論曰:三十三天由自通力,能從本處昇夜摩天;或復依他,謂得通者及上天眾接往夜摩。所餘諸天昇上例爾,若來若至下見上天。然下眼不能覩上界上地,非其境界故。如不覺彼觸,是故從上地來下地時非自身來,要作下地化。有餘部說:彼下地天隨樂亦能見上地色,如生此界下見上天。夜摩等天宮依處量有幾?有餘師說:此上四天依處,量同妙高山頂。有餘師說:上倍倍增。有餘師言:初靜慮地宮殿依處等一四洲,第二靜慮等小千界,第三靜慮等中千界,第四靜慮等大千界。有餘師言:下三靜慮如次量等小中大千,第四靜慮量無邊際。齊何量說小中大千?頌曰:

〔頌·正73·正74 T29 0061a05〕   四大洲日月,蘇迷盧欲天,
  梵世各一千,名一小千界;
  此小千千倍,說名一中千;
  此千倍大千,皆同一成壞。
論曰:千四大洲乃至梵世,如是總說為一小千,千倍小千名一中千界,千中千界總名一大千,如是大千同成同壞。同成壞相後當廣辯。如外器量別,身量亦別耶?亦別。云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正75·正76·正77前半 T29 0061a14〕   贍部洲人量,三肘半四肘;
  東西北洲人,倍倍增如次。
  欲天俱盧舍,四分一一增;
  色天踰繕那,初四增半半;
  此上增倍倍,唯無雲減三。
論曰:贍部洲人身多長三肘半,於中少分有長四肘。東勝身人身長八肘,西牛貨人長十六肘,北俱盧人三十二肘。欲界六天最下身量一俱盧舍四分之一,如是後後一一分增,至第六天身一俱盧舍半。色天身量初梵眾天半踰繕那,梵輔全一,大梵一半,少光二全,此上餘天皆增倍倍,唯無雲減三踰繕那,謂無量光天倍增二至四,乃至色究竟增滿萬六千。身量既殊,壽量別不?亦別。云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正77後半·正78–80 T29 0061a28〕   北洲定千年,西東半半減,
  此洲壽不定,後十初叵量。
  人間五十年,下天一晝夜,
  乘斯壽五百,上五倍倍增。
  色無晝夜殊,劫數等身量,
  無色初二萬,後後二二增,
  少光上下天,大全半為劫。
論曰:北俱盧人定壽千歲,西牛貨人壽五百歲,東勝身人壽二百五十歲,南贍部人壽無定限。劫減最後極壽十年,於劫初時人壽無量,百千等數不能計量。已說人間壽量長短。要先建立天上晝夜,方可算計天壽短長。天上云何建立晝夜?人五十歲為六天中最在下天一晝一夜,乘斯晝夜三十為月,十二月為歲,彼壽五百年。上五欲天漸俱增倍,謂人百歲為第二天一晝一夜,乘此晝夜成月及年彼壽千歲。夜摩等四隨次如人,二四八百千六百歲為一晝夜,乘此晝夜成月及年,如次彼壽二四八千萬六千歲。持雙以上日月並無,彼天云何建立晝夜及光明事?依何得成?依花開合建立晝夜,如拘物陀、鉢特摩等。又依諸鳥鳴靜差別,或依天眾寤寐不同,依自身光明成外光明事。已說欲界天壽短長。色界天中無晝夜別,但以劫數知壽短長。彼劫壽短長與身量數等,謂若身量半踰繕那,壽量半劫;若彼身量一踰繕那,壽量一劫;乃至身量長萬六千,壽量亦同萬六千劫。已說色界天壽短長。無色四天從下如次壽量二四六八萬劫。上所說劫其量云何?為壞為成?為中為大?少光以上大全為劫,自下諸天大半為劫。即由此故,說大梵王過梵輔天壽一劫半。謂以成住壞各二十中劫,六十中劫為一劫半,故以大半四十中劫為下三天所壽劫量。已說善趣壽量短長。惡趣云何?頌曰:

〔頌·正81–83 T29 0061c05〕   等活等上六,如次以欲天,
  壽為一晝夜,壽量亦同彼。
  極熱半中劫,無間中劫全,
  傍生極一中,鬼月日五百,
  頞部陀壽量,如一婆訶麻,
  百年除一盡,後後倍二十。
論曰:四大王等六欲天壽,如其次第為等活等六㮈落迦一晝一夜,壽量如次亦同彼天。謂四大王壽量五百,於等活地獄為一晝一夜,乘此晝夜成月及年,以如是年彼壽五百。乃至他化壽萬六千,於炎熱地獄為一晝一夜,乘此晝夜成月及年,彼壽如斯萬六千歲。極熱地獄壽半中劫,無間地獄壽一中劫。傍生壽量多無定限,若壽極長亦一中劫,謂難陀等諸大龍王。故世尊言:大龍有八,皆住一劫能持大地。鬼以人間一月為一日,乘此成月歲壽五百年。寒那落迦云何壽量?世尊寄喻顯彼壽言:如此人間佉梨二十成摩揭陀國一麻婆訶量,有置巨勝平滿其中,設復有能百年除一。如是巨勝易有盡期,生頞部陀壽量難盡。此二十倍為第二壽,如是後後二十倍增,是謂八寒地獄壽量。此諸壽量有中夭耶?頌曰:

〔頌·正84前半 T29 0061c28〕   諸處有中夭,除北俱盧洲。
論曰:諸處壽量皆有中夭,唯北俱盧定壽千歲。此約處說,非別有情,有別有情不中夭故。謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,及最後有佛記佛使隨信法行菩薩輪王,母懷彼二胎時,此等如應皆無中夭。

The canonical text stands in Chinese only. This edition renders the essence, the plain reading, the exposition and the apparatus into English — never the sūtra itself. Switch to 漢讀本 or 並行雙語 above to read it.

白話Plain reading

〔正45–47〕器世間怎麼安立——風輪、水輪、金輪三層底座

論(承前起問):前面已經把「有情世間」(住在世界裡的一切生命)說完了,接著要說「器世間」(承載這些生命的外在世界,好比盛物的器皿)。頌說:

:要安立器世間,最下面是風輪,它的廣度大到無法計數,厚度是十六洛叉(『洛叉』是印度的數目單位,古德說相當於漢地的『億』)。風輪之上是水輪,深十一億二萬;水輪的下面八洛叉仍是水,其餘的部分凝結成了金。這水輪與金輪的廣度,直徑十二洛叉三千四百半,周長是直徑的三倍。

:要承認這三千大千世界就是這樣安立起來的,其中形狀與大小各各不同。是這樣的:由於一切有情『業』的增上力量(『增上力』就是有壓倒性、作得了主的推動力),最下面依著虛空生出了風輪,廣度無法計數,厚十六億踰繕那(『踰繕那』是印度的長度單位,舊譯作『由旬』)。

這個風輪的體性極為堅密。假設有一位大諾健那(一種力氣極大的神),拿金剛輪奮力懸空擊下去,金剛輪會碎,風輪卻毫髮無損。

又由於一切有情業的增上力,興起大雲降雨,澆注在風輪之上,雨滴粗得像車軸一樣,積水就成了水輪。這水輪在還沒有凝結的階段,深十一億二萬踰繕那。

有人問:水輪為什麼不會向四邊流散呢?有一派論師說:是一切有情的業力所執持,使它不流散——就像人所吃喝的東西,還沒有消化變熟的時候,終究不會流走掉進熟藏(腸道)裡去。另有一派論師說:是靠風力執持才不流散,就像『篅』(用竹編的圓形穀倉)能把穀子圍住一樣。

由有情業力感召出另一種風生起,搏擊這水,把水面上層結成了金——就像煮熟的乳汁靜置之後,上面凝出一層乳膜。所以水輪就減少到只剩八洛叉厚,其餘的轉成了金,金的厚度是三億二萬。水輪與金輪這兩層的廣度數目相同,就是直徑十二億三千四百半。周長的數是直徑的三倍,也就是周長合計三十六億一萬三百五十踰繕那。頌說:

〔正48–51〕金輪上的九座大山

:正中央是蘇迷盧山,其次是踰健達羅、伊沙馱羅山、朅地洛迦山、蘇達梨舍那、頞濕縛羯拏、毘那怛迦山、尼民達羅山;在四大洲等等的外面,還有鐵輪圍山。前面七座山是金子造成的,蘇迷盧則是四種寶物造成的。這些山沒入水中的部分都是八萬,妙高山(就是蘇迷盧)露出水面的高度也是八萬,其餘八座則一座比一座低一半。每座山的寬度都與它露出水面的高度相等。

:在金輪之上有九座大山,妙高山王處在正中央,其餘八座周匝環繞著妙高山。八座山當中前七座叫作『內山』,第七座山之外才有四大洲等等;再往外,還有鐵輪圍山,像車輪的外框一樣把一個世界圍起來。

持雙山等七座山只由金子構成。妙高山王則以四種寶為體,依次是北面、東面、南面、西面,分別為金、銀、吠琉璃、頗胝迦寶(吠琉璃即青色寶石,頗胝迦即水晶)。由於寶物本身的威德,顏色會映現到空中,所以我們贍部洲上空看起來像吠琉璃的青色。

有人問:這些寶物又是從哪裡生出來的呢?答:一樣是一切有情業的增上力。又有大雲興起,降雨在金輪上,雨滴粗如車軸,積水奔騰如濤,這水就成了眾寶的『種』與『藏』。由於種種威德猛風的鑽擊,變化生出了眾寶之類。

這樣由水變生出寶物的時候,是『因滅而果生』,因與果的體並不同時存在——不像數論外道所主張的『轉變』那樣。

問:數論是怎麼主張轉變的意思呢?

〔數論答〕:他們主張有一個『有法』(作為承載者的實體)自性恆常存在,只是其中有的法生起、有的法滅去——這樣講轉變,有什麼道理上的違背嗎?

〔論主難〕:必定不可能有一個常住的法,卻又在它上面主張另外有法滅、有法生。

〔數論救〕:誰說在法之外另有一個『有法』呢?就是這個法本身在轉變的時候,作為不同相狀的所依,才叫作『有法』。

〔論主破〕:這樣講也不合理。

〔數論徵〕:哪裡不合理?

〔論主答〕:就是這個東西,卻又不像這個東西——這樣的說法,我從來沒聽過。

這樣變生出金寶等等之後,又由業力引起另一種風,把寶物等等分揀開來,聚攏成山、成洲;並且把水分成甘水與鹹水,各別成立內海與外海。

於是這九座山住在金輪之上,沒入水中的量都是八萬踰繕那,蘇迷盧山露出水面的高度也是如此。其餘八座露出水面的高度一半一半地遞減:最初的持雙山露出水面四萬,一直到最後的鐵輪圍山,露出水面三百一十二半。這九座山各自的寬度,都與自己露出水面的高度相同。頌說:

〔正52·正53〕山與山之間的八重海

:山與山之間有八重海,前七重叫作『內海』。最裡面那一重寬八萬,四邊各是它的三倍;其餘六重一重比一重窄一半。第八重叫作『外海』,寬三洛叉二萬二千踰繕那。

:以妙高山為最初、鐵輪圍山為最後,中間有八重海,前七重叫作內海。這七重海裡都具備八種功德的水:一是甘、二是冷、三是軟、四是輕、五是清淨、六是不臭、七是喝的時候不損傷咽喉、八是喝下去不傷腸胃。

這七重海,最裡面那一重寬八萬——這是就持雙山內側的一圈來計量的;在它的四面,各是三倍,也就是各成二億四萬踰繕那。其餘六重海的寬度一重比一重窄一半:第二重海寬四萬,一直到第七重寬一千二百五十。這裡不說周長,是因為數字太繁瑣了。

第八重叫作外海,裡面盈滿鹹水,寬三億二萬二千。頌說:

〔正54–57〕外海中的四大洲與八中洲

:外海當中四大洲的形狀是這樣的——南贍部洲像車子,三邊各二千,南邊只有三踰繕那半。東毘提訶洲,形狀像半月,三邊與贍部洲相同,東邊三百五十。西瞿陀尼洲,形狀圓滿沒有缺口,直徑二千五百,周長是它的三倍。北俱盧洲是正方形,每邊各二千,四邊相等。另外還有八個中洲,四大洲的兩側各有兩個。

:在外海之中有四個大洲,就在妙高山的四面。

南贍部洲北邊寬、南邊窄,另外三邊長度相等,形狀像一輛車。南邊只寬三踰繕那半,其餘三邊各有二千踰繕那。只有這個洲當中有『金剛座』,上面窮盡地面、下面抵住金輪。一切菩薩將要登上正覺的時候,都坐在這個座上生起『金剛喻定』(像金剛一樣能斷盡一切煩惱的最後一念定)——因為除此以外,再沒有其餘的所依與處所,具有足夠堅固的力量能承載這件事。

東勝身洲東邊窄、西邊寬,另外三邊長度相等,形狀像半月。東邊三百五十,其餘三邊各二千。

西牛貨洲圓得像滿月,直徑二千五百,周長七千半。

北俱盧洲形狀像方形的座,四邊長度相等,每邊各二千。頌裡說『等』字,是要表明四邊沒有一點增減。

隨著各洲的形狀,那裡的人的臉形也是這樣(洲圓則人面圓,洲方則人面方)。

另外還有八個中洲,是大洲的眷屬——四大洲的兩側各有兩個中洲。贍部洲旁邊的兩個中洲,一是遮末羅洲、二是筏羅遮末羅洲。勝身洲旁邊的兩個,一是提訶洲、二是毘提訶洲。牛貨洲旁邊的兩個,一是舍搋洲、二是嗢怛羅漫怛里拏洲。俱盧洲旁邊的兩個,一是矩拉婆洲、二是憍拉婆洲。這一切中洲都有人居住。另有一種說法:其中只有一個是邏剎娑(羅剎,一類非人)所居。頌說:

〔正58〕黑山、雪山、香醉山與無熱池

:贍部洲往北有九座黑山,雪山與香醉山之內,有無熱池,縱橫各五十踰繕那。

:這個贍部洲從中部往北,有三處地方各有三重黑山(三處各三重,合為九座)。黑山的北面有大雪山,大雪山的北面有香醉山。雪山之北、香山之南,有一座大池,名叫『無熱惱』,流出四條大河:一是殑伽河、二是信度河、三是徙多河、四是縛芻河。

無熱惱池縱橫正好相等,每邊各五十踰繕那,八功德水盈滿其中,不是得了神通的人就沒有辦法到達。在這池邊有『贍部林』,樹形高大,果實甘美——依這片林子而得名叫贍部洲,或者依這果子來立洲的名號。

那麼又在什麼地方安置㮈落迦(地獄)與大㮈落迦(大地獄)呢?它們有多大、有幾個呢?頌說:

〔正59·正60〕八大地獄、十六增與八寒地獄

:從這裡往下超過二萬,就是無間地獄,深度與寬度相同。它上面有七個㮈落迦。八個地獄的『增』都是十六個,就是煻煨、屍糞、鋒刃、烈河這四種增,各自安住在那八個地獄的四方。其餘還有八個寒地獄。

:這個贍部洲往下超過二萬,有阿鼻旨大㮈落迦(阿鼻旨即無間),深度與寬度同前面所說,都是二萬,所以它的底距離這裡有四萬踰繕那。因為在那裡受苦沒有間斷——不像其餘七個大㮈落迦受苦不是恆常的——所以叫作「無間」。

譬如在等活地獄當中,那些有情的身體雖然被種種砍刺磨搗,可是他們一遇到涼風吹來,就又活轉如初;由於這個道理,才立『等活』(重新一樣活過來)的名字。阿鼻旨當中沒有這種事。

另有一派論師說:阿鼻旨當中沒有『樂』來間隔『苦』,所以叫無間;其餘的地獄中還有樂夾雜生起——雖然那不是異熟果,卻是等流果(『異熟』是業直接感得的果報,『等流』是同類相續而來的餘勢)。

七個㮈落迦在無間地獄之上,一層層疊著住。那七個是什麼呢?一是極熱、二是炎熱、三是大叫、四是號叫、五是眾合、六是黑繩、七是等活。另有一種說法:這七個在無間地獄的旁邊。

八個㮈落迦的『增』各有十六個,所以薄伽梵(世尊)說了這樣一首頌:

〔引頌〕世尊所說的地獄頌,與十六增的內容

引頌:這八個㮈落迦,我說是極難超越的。地是熱鐵鑄成,四周圍著鐵牆,四面開四道門,用鐵扇關閉起來。巧妙地安排布置,各有十六個增,多達百踰繕那,裡面滿是造惡的人,周遍的火焰交相貫徹,猛火恆常熾燃。

:所謂十六增,是說八個㮈落迦的四面門外,各有四處——

一是『煻煨增』(煻煨即熱灰)。這個增裡面熱灰深及膝蓋,有情走進去,才一落腳,皮肉連血一起燒焦爛落;一抬腳,又重新長出來、恢復如初。

二是『屍糞增』。這個增裡面滿是屍體與糞便的泥漿,其中有很多『娘矩吒』蟲,嘴尖利得像針,身白頭黑;有情走進去,都被這種蟲鑽破皮、咬破骨頭,吸食他們的骨髓。

三是『鋒刃增』。這個增裡面又有三種:第一是『刀刃路』,就是在這裡面刀刃朝上鋪成大道,有情走上去,才一落腳,皮肉連血一起被割碎掉落;一抬腳,又重新長出來、恢復如初。第二是『劍葉林』,這片林子上面純粹以銛利的劍刃作為樹葉,有情走進去,風一吹葉子落下來,把他的肢體斬刺得骨肉零落,還有毛色斑駁的烏狗抓扯著吃他。第三是『鐵刺林』,這片林子上長著鋒利的鐵刺,有十六指長;有情被逼著上樹下樹的時候,那些刺尖銳地上下穿刺,還有鐵嘴的鳥來啄食有情的眼睛與心肝,爭著搶食。刀刃路等這三種雖然不同,但同樣是鐵造的刑具,所以合起來算作一個增。

四是『烈河增』。這個增的範圍寬廣,裡面滿是滾熱的鹹水;有情進到裡面,或者浮起、或者沉下,或者逆流、或者順流,或者橫著、或者打轉,被蒸被煮,骨肉糜爛。就像大鍋裡盛滿灰汁,放進麻子米粒等等,底下猛火燒著,麻米在裡面上下翻轉,整個爛掉;有情也是這樣。假設想要逃走,兩岸上有許多獄卒,手裡拿著刀槍攔阻趕回,沒有辦法出去。

這條烈河像護城的壕溝,前面三種則像園林。四面各有四個增,所以說總共十六。

這是『增上被刑害的地方』,所以叫作「增」——因為在本地獄裡剛被刑害過,又再一次遭受傷害。另有一種說法:有情從地獄出來以後又遭受這種苦,所以說是增。

現在在這裡由一個論題引出另一個論題:那些地獄卒是有情嗎?

有一種說法:不是有情。問:那怎麼會動作呢?答:由有情的業力所推動,就像世界成立時的那種風(也不必是誰在吹)。問:如果是這樣,那麼大德法善現所說的又該怎麼會通呢?他的頌是這樣說的:

〔引頌〕大德法善現之頌,與八寒地獄、餘處諸趣

引頌:心裡常懷著忿恨毒害,喜歡積集種種惡業,看見別人受苦反而欣喜,死後就作琰魔卒。

:琰魔王派遣那些邏剎娑,把有情丟進地獄裡去,這些才叫作『琰魔卒』——他們是真實的有情,但不是地獄當中直接殘害有情的那些;所以(直接行刑的)地獄卒並不是真實有情。

另有一種說法:(地獄卒)是有情。問:如果是這樣,他們這種惡業要在什麼地方受異熟果呢?答:就在地獄當中。因為地獄當中尚且容得下無間業所感的異熟果,這一點又有什麼道理可以遮止呢?問:如果是這樣,為什麼火燒不到他們?答:這一定是被業力隔開的緣故,或者是感得了不同的大種(構成身體的四大不同),所以不被燒。

熱㮈落迦已經說了有八個。此外還有另外八個寒㮈落迦。那八個是什麼呢?一是頞部陀、二是尼剌部陀、三是頞唽吒、四是臛臛婆、五是虎虎婆、六是嗢鉢羅、七是鉢特摩、八是摩訶鉢特摩。這裡面的有情被嚴寒逼迫,隨著身體與聲音的變化來立它們的名字。

這八個寒地獄一併位於贍部洲之下,就在前面所說的大地獄旁邊。

問:這個贍部洲的面積沒有多少,底下怎麼容得下無間地獄那麼大的東西呢?答:洲的形狀像堆起來的穀子,上面尖、下面闊,所以大海是越往下越窄、越往下越深(洲則越往下越闊)。

像上面所論的十六地獄,是一切有情共同的增上業所感。其餘的『孤地獄』則各由別業所招,或者許多人共住、或者兩人、或者一人所止,差別有很多種,處所也不固定——或者靠近江河山邊曠野,或者在地底、在空中以及其餘的地方。

諸地獄的安布就是這樣:本處在下面,支流分派則不固定。

傍生(畜生)的住處是水、陸、空三處,本處在大海,後來才流布到其餘地方。

諸鬼的本處是琰魔王國。在這個贍部洲底下超過五百踰繕那,有琰魔王國,縱橫的量也是五百,從這裡輾轉散布到其餘地方。(鬼趣之中)或者有端正莊嚴、具大威德的,享受種種富樂自在如同天人;或者有飢餓羸弱、面貌醜陋的。像這一類,經中有詳細的說法。

至於日月所居的處所與大小等等問題,頌說:

〔正61–63〕日月的高度、大小,與晝夜的增減

:日月在迷盧山的一半高處,直徑分別是五十一與五十。北洲夜半的時候,東洲日落、南洲日中、西洲日出,四洲相等。雨際的第二個月,後半的第九日起夜漸漸增長;寒際的第四個月也是這樣。夜減的時候晝就相反。晝夜每次增減一個臘縛。日在南路北路運行的緣故,月靠近日的時候被自己的影子遮住,所以看見月輪有缺。

:問:日月眾星依著什麼而住?答:依著風而住。就是一切有情業的增上力共同引起風生起,繞著妙高山在空中旋轉環行,運載執持日月等等,使它們不停下、不墜落。

問:它們所住的地方距離這裡有幾踰繕那?答:與持雙山頂齊平,也就是妙高山的一半高。

問:日月的直徑有幾踰繕那?答:日五十一,月只有五十。星最小的只有一俱盧舍(一種較小的長度單位),最大的十六踰繕那。

日輪的下面是頗胝迦寶中的火珠所成,能發熱、能照明;月輪的下面是頗胝迦寶中的水珠所成,能生冷、能照明。這是隨著有情的業增上力所生的,能對眼、身、果、花、莊稼、藥草等等事物,隨其所應地或者利益、或者損害。

問:只有一個日月普遍在四洲作它所該作的事,那麼一天所作的事,是四洲同時的嗎?答:不是。問:那是怎樣?答:北洲夜半的時候,東洲日落、南洲日中、西洲日出。這四個時刻是彼此相等(同時)的,其餘依此類推就可以知道。

日在這個洲上運行的路線有差別,所以使得晝夜有減有增。從雨際第二個月的後半第九日起,夜漸漸增長;從寒際第四個月的後半第九日起,夜漸漸減短。晝的增減與此相反:夜漸增的時候晝就漸減,夜若漸減晝就漸增。

問:晝夜增長的時候,一晝夜增多少?答:增一臘縛(一種很短的時間單位)。晝夜減少也是這樣。

日在這個洲上向南運行、向北運行,依次就使得夜增、晝增。

問:為什麼月輪在黑半的末尾、白半的開頭(陰曆月末月初)看起來有缺呢?答:《世施設》當中是這樣解釋的——因為月宮殿運行時靠近日輪,月被日輪的光所侵照,另一邊便發出影子遮住自己的月輪,使得那時候看起來不圓滿。先前的舊論師則解釋為:由於日月二輪運行的度數不同,才顯現出圓與缺。

問:日等宮殿是哪些有情居住?答:四大天王所統屬的天眾。問:這些天眾只住在這裡嗎?答:如果是空居天,就只住在日等宮殿裡;如果是地居天,就住在妙高山的各層級等處。

問:有幾個層級?它們的量是多少?哪些天住在哪一層級?頌說:

〔正64·正65〕妙高山的四層級與四大王眾天

:妙高山有四個層級,彼此相距各一萬。向旁邊伸出的寬度依次是一萬六千、八千、四千、二千。堅手、持鬘、恒憍與大王眾,依次住在四個層級,也住在其餘七座金山上。

:蘇迷盧山有四個層級:從水面起算到第一層,相距一萬踰繕那;這樣一直到從第三層到第四層,也是一萬。

這四個層級從妙高山向旁邊伸出、圍繞著山,占盡它的下半部。最初一層向旁伸出一萬六千,第二、第三、第四層依次是八千、四千、二千。

有一位藥叉神名叫堅手,住在最初一層;有一位名叫持鬘,住在第二層;有一位名叫恒憍,住在第三層。這三位都是四大天王所統屬的天眾。第四層是四大天王與各自的眷屬共同居住的地方,所以經中依此說『四大王眾天』。

就像妙高山四面的層級是四大王眾與眷屬所居,同樣地,持雙、持軸山等七座金山上也有天人居住,那是四大天王所統屬的封邑——這叫作『依地而住的四大王眾天』。在欲界諸天當中,這一重天的範圍最廣。

問:三十三天住在什麼地方?頌說:

〔正66–69〕三十三天與善見城

:妙高山頂每邊八萬,三十三天住在那裡。四個角各有一座山峰,是金剛手所住。中央的宮城名叫善見,周長一萬踰繕那,高一踰繕那半的金城,種種雜寶裝飾,地面柔軟。城中有一座殊勝殿,周長一千踰繕那。城外有四座苑莊嚴著,就是眾車、麁惡、雜林、喜林。四座妙池分居四方,各距苑二十。東北是圓生樹,西南是善法堂。

:三十三天住在迷盧山頂。山頂四面各八十千(八萬),與山下四邊的量沒有分別。另有一派論師說:(山頂)周長是八十千,並且分開說四邊各只有二萬。

山頂四個角各有一座山峰,高與寬各有五百。有一位藥叉神名叫金剛手,住在裡面守護諸天。

山頂中央有一座宮城名叫善見,每邊二千半,周長一萬踰繕那。金城的高度是一踰繕那半,地面平坦,也是真金所成,並用一百零一種雜寶嚴飾。地面觸感柔軟得像妬羅綿(一種樹果中所出的綿絮),踩上去時隨著腳而高低起伏。這是天帝釋所都的大城。

城中有一座殊勝殿,用種種妙寶具足莊嚴,因為勝過其餘天宮而叫作『殊勝』,每邊二百五十,周長一千踰繕那。以上是城中種種可愛的事物。

城外四面有四座苑莊嚴著,是那些天人共同遊戲的地方:一是眾車苑、二是麁惡苑、三是雜林苑、四是喜林苑,這是大城外部的裝飾莊嚴。四苑的四邊有四座妙池,中間各距離苑二十踰繕那,是那些天人殊勝的遊戲處,諸天在那裡比賽競勝、歡樂娛戲。

城外東北方有一株圓生樹,是三十三天享受欲樂最殊勝的地方。它盤結的樹根深廣五十踰繕那,聳直的樹幹向上生長,枝條向四旁鋪展,高與廣各有一百踰繕那。挺秀的葉子開出花來,妙香芬芳馥郁,順風可以熏滿一百踰繕那;若是逆風的時候,還能遍布五十。

問:順風可以這樣,怎麼還能逆風熏呢?有一派論師說:香並沒有逆著風熏的道理,只是依著『不超出樹的範圍』這一點,才說是逆風熏。按道理說,圓生樹確實有這樣的功德,它所流出的香氣能夠逆風而熏;雖然被天上調和之風的力量所壅遏,然而能夠相續不斷地流向其餘方位,只是漸漸變弱、漸漸微細,到不遠的地方就歇止了,不能像順風熏那樣遠達。

問:像這樣的花香,是依著自己的地方隨風相續轉到其餘方位去呢,還是只是熏了風、另外生起香氣呢?答:這件事沒有定論,諸位軌範師對這兩種說法都容許,沒有過失。

問:如果是這樣,那麼為什麼薄伽梵說:

〔引頌〕世尊的花香之頌,與善法堂

引頌:花的香氣不能逆風熏,根莖等等的香氣也是這樣;善士功德的香氣才芬芳馥郁,能逆著風流布美名遍於諸方。

:那是依據人間的香氣才這樣說的,因為世人共同了知的香確實沒有這種能耐。化地部所傳的經中說:這(圓生樹的)香氣順風熏滿一百踰繕那,如果沒有風的時候只遍布五十。

城外西南角有善法堂,三十三天時常聚集在那裡,詳細討論如法與不如法的事。

前面已經辨明三十三天所居的外器;其餘有色諸天所住的器又是怎樣呢?頌說:

〔正70前半〕三十三天以上,宮殿住在空中

:這以上的有色諸天,居住依託於空中的宮殿。

:前面所說的三十三天以上還有有色諸天,居住依託於空中的宮殿。

問:什麼叫作『上有色諸天』?答:就是夜摩天、覩史多天、樂變化天、他化自在天,以及前面所說的梵眾天等等共有十六處。連同前面(四大王眾天與三十三天),合起來有二十二重天,都依託外器而住。

在這樣所說的諸天眾當中,頌說:

〔正70後半〕六欲天行婬之相各不相同

:六欲天承受欲境,依次以交、抱、執手、笑、視為婬。

:只有六欲天承受微妙的欲境。其中最初二重是依地而住的天(四大王眾天與三十三天),形體交合而成婬,與人間沒有分別;不過風氣一泄,熱惱就消除了,不像人間還有其餘的不淨。夜摩天眾只要一相抱就成婬,覩史多天只要執手,樂變化天只要相對而笑,他化自在天只要互相注視就成婬。

毘婆沙師是這樣解釋的:六天都是以形體交合而成婬;《世施設》中說相抱等等,只是為了顯示他們(成婬所需)時間長短的差別。因為越往上的天,欲境越微妙、貪心越迅捷,所以才會這樣。

隨著那些天人的男女膝上,會忽然化生出童男童女,這就說是那位天所生的男女。

問:初生的天眾身量是怎樣?頌說:

〔正71前半〕初生天眾的身量

:(欲天)初生時像五歲到十歲的孩子,色界天初生時身量已經圓滿且具有天衣。

:六欲天初生的時候,依次像五歲、六歲、七歲、八歲、九歲、十歲的人,生下來身形很快就長成圓滿。色界天眾在初生的時候,身量就周遍圓滿,並具備微妙的衣服。

一切天眾都說『聖言』,也就是他們的言語與中印度相同。

問:欲生與樂生的分別應該怎麼理解?頌說:

〔正71後半〕欲生三種、樂生三種

:欲生有三種,通於人與天;樂生有三種,在九個處所。

:所謂欲生三種——

有一類有情,樂於承受現前的種種妙欲境,他們在這樣現成的欲境當中自在而轉,這就是全部人趣以及下面四重天(四大王眾天到覩史多天)。

有一類有情,樂於承受自己所變化出來的種種妙欲境,他們在自化的妙欲境中自在而轉,這只有第五重樂變化天。

有一類有情,樂於承受他人所變化出來的種種妙欲境,他們在他化的妙欲境中自在而轉,這是第六重他化自在天。

依據『承受如所生起的現前欲境』、依據『樂於承受自化欲境』、依據『樂於承受他化欲境』,所以在欲界當中分別出「欲生」的三種差別。

所謂樂生三種——在三個靜慮當中,於九個處所受生而領受三種樂:就是那些天人安住在『離生喜樂』(初靜慮)、『定生喜樂』(第二靜慮),以及由於離了喜而唯有樂(第三靜慮),長時安住、長時遠離苦、長時領受樂,所以叫作「樂生」。

(附一問):生在靜慮中間(大梵天所居)根本沒有喜樂,應當思量:為什麼也稱作樂生天呢?

問:前面所說的諸天二十二處,上下彼此相距的量是多少?頌說:

〔正72前半〕從某一天往上的距離,等於它往下的距離

:像那一重天距離下面的量有多少,它距離上面的數目也是這樣。

:每一重天中間相隔的踰繕那量,不容易一一數出來,只能總括地舉一個原則:那一重天距離下面的量有多少,距離上面也依此類推。

隨著從哪一重天算起,它距離下面大海的量有多少,它往上所能到達的距離就與往下相同。也就是說:妙高山從第四層級往下到大海是四萬踰繕那,那裡是四大天王本來的住處;那麼從那裡往上到三十三天,也就等於那一重天距離下面大海的量。像三十三天距離下面大海的量,往上到夜摩天的量也是如此。這樣一直到善見天距離下面大海的踰繕那量,從那裡往上到色究竟天,也與那一重天距離下面大海的量相等。

從此再往上就沒有居住之處了,這個地方最高,名叫『色究竟』。另有一派論師說:它名叫『礙究竟天』——他們所謂『礙』,是指積集起來的色;到了這裡質礙窮盡,所以得『究竟』之名。

問:生在下處的天人,能不能上昇、能不能看見上面?頌說:

〔正72後半〕除非有神通或依他力,下面的天不能上昇、不能見上

:除了神通力與依靠他力之外,下面的天不能上昇、不能看見上面。

:三十三天由自己的神通力,能從本處上昇到夜摩天;或者依靠他力,就是得神通的人以及上界天眾把他接引到夜摩天去。其餘諸天上昇的情形也依此類推。

若上天來下、或下天至上,則下方得見上天;至於下界下地之眼,則不能見上界上地之色。然而下面的眼不能看見上界、上地,因為那不是它的境界——就像感覺不到那上界的觸一樣。所以(上界天人)從上地來到下地的時候,不是自身親自來,一定要變作下地的化身。

另有一派論師說:那下地的天,隨自己意樂也能看見上地的色,就像生在這欲界能從下面看見上天一樣。

問:夜摩等天的宮殿依處,量有多大?有一派論師說:這上面四重天的依處,量與妙高山頂相同。另一派論師說:往上一重一重加倍遞增。另有論師說:初靜慮地的宮殿依處等於一個四大洲,第二靜慮等於一個小千世界,第三靜慮等於一個中千世界,第四靜慮等於一個大千世界。又有論師說:下面三個靜慮依次等於小千、中千、大千,第四靜慮的量沒有邊際。

問:要到什麼樣的量才說是小千、中千、大千呢?頌說:

〔正73·正74〕小千、中千、大千

:四大洲、日月、蘇迷盧、欲界諸天、梵世,各各一千個,叫作一個小千世界。這個小千再乘一千倍,叫作一個中千。這個中千再乘一千倍就是大千,都是同時成、同時壞。

:一千個四大洲乃至一千個梵世,這樣總說為一個小千。一千倍的小千叫作一個中千界。一千個中千界總名為一個大千。這樣的大千是同時成、同時壞的。同成同壞的相狀,後面(劫量章)會詳細辨明。

問:像外器的量各有差別那樣,身量也各有差別嗎?答:也有差別。問:是怎樣?頌說:

〔正75·正76·正77前半〕四洲人與諸天的身量

:贍部洲人的身量三肘半或四肘。東、西、北三洲的人依次一倍一倍地增加。欲界諸天以俱盧舍為單位,每一重加四分之一。色界諸天以踰繕那為單位,最初四重每次加半,這以上一重一重加倍,只有無雲天減去三。

:贍部洲人的身高多半是三肘半,其中少部分有長到四肘的。東勝身洲人身高八肘,西牛貨洲人十六肘,北俱盧洲人三十二肘。

欲界六天最下一重的身量是一俱盧舍的四分之一,這樣以後每一重各加四分之一,到第六重天身量是一俱盧舍半。

色界天的身量:最初梵眾天半踰繕那,梵輔天整一踰繕那,大梵天一踰繕那半,少光天整二踰繕那。這以上其餘諸天都一倍一倍地增加,只有無雲天要減去三踰繕那——也就是無量光天由二倍增到四,這樣一直到色究竟天增滿一萬六千。

問:身量既然各不相同,壽量有沒有分別呢?答:也有分別。問:是怎樣?頌說:

〔正77後半·正78–80〕人、欲天、色天、無色天的壽量

:北洲定壽一千年,西洲、東洲各減一半;這個贍部洲壽量不定,最後只有十歲,最初則無法計量。人間五十年是最下一重天的一晝夜,乘這個算下來壽五百年,上面五重一倍一倍地增加。色界沒有晝夜的分別,劫的數目與身量相等。無色界最初二萬劫,往後各加二萬。少光天以上與以下的天,分別以大劫的全數與半數為劫。

:北俱盧洲人定壽一千歲,西牛貨洲人壽五百歲,東勝身洲人壽二百五十歲,南贍部洲人壽沒有定限——劫減到最後,最長的壽命只有十歲;在劫初的時候,人壽無量,用百千等等數目都不能計量。

以上已經說了人間壽量的長短。

要先建立天上的晝夜,才可以計算天的壽命長短。問:天上怎麼建立晝夜?答:人間五十歲是六欲天中最下一重天的一晝一夜,乘這個晝夜三十天為一個月、十二個月為一年,那一重天壽命五百年。

上面五重欲天則逐漸加倍:人間一百歲是第二重天的一晝一夜,乘這個晝夜算成月與年,那一重天壽命一千歲。夜摩天等四重天,依次以人間二百、四百、八百、一千六百歲為一晝一夜,乘這個晝夜算成月與年,依次壽命是二千、四千、八千、一萬六千歲。

問:持雙山以上並沒有日月,那些天怎麼建立晝夜與光明的事呢?依靠什麼而成立?答:依花的開合建立晝夜,像拘物陀花、鉢特摩花等等;又依諸鳥鳴叫與安靜的差別,或者依天眾睡醒的不同;並依自身的光明來成就外在的光明。

以上已經說了欲界天壽命的長短。

色界天當中沒有晝夜的分別,只用劫的數目來知道壽命長短。他們的壽劫長短與身量的數目相等:如果身量半踰繕那,壽量就是半劫;如果身量一踰繕那,壽量就是一劫;乃至身量長一萬六千,壽量也同樣是一萬六千劫。

以上已經說了色界天壽命的長短。

無色界四天從下往上依次壽量二萬、四萬、六萬、八萬劫。

問:上面所說的『劫』,它的量是多少?是壞劫、成劫,是中劫、還是大劫呢?答:少光天以上用『大劫的全數』為劫,以下諸天用『大劫的一半』為劫。正因為這樣,才說大梵王超過梵輔天壽一劫半——也就是以成、住、壞各二十中劫,六十中劫為一劫半;所以用大劫之半的四十中劫,作為下面三重天所計壽劫的量。

以上已經說了善趣壽量的長短。惡趣又是怎樣?頌說:

〔正81–83〕地獄、傍生、鬼的壽量

:等活等上面六個地獄,依次以欲界諸天的壽命為一晝夜,壽量也與那些天相同。極熱地獄半中劫,無間地獄整一中劫。傍生最長一中劫。鬼以人間一月為一日,壽五百年。頞部陀的壽量,像一婆訶的麻,百年取出一粒直到取盡;往後各以二十倍遞增。

:四大王眾天等六重欲天的壽命,依次作為等活等六個㮈落迦的一晝一夜;而這六個地獄的壽量,依次也與那些天相同。也就是說:四大王眾天壽量五百年,這在等活地獄是一晝一夜,用這樣的晝夜算成月與年,以這樣的年計算,他們壽命五百年。乃至他化自在天壽一萬六千年,這在炎熱地獄是一晝一夜,用這樣的晝夜算成月與年,他們的壽命就是這樣的一萬六千歲。

極熱地獄壽半個中劫,無間地獄壽一個中劫。

傍生的壽量多半沒有定限;如果壽命極長的,也是一個中劫,就是難陀等等諸大龍王。所以世尊說:大龍有八位,都能住一劫、能執持大地。

鬼以人間一個月為一日,這樣乘算成月與年,壽五百年。

問:寒那落迦的壽量是怎樣?答:世尊寄託一個譬喻來顯示他們的壽命——就像人間二十佉梨成為摩揭陀國的一麻婆訶的量(『佉梨』與『婆訶』都是容量單位,一婆訶合二十佉梨),有人把巨勝(胡麻)平平地裝滿其中,假設又有人能夠一百年取走一粒;這樣胡麻容易有取盡的時候,生在頞部陀地獄的壽量卻難以窮盡。這個數目的二十倍就是第二重寒地獄的壽量,這樣往後各以二十倍遞增——這就是八個寒地獄的壽量。

問:這些壽量有中途夭折的嗎?頌說:

〔正84前半〕中夭,以及不會中夭的人

:各處都有中夭,只除去北俱盧洲。

:各處的壽量都有中途夭折的,只有北俱盧洲定壽一千歲。

不過這是就『處所』來說的,不是就個別有情說的——因為另有一些有情是不會中夭的。就是說:住在覩史多天的一生所繫菩薩(只剩一生就要成佛的菩薩),以及最後有身的、佛所授記的、佛所差使的、隨信行者、隨法行者,還有懷著菩薩胎與輪王胎的母親——這些人依其所應,都沒有中夭。


〔Roots 45–47〕How the Receptacle World Is Established — the Three-Tiered Base of Wind Circle, Water Circle, and Golden Circle

Treatise (taking up the question from what precedes): Above, the “world of sentient beings” (all the lives that dwell within the world) has been stated in full; next the “receptacle world” is to be stated (the outer world that bears those lives, like a vessel that holds what is put into it). The stanza says:

Stanza: To establish the receptacle world: lowest of all is the wind circle, whose breadth is so great that it cannot be numbered and whose thickness is sixteen lakṣa (“lakṣa” is an Indian unit of number, which the ancient masters say answers to the Chinese term for a hundred thousand). Above the wind circle is the water circle, eleven hundred thousand and twenty thousand deep; the lower eight lakṣa of it remain water, and the rest has congealed into gold. As for the breadth of this water circle and golden circle, the diameter is twelve hundred thousand three thousand four hundred and a half, and the circumference is three times the diameter.

Treatise: One should grant that this three-thousandfold great-thousand world-sphere is established in just this way, and that within it the shapes and sizes differ one from another. It is thus: by the dominant force of the “action” of all sentient beings (“dominant force” means a driving power that overrides all else and can determine the outcome), lowest of all and resting upon space a wind circle arises, of breadth beyond numbering and sixteen hundred thousand yojanas thick (“yojana” is an Indian unit of length, called youxun in the older translation).

The nature of this wind circle is exceedingly firm and dense. Suppose a great Mahānagna (a god of enormous strength) were to take a vajra wheel and, hurling it down through the air with all his might, strike the wind circle: the vajra wheel would shatter and the wind circle would not be harmed by so much as a hair.

Again, by the dominant force of the actions of all sentient beings, great clouds arise and rain falls, pouring down upon the wind circle in drops as thick as a chariot axle, and the water that gathers becomes the water circle. At the stage when this water circle has not yet congealed, it is eleven hundred thousand and twenty thousand yojanas deep.

Someone asks: why does the water circle not flow away on every side? One party of masters says: it is held by the force of the actions of all sentient beings so that it does not flow away — just as what a person eats and drinks, so long as it has not yet been digested and ripened, never in the end flows away and falls into the receptacle of the digested (the intestines). Another party of masters says: it is held by the force of wind so that it does not flow away, just as a chuan (a round granary woven of bamboo) can pen the grain in.

Called forth by the force of the actions of sentient beings, another wind arises and beats upon this water, congealing its upper surface into gold — just as, when boiled milk is left standing, a film of cream congeals upon the top. So the water circle is reduced until only eight lakṣa remain, the rest having turned to gold, the thickness of the gold being three hundred thousand and twenty thousand. The breadths of these two circles, of water and of gold, are equal in number, namely a diameter of twelve hundred thousand three thousand four hundred and a half. The number of the circumference is three times the diameter, that is, the circumference comes in all to thirty-six hundred thousand ten thousand three hundred and fifty yojanas. The stanza says:

〔Roots 48–51〕The Nine Great Mountains upon the Golden Circle

Stanza: At the very center is Mount Sumeru; next Yugandhara, Mount Īṣādhara, Mount Khadiraka, Sudarśana, Aśvakarṇa, Mount Vinataka, Mount Nimindhara; and outside the four great continents and the rest there is further the Iron Circle Mountain. The first seven mountains are made of gold, while Sumeru is made of four kinds of jewel. The portion of these mountains sunk in the water is in every case eighty thousand, and the height by which the Sublime and Lofty Mountain (that is, Sumeru) stands out of the water is likewise eighty thousand, while of the remaining eight each is lower than the one before it by half. The breadth of each mountain is equal to the height by which it stands out of the water.

Treatise: Upon the golden circle there are nine great mountains. The Sublime and Lofty Mountain King stands at the very center, and the remaining eight encircle the Sublime and Lofty round about. Among these eight the first seven are called “the inner mountains”; only outside the seventh mountain are there the four great continents and the rest; and further out again there is the Iron Circle Mountain, which encircles one world-sphere as the rim encircles a wheel.

The seven mountains beginning with Upholding the Pair are constituted of gold alone. The Sublime and Lofty Mountain King has four kinds of jewel for its entity, namely, on the north, east, south, and west sides in order, gold, silver, vaiḍūrya, and sphaṭika jewel (vaiḍūrya is the blue gemstone, sphaṭika is crystal). Through the majestic power of the jewels themselves their color is reflected into the sky, and so the sky above our Jambudvīpa looks like the blue of vaiḍūrya.

Someone asks: and from what are these jewels produced? Answer: from the very same dominant force of the actions of all sentient beings. Great clouds arise again and rain upon the golden circle in drops thick as a chariot axle, and the water that gathers surges like billows; and this water becomes the “seed” and the “store” of the several jewels. Then, through the drilling and beating of manifold winds of majestic violence, the several kinds of jewel are produced by transformation.

When jewels are thus produced by transformation out of water, this is a case of “the cause ceasing and the result arising,” the entities of cause and result not existing at one and the same time — unlike the “transmutation” maintained by the Sāṃkhya non-Buddhists.

Question: how do the Sāṃkhya maintain the sense of transmutation?

〔Sāṃkhya answer〕: They maintain that there is a “possessor of dharmas” (a real substance serving as the bearer) whose own nature exists permanently, and that within it some dharmas arise and some dharmas cease — what, on such an account of transmutation, is contrary to principle?

〔The author objects〕: There can never be a permanently abiding dharma of which it is at the same time maintained that other dharmas cease and arise upon it.

〔Sāṃkhya defends〕: Who says that there is a “possessor of dharmas” apart from the dharma? It is just this dharma itself that, at the time of transmutation, serves as the support of differing characteristics, and is on that account called the possessor of dharmas.

〔The author refutes〕: Put in that way it is still contrary to principle.

〔Sāṃkhya challenges〕: In what way contrary to principle?

〔The author answers〕: That it should be this very thing and yet not be thus — such a statement I have never heard.

After gold and the jewels have been produced by transformation in this way, the force of action gives rise to yet another wind, which sorts the jewels and the rest apart and gathers them into mountains and into continents; and it divides the water into sweet and salt, establishing the inner seas and the outer sea separately.

So these nine mountains stand upon the golden circle, the measure of each sunk in the water being eighty thousand yojanas, and the height by which Mount Sumeru stands out of the water being the same. The heights by which the remaining eight stand out of the water decrease by half and half: the first, Upholding the Pair, stands out of the water forty thousand, and so on down to the last, the Iron Circle Mountain, which stands out of the water three hundred and twelve and a half. The breadth of each of these nine mountains is the same as the height by which it itself stands out of the water. The stanza says:

〔Root 52 · Root 53〕The Eight Seas between Mountain and Mountain

Stanza: Between mountain and mountain there are eight seas, of which the first seven are called “the inner seas.” The innermost of them is eighty thousand broad, and on each of its four sides three times as much; the remaining six are each narrower than the one before by half. The eighth is called “the outer sea,” three lakṣa twenty-two thousand yojanas broad.

Treatise: With the Sublime and Lofty first and the Iron Circle Mountain last, there are eight seas in between, of which the first seven are called the inner seas. In all seven of these seas there is water possessed of eight qualities: first sweet, second cool, third soft, fourth light, fifth pure, sixth free of foul odor, seventh not hurting the throat when it is drunk, and eighth not harming the belly once it has been drunk.

Of these seven seas the innermost is eighty thousand broad — this being measured along the ring on the inner side of Upholding the Pair; and on each of its four sides it is three times as much, that is, two hundred thousand and forty thousand yojanas on each. The breadths of the remaining six seas are each narrower than the one before by half: the second sea is forty thousand broad, and so on down to the seventh, which is one thousand two hundred and fifty. The circumferences are not stated here, because the figures would be too cumbersome.

The eighth is called the outer sea, filled to the brim with salt water, three hundred thousand and twenty-two thousand broad. The stanza says:

〔Roots 54–57〕The Four Great Continents and the Eight Intermediate Continents in the Outer Sea

Stanza: Within the outer sea the shapes of the four great continents are these — Jambudvīpa in the south is like a chariot, its three sides two thousand each, its south side only three and a half yojanas. The continent of Videha in the east is shaped like a half-moon, its three sides the same as Jambudvīpa’s, its east side three hundred and fifty. The continent of Godānīya in the west is perfectly round and without a gap, its diameter two thousand five hundred and its circumference three times as much. Uttarakuru in the north is exactly square, each side two thousand, the four sides equal. Besides these there are eight intermediate continents, two on either flank of each of the four great continents.

Treatise: Within the outer sea there are four great continents, situated at the four sides of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain.

Jambudvīpa in the south is broad on the north and narrow on the south, its other three sides equal in length, and it is shaped like a chariot. Its south side is only three and a half yojanas broad, while its other three sides are two thousand yojanas each. In this continent alone is there the “vajra seat,” which reaches up to the surface of the ground and down to the golden circle. All bodhisattvas, when they are about to ascend to perfect awakening, sit upon this seat and arouse the “vajra-like concentration” (the final moment of concentration which, like a vajra, can cut off every affliction) — for apart from this there is no other support and no other place possessed of firmness enough to bear such a thing.

The continent of Videha in the east is narrow on the east and broad on the west, its other three sides equal in length, and it is shaped like a half-moon. Its east side is three hundred and fifty, and its other three sides two thousand each.

The continent of Godānīya in the west is round like a full moon, its diameter two thousand five hundred and its circumference seven thousand five hundred.

Uttarakuru in the north is shaped like a square seat, its four sides equal in length, each side two thousand. The word “equal” in the stanza is meant to make plain that among the four sides there is not the least increase or decrease.

According as each continent has its shape, so likewise are the faces of the people there (where the continent is round the faces are round, where the continent is square the faces are square).

Besides these there are eight intermediate continents, which are the retinue of the great continents — two intermediate continents on either flank of each of the four great continents. The two intermediate continents at the flank of Jambudvīpa are, first, the continent of Cāmara and, second, the continent of Varacāmara. The two at the flank of the continent of Videha are, first, the continent of Deha and, second, the continent of Videha. The two at the flank of the continent of Godānīya are, first, the continent of Śāṭha and, second, the continent of Uttaramantriṇa. The two at the flank of Uttarakuru are, first, the continent of Kurava and, second, the continent of Kaurava. All these intermediate continents are inhabited by human beings. There is another account: that one of them alone is inhabited by rākṣasas (a class of non-human beings). The stanza says:

〔Root 58〕The Black Mountains, the Snow Mountain, the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance, and the Lake Without Heat

Stanza: North of Jambudvīpa there are nine black mountains, and within the Snow Mountain and the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance there is the Lake Without Heat, fifty yojanas each way.

Treatise: In this Jambudvīpa, going north from the middle, there are three places each of which has three ranges of black mountains (three places with three ranges each, making nine in all). North of the black mountains is the Great Snow Mountain, and north of the Great Snow Mountain is the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance. North of the Snow Mountain and south of the Fragrance Mountain there is a great lake named Without Heat and Torment, from which four great rivers flow out: first the river Gaṅgā, second the river Sindhu, third the river Sītā, fourth the river Vakṣu.

The Lake Without Heat and Torment is exactly equal in length and breadth, each side being fifty yojanas, and is filled to the brim with water possessed of the eight qualities; none but a person who has attained the supernormal powers has any way of reaching it. At the edge of this lake there is a “Jambu grove,” the trees tall of form and the fruit sweet to the taste — the continent is named Jambudvīpa from this grove, or else its name is established from this fruit.

In what place, then, are the narakas (the hells) and the great narakas (the great hells) situated? How large are they, and how many? The stanza says:

〔Root 59 · Root 60〕The Eight Great Hells, the Sixteen Increases, and the Eight Cold Hells

Stanza: Going down from here past twenty thousand is the Unremitting hell, its depth and its breadth the same. Above it there are seven narakas. The “Increases” of the eight hells are sixteen in all, that is, the four Increases of hot ashes, of corpses and dung, of blades, and of the fierce river, each set standing at the four sides of those eight hells. Besides these there are eight cold hells.

Treatise: Going down from this Jambudvīpa past twenty thousand there is the great naraka Avīci (Avīci means the Unremitting), whose depth and breadth are as stated above, both twenty thousand, so that its floor is forty thousand yojanas from here. Because suffering is undergone there without remission — unlike the remaining seven great narakas, where the undergoing of suffering is not constant — it is called “the Unremitting.”

For instance, in the hell of Equal Reviving, although the bodies of those sentient beings are hacked, pierced, ground, and pounded in every way, yet as soon as they meet a cool wind blowing upon them they revive again as they were at first; and it is on this ground that the name “Equal Reviving” (living again just as before) is established. In Avīci there is no such thing.

Another party of masters says: in Avīci there is no “pleasure” to come between the sufferings, and it is for that reason called the Unremitting; whereas in the remaining hells there is pleasure arising mixed in — and although that is not a maturation result, it is a homogeneous result (“maturation” is the retribution called forth directly by action, “homogeneous” is the residual momentum that follows on within the same kind).

The seven narakas are above the Unremitting hell, dwelling one piled upon another. What are those seven? First Extreme Heat, second Burning Heat, third Great Howling, fourth Howling, fifth Massed Crushing, sixth the Black Rope, seventh Equal Reviving. There is another account: that these seven are at the flank of the Unremitting hell.

The “Increases” of the eight narakas are sixteen in all, and so the Bhagavat (the World-Honored One) spoke a stanza in these words:

〔Quoted Stanza〕The Stanza on the Hells Spoken by the World-Honored One, and the Content of the Sixteen Increases

Quoted stanza: These eight narakas, I say, are exceedingly hard to pass beyond. The ground is cast of hot iron, iron walls encircle it round about, on the four sides four gates open, and they are shut fast with leaves of iron. Skillfully laid out and disposed, they have sixteen Increases each, as many as a hundred yojanas, filled within with those who have done evil, pierced through and through by flames on every side, and fierce fire burns there without ceasing.

Treatise: The sixteen Increases means that outside the gates on the four sides of the eight narakas there are four places each —

The first is the “Increase of Hot Ashes” (hot ashes being embers). Within this Increase the hot ashes are knee-deep; when a sentient being walks into it, at the very first setting down of a foot the skin and flesh together with the blood are scorched, festered, and fall away; and at the lifting of the foot they grow again and are restored as before.

The second is the “Increase of Corpses and Dung.” This Increase is filled with a mire of corpses and dung, in which there are many nyaṅkuṭa worms, their mouths as sharp as needles, their bodies white and their heads black; and sentient beings who walk into it are all bored through the skin and gnawed through the bone by these worms, which suck out their marrow.

The third is the “Increase of Blades.” Within this Increase there are three further kinds. The first is the “Road of Sword Blades,” where sword blades are laid edge upward to form a great road, and when a sentient being walks upon it, at the very first setting down of a foot the skin and flesh together with the blood are cut to pieces and fall away, and at the lifting of the foot they grow again and are restored as before. The second is the “Forest of Sword Leaves,” a forest upon which sharp sword blades serve as the leaves and nothing else; when a sentient being walks into it and the wind blows and the leaves fall, his limbs and body are hacked and pierced until bone and flesh are strewn about, and there are besides piebald crows and dogs that seize and tear at him and eat him. The third is the “Forest of Iron Thorns,” a forest that grows sharp iron thorns sixteen finger-breadths long; and when a sentient being is driven up the tree and down again, those thorns pierce keenly upward and downward, and there are besides iron-beaked birds that come to peck out the sentient being’s eyes, heart, and liver, contending for the food. Although these three, the Road of Sword Blades and the rest, differ one from another, they are alike instruments of punishment made of iron, and so together they are reckoned as one Increase.

The fourth is the “Increase of the Fierce River.” The extent of this Increase is broad and wide, and it is filled with boiling salt water; sentient beings who enter it float or sink, go against the current or with it, drift crosswise or spin about, and are steamed and boiled until bone and flesh are pulped away. It is as when a great cauldron is filled with lye and sesame and grains of rice and the like are put in, with a fierce fire burning beneath, and the sesame and rice turn over and over within it, up and down, and are wholly pulped away; sentient beings are just so. Should they wish to escape, upon the two banks there are many hell warders holding knives and spears in their hands who bar them and drive them back, so that there is no way out.

This fierce river is like a moat guarding a city wall, while the first three are like a garden park. On each of the four sides there are four Increases, and so they are said to be sixteen in all.

This is “a place of being punished over and above,” and hence it is called an “Increase” — because, having just been punished in the hell proper, one suffers injury there once again. There is another account: that sentient beings undergo this suffering after they have come out of the hell, and it is therefore called an Increase.

Now here a discussion arises from the discussion: are those hell warders sentient beings?

There is one account: they are not sentient beings. Question: how then do they move and act? Answer: they are driven by the force of the actions of sentient beings, like the wind at the time when a world is being formed (there need be no one blowing it). Question: if so, how is what the Venerable Dharmasubhūti said to be reconciled with this? His stanza runs thus:

〔Quoted Stanza〕The Stanza of the Venerable Dharmasubhūti, and the Eight Cold Hells and the Destinies of the Other Places

Quoted stanza: Whose heart harbors always rage and venom, who delights to heap up every kind of evil action, who sees the suffering of others and rejoices at it — he becomes at death a warder of Yama.

Treatise: King Yama sends those rākṣasas to cast sentient beings into the hells, and these alone are what are called “the warders of Yama” — they are real sentient beings, but they are not those who inflict the injuries directly upon sentient beings within the hells; and so the hell warders (those who carry out the punishments directly) are not real sentient beings.

There is another account: they are sentient beings. Question: if so, in what place do they undergo the maturation result of such evil actions? Answer: within the hells themselves. Since the hells can hold even the maturation result called forth by actions without interval, what principle is there to block this? Question: if so, why does the fire not burn them? Answer: this is certainly because they are shut off by the force of action, or else because they have called forth different great elements (the four great elements that constitute their bodies being different), and so are not burned.

Of hot narakas it has been said that there are eight. Besides these there are eight further cold narakas. What are those eight? First Arbuda, second Nirarbuda, third Aṭaṭa, fourth Hahava, fifth Huhuva, sixth Utpala, seventh Padma, eighth Mahāpadma. The sentient beings within them are oppressed by bitter cold, and their names are established according to the changes of body and of voice.

These eight cold hells all lie beneath Jambudvīpa together, just at the flank of the great hells spoken of above.

Question: the area of this Jambudvīpa is not great; how can what is beneath it hold anything so large as the Unremitting hell? Answer: the continent is shaped like a heap of piled grain, pointed above and wide below, and so the great sea grows narrower and deeper the further down one goes (while the continent grows wider the further down one goes).

The sixteen hells discussed above are called forth by the dominant action shared by all sentient beings. The remaining “solitary hells” are summoned each by a separate action, and are dwelt in by many together, or by two, or by one, with differences of many kinds and no fixed place — whether near a river or a mountainside or in the wilderness, or underground, or in the sky, or in yet other places.

Such is the disposition of the hells: the base place is below, while the branches and offshoots are not fixed.

The dwelling places of animals (beasts) are the three of water, land, and air; their base place is the great sea, and only later did they spread abroad to other places.

The base place of the ghosts is the realm of King Yama. Five hundred yojanas down beneath this Jambudvīpa there is the realm of King Yama, its measure likewise five hundred each way, and from there they have spread by degrees and settled in other places. (Among the destiny of ghosts) there are some upright and majestic and possessed of great dignity, who enjoy every kind of wealth and pleasure in sovereign freedom like the gods; and there are some who are hungry and gaunt and ugly of countenance. Of this class the sūtras have a detailed account.

As for the questions of the places where the sun and moon are situated and of their sizes and the like, the stanza says:

〔Roots 61–63〕The Height and Size of the Sun and Moon, and the Increase and Decrease of Day and Night

Stanza: The sun and moon are at half the height of Meru, their diameters fifty-one and fifty respectively. When it is midnight in the northern continent, the sun is setting in the eastern continent, at midday in the southern, and rising in the western, and the four continents are equal. In the second month of the rainy season, from the ninth day of the latter half, the night gradually lengthens; and so it is in the fourth month of the cold season. When the night decreases the day does the opposite. Each time day and night increase or decrease, it is by one lava. Because the sun travels a southern course and a northern course; and because the moon, when it draws near the sun, is covered by its own shadow, the disc of the moon is seen to have a gap.

Treatise: Question: upon what do the sun, the moon, and the host of stars rest? Answer: they rest upon wind. That is, the dominant force of the actions of all sentient beings together gives rise to a wind, which turns and circles through the sky around the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, carrying and upholding the sun and moon and the rest so that they neither stop nor fall.

Question: how many yojanas is the place where they rest distant from here? Answer: level with the summit of Upholding the Pair, which is half the height of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain.

Question: how many yojanas are the diameters of the sun and moon? Answer: the sun fifty-one, the moon only fifty. The smallest of the stars is only one krośa (a smaller unit of length), the largest sixteen yojanas.

The underside of the sun’s disc is constituted of the fire-pearl among sphaṭika jewels, and can give heat and give light; the underside of the moon’s disc is constituted of the water-pearl among sphaṭika jewels, and can give cold and give light. These are produced according to the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings, and upon eyes, bodies, fruits, flowers, crops, medicinal herbs, and the like they work benefit or harm, each as is fitting.

Question: since one sun and moon alone do what they have to do throughout the four continents, is what they do in one day done in the four continents at the same time? Answer: no. Question: how then? Answer: when it is midnight in the northern continent, the sun is setting in the eastern continent, at midday in the southern, and rising in the western. These four moments are equal to one another (simultaneous), and the rest may be known on this pattern.

The sun’s course over this continent has its differences, and this is what makes day and night decrease and increase. From the ninth day of the latter half of the second month of the rainy season, the night gradually lengthens; from the ninth day of the latter half of the fourth month of the cold season, the night gradually shortens. The increase and decrease of the day are the opposite of this: when the night gradually increases the day gradually decreases, and if the night gradually decreases the day gradually increases.

Question: when day and night lengthen, by how much does one day and night increase? Answer: it increases by one lava (a very short unit of time). Their decrease is likewise.

The sun travels southward and travels northward over this continent, and thereby makes the night increase and the day increase in turn.

Question: why is the moon’s disc seen to have a gap at the end of the dark half and the beginning of the bright half (the end and the beginning of a lunar month)? Answer: the Designations of the World explains it thus — because as the palace of the moon travels it draws near the disc of the sun, and the moon is encroached upon and lit by the light of the sun’s disc, while on its other side it puts forth a shadow that covers its own disc, so that at that time it is seen not to be full. The masters of old, however, explained it thus: it is because the two discs of sun and moon differ in the degrees of their courses that fullness and gap appear.

Question: what sentient beings inhabit the palaces of the sun and the rest? Answer: the host of gods belonging to the four great heavenly kings. Question: do these gods dwell only here? Answer: if they are gods dwelling in space, they dwell only in the palaces of the sun and the rest; if they are gods dwelling on the ground, they dwell on the several terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the like.

Question: how many terraces are there? What are their measures? Which gods dwell on which terrace? The stanza says:

〔Root 64 · Root 65〕The Four Terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings

Stanza: The Sublime and Lofty Mountain has four terraces, each distant from the next by ten thousand. The breadths by which they jut out sideways are, in order, sixteen thousand, eight thousand, four thousand, and two thousand. Firm Hand, Garland Holder, Ever Proud, and the Multitude of the Great Kings dwell in order upon the four terraces, and dwell also upon the remaining seven golden mountains.

Treatise: Mount Sumeru has four terraces: reckoning from the surface of the water up to the first terrace, the distance is ten thousand yojanas; and so on, up to the distance from the third terrace to the fourth, which is likewise ten thousand.

These four terraces jut out sideways from the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and encircle it, taking up the whole of its lower half. The first juts out sideways sixteen thousand, and the second, third, and fourth in order eight thousand, four thousand, and two thousand.

There is a yakṣa god named Firm Hand, who dwells on the first terrace; one named Garland Holder, who dwells on the second; one named Ever Proud, who dwells on the third. All three of these belong to the host of gods of the four great heavenly kings. The fourth terrace is the place where the four great heavenly kings dwell together with their several retinues, and it is on this ground that the sūtras speak of “the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings.”

Just as the terraces on the four sides of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain are inhabited by the Multitude of the Four Great Kings and their retinues, so likewise upon the seven golden mountains, Upholding the Pair, Upholding the Axle, and the rest, there are gods dwelling, and those are fiefs belonging to the four great heavenly kings — this is called “the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings that dwells in dependence on the ground.” Among the gods of the desire realm, the extent of this heaven is the widest.

Question: in what place does the Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwell? The stanza says:

〔Roots 66–69〕The Heaven of the Thirty-Three and the City Fair to Behold

Stanza: The summit of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain is eighty thousand on each side, and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwells there. At each of the four corners there is a peak, which is where Vajra-Hand dwells. The palace city at the center is named Fair to Behold, its circumference ten thousand yojanas, a golden city wall a yojana and a half high, adorned with jewels of every kind, its ground soft to the touch. Within the city there is a Hall of Surpassing Excellence, one thousand yojanas in circumference. Outside the city four parks adorn it, namely Many Chariots, Coarse and Harsh, Mixed Groves, and the Grove of Joy. Four excellent pools lie one on each of the four sides, each twenty from its park. To the northeast is the Round-Growth Tree, to the southwest the Hall of Good Dharma.

Treatise: The Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwells on the summit of Mount Meru. The summit is eighty thousand on each of its four sides, no different in measure from the four sides at the mountain’s foot. Another party of masters says: (the summit) is eighty thousand in circumference, and they state separately that each of the four sides is only twenty thousand.

At each of the four corners of the summit there is a peak, five hundred in height and in breadth. There is a yakṣa god named Vajra-Hand who dwells within them and guards the gods.

At the center of the summit there is a palace city named Fair to Behold, two thousand five hundred on each side and ten thousand yojanas in circumference. The height of the golden city wall is a yojana and a half; the ground is level and is likewise constituted of true gold, and it is adorned with a hundred and one kinds of jewel. The ground is soft to the touch as tūla floss (a floss that comes out of the fruit of a certain tree), and when one treads upon it, it rises and sinks with the foot. This is the great capital city of Śakra, lord of the gods.

Within the city there is a Hall of Surpassing Excellence, fully adorned with every kind of excellent jewel; because it surpasses the other palaces of the gods it is called “Surpassing Excellence.” It is two hundred and fifty on each side, and one thousand yojanas in circumference. So much for the several delightful things within the city.

Outside the city, on its four sides, there are four parks that adorn it, the places where those gods disport themselves together: first the Park of Many Chariots, second the Coarse and Harsh Park, third the Park of Mixed Groves, fourth the Park of the Grove of Joy; these are the outer ornament and adornment of the great city. On the four sides of the four parks there are four excellent pools, each twenty yojanas away from its park in between, and these are the excellent playgrounds of those gods, where the gods vie with one another and take their pleasure and sport.

Northeast of the city there is a Round-Growth Tree, the most excellent place where the Heaven of the Thirty-Three enjoy the pleasures of desire. Its coiling roots are fifty yojanas deep and broad; its towering trunk grows upward and its branches spread out on every side, its height and its breadth being a hundred yojanas each. Its slender leaves put forth flowers, whose excellent fragrance is rich and pervading, and with the wind it can perfume a hundred yojanas; and when the wind is against it, it still extends over fifty.

Question: with the wind it may be so, but how can it perfume against the wind? One party of masters says: fragrance has no principle by which it perfumes against the wind; it is only in dependence upon its “not passing beyond the bounds of the tree” that it is said to perfume against the wind. In truth of principle, the Round-Growth Tree does have such a quality, and the fragrance that streams from it is able to perfume against the wind; and although it is dammed back by the force of the harmonious winds of the heavens, yet it can stream on unbroken in continuity toward other quarters, only growing weaker and subtler by degrees until it stops at no great distance, and cannot reach so far as when it perfumes with the wind.

Question: does a flower fragrance of this kind, resting in its own place, turn on in continuity with the wind toward other quarters, or does it merely perfume the wind so that a fragrance arises separately? Answer: this matter has no settled conclusion; the preceptors allow both accounts and find no fault in either.

Question: if so, why then did the Bhagavat say:

〔Quoted Stanza〕The World-Honored One’s Stanza on the Fragrance of Flowers, and the Hall of Good Dharma

Quoted stanza: The fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and the fragrance of roots and stems and the rest is likewise; but the fragrance of a good man’s qualities is rich and pervading, and against the wind streams its fair name abroad through every quarter.

Treatise: That was said with respect to the fragrances of the human world, for the fragrances commonly known to people of the world truly have no such power. A sūtra transmitted by the Mahīśāsakas says: this fragrance (of the Round-Growth Tree) perfumes a hundred yojanas with the wind, and when there is no wind extends over fifty only.

At the southwest corner outside the city is the Hall of Good Dharma, where the Heaven of the Thirty-Three assemble from time to time and discuss in detail what is according to the Dharma and what is not.

The outer receptacle inhabited by the Heaven of the Thirty-Three has now been analyzed; what then of the receptacles inhabited by the remaining gods possessed of form? The stanza says:

〔First Half of Root 70〕Above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, the Palaces Dwell in Space

Stanza: The gods possessed of form above this dwell in dependence upon palaces in space.

Treatise: Above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three spoken of above there are still gods possessed of form, who dwell in dependence upon palaces in space.

Question: what is meant by “the gods possessed of form above”? Answer: the Yāma Heaven, the Tuṣita Heaven, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations, and the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, together with the Brahmakāyika Heaven and the rest spoken of above, sixteen places in all. Together with the foregoing (the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three), there are twenty-two heavens in all, and all of them dwell in dependence upon an outer receptacle.

Among the hosts of gods thus spoken of, the stanza says:

〔Second Half of Root 70〕The Manner of Sexual Union Differs among the Six Heavens of Desire

Stanza: The six heavens of desire undergo the objects of desire, and their sexual union is, in order, by intercourse, embracing, holding hands, laughing, and looking.

Treatise: Only the six heavens of desire undergo excellent objects of desire. Of these, the first two are the heavens that dwell in dependence upon the ground (the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three), and there sexual union is accomplished by the joining of bodies, no different from the human world; only that when the breath of wind is released the burning distress is removed, and it is not as in the human world where there is other impurity besides. For the host of gods of the Yāma Heaven, one embrace accomplishes sexual union; for the Tuṣita Heaven, holding hands alone; for the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations, laughing toward one another; and for the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, gazing at one another accomplishes it.

The Vaibhāṣikas explain it thus: all six heavens accomplish sexual union by the joining of bodies, and what the Designations of the World says about embracing and the rest is meant only to display the difference in the length of time they require (to accomplish sexual union). It is because the higher the heaven the more excellent the objects of desire and the swifter the greedy mind, that it is so.

Upon the knees of the male and female among those gods, boys and girls are suddenly born by transformation, and these are said to be the sons and daughters born to that god.

Question: what is the bodily measure of the host of gods at their first birth? The stanza says:

〔First Half of Root 71〕The Bodily Measure of the Host of Gods at Their First Birth

Stanza: (The gods of desire) at their first birth are like children of five years up to ten, while the gods of the form realm at their first birth are already full in bodily measure and possessed of heavenly garments.

Treatise: The six heavens of desire, at their first birth, are like people of five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten years in order; and once born, their bodily form quickly grows to fullness. The host of gods of the form realm, at the time of their first birth, are complete and full in bodily measure, and are possessed of excellent garments.

All the hosts of gods speak “the noble speech,” that is, their language is the same as that of Central India.

Question: how should the distinction between birth amid desires and birth amid pleasure be understood? The stanza says:

〔Second Half of Root 71〕Three Kinds of Birth amid Desires, Three Kinds of Birth amid Pleasure

Stanza: Birth amid desires is of three kinds and extends to human beings and gods; birth amid pleasure is of three kinds, in nine places.

Treatise: The three kinds of birth amid desires are as follows —

There is one class of sentient beings who delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire present before them, and who turn in sovereign freedom among such ready-made objects of desire; and these are the whole of the human destiny together with the four heavens below (from the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings up to the Tuṣita Heaven).

There is one class of sentient beings who delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire that they have themselves produced by transformation, and who turn in sovereign freedom among the excellent objects of desire of their own transforming; and these are the fifth heaven alone, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations.

There is one class of sentient beings who delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire that others have produced by transformation, and who turn in sovereign freedom among the excellent objects of desire of others’ transforming; and these are the sixth heaven, the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations.

In dependence upon “undergoing the objects of desire present before one just as they arise,” upon “delighting to undergo objects of desire of one’s own transforming,” and upon “delighting to undergo objects of desire of others’ transforming,” the three distinctions of “birth amid desires” are accordingly analyzed within the desire realm.

The three kinds of birth amid pleasure are as follows — within the three meditative absorptions, in nine places, one is born and there receives three kinds of pleasure: that is, those gods abide in the “joy and pleasure born of seclusion” (the first meditative absorption), in the “joy and pleasure born of absorption” (the second meditative absorption), and, through separation from joy, in pleasure alone (the third meditative absorption), abiding long, long separated from suffering, and long receiving pleasure, and are therefore called “birth amid pleasure.”

(An appended question): those born in the intermediate absorption (where the great Brahmā dwells) have no joy or pleasure at all; it should be pondered why they too are called a heaven of birth amid pleasure.

Question: as for the twenty-two places of the gods spoken of above, what are the measures by which they are distant from one another, above and below? The stanza says:

〔First Half of Root 72〕The Distance Upward from a Given Heaven Equals Its Distance Downward

Stanza: As is the measure by which a given heaven is distant from what is below, so likewise is the number by which it is distant from what is above.

Treatise: The measure in yojanas by which each heaven is separated from the next is not easily counted out one by one; only a general principle can be given: as is the measure by which a given heaven is distant from what is below, so is its distance from what is above to be reckoned on that pattern.

According as one reckons from whichever heaven, as is the measure by which it is distant from the great sea below, so is the distance it can reach upward the same as its distance downward. That is to say: from the fourth terrace of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain down to the great sea is forty thousand yojanas, and that is the original dwelling place of the four great heavenly kings; then from there upward to the Heaven of the Thirty-Three is likewise equal to the measure by which that heaven is distant from the great sea below. As is the measure by which the Heaven of the Thirty-Three is distant from the great sea below, so is the measure upward to the Yāma Heaven. And so on, up to the measure in yojanas by which the Sudarśana Heaven is distant from the great sea below, from which upward to the Akaniṣṭha Heaven is likewise equal to the measure by which that heaven is distant from the great sea below.

From this point upward there is no further place of dwelling; this place is the highest, and is named the Akaniṣṭha, the limit of form. Another party of masters says: it is named the Heaven of the Limit of Resistance — by “resistance” they mean form as accumulated, and since resistance is exhausted upon reaching here, it obtains the name “limit.”

Question: can gods born in a lower place ascend, and can they see what is above? The stanza says:

〔Second Half of Root 72〕Apart from Supernormal Power or Dependence on Another’s Power, the Gods Below Cannot Ascend and Cannot See What Is Above

Stanza: Apart from the power of supernormal power and dependence upon another’s power, the gods below cannot ascend and cannot see what is above.

Treatise: The Heaven of the Thirty-Three, by their own power of supernormal power, can ascend from their own place to the Yāma Heaven; or else in dependence upon another’s power, that is, one who has attained the supernormal powers, or a host of gods of an upper realm, may convey them to the Yāma Heaven. The ascending of the remaining gods is to be reckoned on this same pattern.

If a god above comes down, or a god below arrives above, then those below get to see the god above; but as for the eye of a lower realm and lower level, it cannot see the form of an upper realm and upper level. The eye below, however, cannot see an upper realm or upper level, because that is not its object field — just as one does not feel the tangible object of that upper realm. Therefore, when a god comes down from an upper level to a lower level, he does not come in his own body but must make a transformation body of the lower level.

Another party of masters says: those gods of a lower level can, according as they wish, also see the form of an upper level, just as one born in this desire realm can see the gods above from below.

Question: what is the measure of the supports of the palaces of the Yāma Heaven and the rest? One party of masters says: the supports of the four heavens above this are equal in measure to the summit of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain. Another party of masters says: each heaven upward doubles the one before. Yet other masters say: the supports of the palaces of the level of the first meditative absorption equal one set of four great continents, those of the second meditative absorption a small-thousand world-sphere, those of the third a middling-thousand world-sphere, and those of the fourth a great-thousand world-sphere. Still other masters say: the three lower meditative absorptions equal in order a small thousand, a middling thousand, and a great thousand, while the measure of the fourth meditative absorption is without limit.

Question: at what measure is a small thousand, a middling thousand, or a great thousand spoken of? The stanza says:

〔Root 73 · Root 74〕The Small Thousand, the Middling Thousand, and the Great Thousand

Stanza: The four great continents, the sun and moon, Sumeru, the gods of the desire realm, and the Brahmā world, a thousand of each, are called one small-thousand world-sphere. This small thousand multiplied a thousandfold is called one middling thousand. This middling thousand multiplied a thousandfold is the great thousand, and they all come into being together and are dissolved together.

Treatise: A thousand sets of four great continents, and so on up to a thousand Brahmā worlds — these stated together are one small thousand. A thousandfold of the small thousand is called one middling-thousand world. A thousand middling-thousand worlds are named together one great thousand. Such a great thousand comes into being together and is dissolved together. The characteristics of coming into being together and being dissolved together will be analyzed at length below (in the section on the measure of aeons).

Question: as the measures of the outer receptacles differ one from another, do bodily measures also differ? Answer: they differ likewise. Question: how so? The stanza says:

〔Root 75 · Root 76 · First Half of Root 77〕The Bodily Measures of the People of the Four Continents and of the Gods

Stanza: The bodily measure of the people of Jambudvīpa is three and a half cubits or four cubits. The people of the eastern, western, and northern continents increase in order by a doubling each time. The gods of the desire realm take the krośa as their unit, each heaven adding a quarter. The gods of the form realm take the yojana as their unit, the first four heavens each adding a half, and above these each heaven doubling, only the Anabhraka Heaven subtracting three.

Treatise: The people of Jambudvīpa are for the most part three and a half cubits tall, and a small number of them grow to four cubits. The people of the continent of Videha in the east are eight cubits tall, those of the continent of Godānīya in the west sixteen cubits, and those of Uttarakuru in the north thirty-two cubits.

The bodily measure of the lowest of the six heavens of the desire realm is a quarter of a krośa, and thereafter each heaven adds a quarter, until at the sixth heaven the bodily measure is a krośa and a half.

The bodily measures of the gods of the form realm: first the Brahmakāyika Heaven half a yojana, the Brahmapurohita Heaven a full yojana, the Mahābrahmā Heaven a yojana and a half, the Parīttābha Heaven a full two yojanas. Above these, all the remaining gods increase by a doubling each time, only the Anabhraka Heaven subtracting three yojanas — that is, the Apramāṇābha Heaven increases from twice to four, and so on until at the Akaniṣṭha Heaven the increase reaches a full sixteen thousand.

Question: since bodily measures differ one from another, is there a distinction in lifespan? Answer: there is a distinction likewise. Question: how so? The stanza says:

〔Second Half of Root 77 · Roots 78–80〕The Lifespans of Human Beings, of the Gods of Desire, of the Gods of Form, and of the Formless Gods

Stanza: The northern continent has a fixed lifespan of one thousand years, and the western and eastern continents halve it each in turn; in this Jambudvīpa the lifespan is not fixed, at the last it is ten years only, and at the first it is beyond measuring. Fifty human years are one day and night of the lowest heaven, and reckoning by this the lifespan is five hundred years, the five heavens above increasing by a doubling each time. In the form realm there is no distinction of day and night, and the number of aeons equals the bodily measure. In the formless realm the first is twenty thousand aeons, and thereafter each adds twenty thousand. For the heavens from the Parīttābha upward and for those below it, the aeon is respectively the whole and the half of a great aeon.

Treatise: The people of Uttarakuru in the north have a fixed lifespan of a thousand years, the people of the continent of Godānīya in the west live five hundred years, the people of the continent of Videha in the east two hundred and fifty years, and the people of Jambudvīpa in the south have no fixed limit of lifespan — when the aeon has decreased to its last, the longest life is ten years only; at the beginning of the aeon, human life is beyond measure and cannot be reckoned by hundreds or thousands or the like.

So much for the length and shortness of lifespan in the human world.

The day and night of the heavens must be established first, and only then can the length and shortness of the lifespans of the gods be reckoned. Question: how is day and night established in the heavens? Answer: fifty human years are one day and one night of the lowest of the six heavens of desire; and reckoning by this day and night, thirty days making a month and twelve months a year, that heaven has a lifespan of five hundred years.

The five heavens of desire above double it by degrees: a hundred human years are one day and one night of the second heaven, and reckoning by this day and night into months and years, that heaven has a lifespan of a thousand years. For the four heavens of the Yāma and the rest, two hundred, four hundred, eight hundred, and one thousand six hundred human years are in order one day and one night; and reckoning by these days and nights into months and years, their lifespans are in order two thousand, four thousand, eight thousand, and sixteen thousand years.

Question: above Upholding the Pair there is no sun or moon; how do those gods establish day and night and the matter of light? On what do they establish them? Answer: they establish day and night by the opening and closing of flowers, such as the kumuda and the padma; and further by the difference between the crying and the silence of the birds, or by the difference between the gods’ sleeping and waking; and they accomplish outer light by means of the light of their own bodies.

So much for the length and shortness of the lifespans of the gods of the desire realm.

Among the gods of the form realm there is no distinction of day and night, and the length and shortness of lifespan is known by the number of aeons alone. The length and shortness of their lifespan in aeons equals the number of their bodily measure: if the bodily measure is half a yojana, the lifespan is half an aeon; if the bodily measure is one yojana, the lifespan is one aeon; and so on, until where the bodily measure is sixteen thousand long, the lifespan is likewise sixteen thousand aeons.

So much for the length and shortness of the lifespans of the gods of the form realm.

The four heavens of the formless realm, from below upward, have lifespans in order of twenty thousand, forty thousand, sixty thousand, and eighty thousand aeons.

Question: as for the “aeon” spoken of above, what is its measure? Is it an aeon of dissolution, an aeon of formation, an intermediate aeon, or a great aeon? Answer: from the Parīttābha Heaven upward the whole of a great aeon is taken as the aeon, and for the heavens below it the half of a great aeon is taken as the aeon. It is precisely on this account that the great Brahmā king is said to exceed the Brahmapurohita Heaven in lifespan by an aeon and a half — that is, with twenty intermediate aeons each for formation, abiding, and dissolution, sixty intermediate aeons make an aeon and a half; and so the forty intermediate aeons that are half a great aeon serve as the measure of the aeon by which the lifespans of the three heavens below are reckoned.

So much for the length and shortness of lifespan in the good destinies. And what of the evil destinies? The stanza says:

〔Roots 81–83〕The Lifespans of the Hells, of Animals, and of Ghosts

Stanza: For the six hells above, beginning with Equal Reviving, the lifespans of the gods of the desire realm serve in order as one day and night, and their lifespans are likewise the same as those of the gods. The hell of Extreme Heat is half an intermediate aeon, the Unremitting hell a full intermediate aeon. For animals the longest is one intermediate aeon. Ghosts take one human month as a day and live five hundred years. As for the lifespan of Arbuda, it is like a vāha of sesame, from which one seed is taken out every hundred years until it is exhausted; and thereafter each increases twentyfold.

Treatise: The lifespans of the six heavens of desire, the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings and the rest, serve in order as one day and one night for the six narakas beginning with Equal Reviving; and the lifespans of these six hells are also, in order, the same as those of the gods. That is to say: the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings has a lifespan of five hundred years, and this is one day and one night in the hell of Equal Reviving; reckoning such days and nights into months and years, and counting by such years, their lifespan is five hundred years. And so on up to the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, whose lifespan is sixteen thousand years, and this is one day and one night in the hell of Burning Heat; reckoning such days and nights into months and years, their lifespan is sixteen thousand years of that kind.

The hell of Extreme Heat has a lifespan of half an intermediate aeon, and the Unremitting hell of one intermediate aeon.

The lifespan of animals is for the most part without fixed limit; but if the life is exceedingly long, it too is one intermediate aeon, that is, the great nāga kings such as Nanda and the rest. Hence the World-Honored One said: there are eight great nāgas, all of whom can abide for an aeon and can uphold the great earth.

Ghosts take one human month as a day, and reckoning by this into months and years, they live five hundred years.

Question: what is the lifespan of the cold narakas? Answer: the World-Honored One committed it to a simile to display their lifespan — as when twenty human khārī make one vāha of sesame in the land of Magadha (both “khārī” and “vāha” are units of capacity, one vāha being twenty khārī), and a man fills it level to the brim with black sesame, and suppose again that a man were able to take one seed away every hundred years: in such a case the sesame would readily come to a time of exhaustion, whereas the lifespan of one born in the hell of Arbuda would be hard to exhaust. Twenty times this number is the lifespan of the second cold hell, and so thereafter each increases twentyfold — such are the lifespans of the eight cold hells.

Question: do these lifespans admit of untimely death midway? The stanza says:

〔First Half of Root 84〕Untimely Death, and Those Who Do Not Die Untimely

Stanza: In every place there is untimely death, save only in Uttarakuru in the north.

Treatise: In every place the lifespan admits of dying untimely midway, save only Uttarakuru in the north, whose fixed lifespan is a thousand years.

This, however, is said with respect to “place” and not with respect to particular sentient beings — for there are certain other sentient beings who do not die untimely. That is to say: the bodhisattva bound to one more birth who dwells in the Tuṣita Heaven (the bodhisattva who has but one birth left before buddhahood), and one in his last existence, one to whom the Buddha has given prediction, one whom the Buddha has sent, one who follows through faith, one who follows the dharma, and further the mothers who carry a bodhisattva in the womb and who carry a wheel-turning monarch in the womb — these, each as is fitting, are all without untimely death.

義疏Exposition

讀這一卷之前

這一卷開頭只有十四個字——「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」。上面三卷把有情世間講完了(三界五趣、中有入胎、十二緣起),論主一句話轉身,開始講盛裝這些生命的『器』。三家古德在這裡都把科判的刀落在同一處:光記標「此下大文第二明器世間」,寶疏標「此下當品大文第二明器世間」,頌疏標「從此大文第二,明器世間」——三家獨立分卷而界線全同,可見這一刀不是後人硬切的,是論文自己開的口。

器世間之下再分三段:一是『所居器』(住的地方),二是『能居量』(住的人有多大、活多久),三是『三分齊』(極少的量)。本卷占前面兩段,第三段在下一卷。所居器又細分八目,三家所標全同——三輪、九山、八海、四洲、黑山等、地獄、日月、天器。這八目就是本卷前半的骨架,讀的時候不妨當作一張自下而上的剖面圖:先鋪底座,再立山海,再往下探地獄,再往上循日月與天宮。

有一件事要先說在前頭。這一卷讀起來像地理志,數字密得驚人;但真正承重的不是數字,而是反覆出現的那一句「諸有情業增上力」。風輪從虛空生起,是它;水上結金,是它;眾寶生成,是它;日月不墜,也是它。整幅世界圖沒有一位建築師——這是本卷最要緊的一條線,下文逐段都會碰到它。


一、器世間的底座:風輪、水輪、金輪

〔一之一〕世界最下面是什麼。 先問:既然要安立一個世界,總得有個最下面的一層,那一層是什麼?論答得乾脆——最下面是,不是土、不是水。「謂諸有情業增上力,先於最下依止虛空有風輪生」,風輪依著虛空而生,廣度「無數」,厚十六億踰繕那。接著是水輪深十一億二萬,水的上層被業風搏擊而結成金,於是水減為八洛叉、金厚三億二萬。三層之中,只有最下的風輪是直接依虛空的,其餘二層層層相依。

易誤處:以為這是在描述一種宇宙起源的物理過程。它不是。論給的第一因不是風,是「業增上力」——風輪是果不是因。所以下文每一次要生出新東西(寶物、日月),論都再說一次「諸有情業增上力」,這不是重複的贅語,是把責任一次次還給有情自己。

落地上:讀阿毘達磨的世界圖,第一步要換掉一個習慣——不要問『誰造的』,要問『誰的業感的』。這一換,整卷的數字才會落到修行的帳上。

〔一之二〕風輪為什麼要說得那麼硬。 論舉了一個奇特的譬喻:假設有一位「大諾健那」拿金剛輪奮力擊下去,結果是「金剛有碎風輪無損」。光記釋此云「大諾健那,是人中神名,此云露形」——是一位力大的神。先問:講一層風,何必用金剛來比?因為讀者一聽『風輪』,直覺就是輕、是虛、是靠不住的;論要先把這個直覺打掉。世界之所以能安立,正因為那看似最虛的一層其體「堅密」。

易誤處:把這句讀成神話裝飾。它是定性語——風輪的堅密是後面一切層級能夠疊上去的前提。落地上:業所感的東西,其堅固程度不由它的『材質』決定,由業力決定;這一條到後面講地獄的鐵地、講天宮依空而住的時候還要用。

〔一之三〕水為什麼不流散——兩家並存的答案。 論在這裡插了一個很好的問題:水輪懸在風輪之上,「如何水輪不傍流散」?答案有兩家。一家說是有情業力所持,並舉飲食未消化時「終不流移墮於熟藏」為喻;另一家說是風力所持,並舉「如篅持穀」為喻——篅是竹編的圓穀倉,把穀子圍住。

先問:兩家差別在哪?前一家把原因收在業上,後一家把原因放在一個具體的外緣(風)上。二說並存,論不作判。易誤處:以為既然有兩說,就是論主含糊。不是——本論的體例是凡遇異說而經無明文者,二造並錄。落地上:往後凡讀到「有餘師說」「有餘部說」,先不要急著找哪一個是『正確答案』,先看清兩家各自把重量壓在什麼地方。

〔一之附〕水輪與金輪的第三種量:徑與周。 厚薄之外,論還給了第三個量法——廣量:「二輪廣量其數是同,謂徑十二億三千四百半。周圍其邊數成三倍,謂周圍量成三十六億一萬三百五十踰繕那」。先問:這一句在算什麼?在算水輪與金輪這個圓盤的直徑周長:二輪的廣量相同,徑是十二億三千四百五十踰繕那(「半」=百之半,即五十),周長取徑之三倍——十二億三千四百五十乘三,得三十六億一萬零三百五十。易誤處:把「廣量」和前面的「厚」混作一事。厚是上下之量(水厚八洛叉、金厚三億二萬),廣是之量(徑與周);一個量深度,一個量寬度,兩者各有各的數,不可互推。落地上:驗算的方法就在論文自身——周=徑×三,拿這條回頭乘一遍,首尾自然相扣;凡讀本卷之數,先問『這是厚、是徑、還是周』,數就不會亂。


二、金輪之上的九座大山

〔二之一〕九座山的排法。 先問:九座山是九列並排,還是別的排法?論一開口就給了答案——「於金輪上有九大山,妙高山王處中而住,餘八周匝繞妙高山」。九山之中前七叫『內山』,第七山之外才是四大洲,再外是鐵輪圍山,「周匝如輪圍一世界」。體質也分:持雙等七山「唯金所成」,妙高山王則四面各一寶——北金、東銀、南吠琉璃、西頗胝迦。論還順手解釋了一件生活裡看得見的事:因為南面是吠琉璃,「故贍部洲空似吠琉璃色」——我們頭頂的天為什麼是青的,答案在山的南面。

易誤處:把九山當成九座並列的山脈。它是同心圓:一中心加八重環,最外一重是鐵圍。落地上:記住這個同心圓,後面的八海、四洲、乃至三千大千的計數,都掛在這一張圖上。

〔二之二〕山名不是隨手取的。 九山的名字都是音寫,讀來拗口,但每一個名字背後都有形象。光記逐山釋其義:「踰健達羅,此云持雙。此山頂上有二道猶如車跡,山持二跡故名持雙」·「伊沙馱羅山,此云持軸。山峰上聳猶如車軸」·「朅地洛迦,印度樹名,此方南邊亦有此樹稱為檐木」·「蘇達梨舍那,此云善見」·「頞濕縛羯拏,此云馬耳,山峯似馬耳也」·「毘那怛迦,此云象鼻」·「尼民達羅,此是魚名。其魚㭰尖,山峰似彼魚㭰」。連中心那座也一樣——光記說「蘇迷盧,此云妙高。舊云須彌,訛也」。

先問:知道這些名義有什麼用?因為它告訴我們,這些名字原是形象語,不是編號。持雙、持軸、馬耳、象鼻、魚嘴——一座一座都在說形狀。易誤處:把音寫名當成不可解的咒語,於是整段跳過去。落地上:凡遇玄奘的音寫名相,先問古德有沒有留下「此云」的對譯;有了對譯,一長串生詞立刻變成一幅可以看見的圖。

〔二之三〕寶物怎麼生出來——順帶破了數論一場。 論說寶物也是業力所感:大雲雨於金輪,積水成濤,「其水即為眾寶種藏」——光記把這兩個字拆開釋為「水能生寶,名種。水中出寶,名藏」。然後猛風鑽擊,變水生寶。論在這裡特地補一句要害話:「因滅果生,體不俱有,非如數論轉變所成」。

於是有一小段對外道的辯破。數論主張有一個常住的「有法」,其上有法生有法滅;論反問:既然承認那個承載者常住,就不能又說它上面有生有滅。對方改口說『有法不在法外,就是這個法在轉變時作為異相的所依』;論主一句斷之——「即是此物而不如此,如是言義曾所未聞」。光記為此引因明之例助解:「聲是無常,無常是法。聲是有法,有無常法故名有法」。

先問:講世界安立,為什麼忽然插一段破外道?因為『水變成寶』這件事,正好是雙方對『轉變』二字理解不同的分水嶺——有部說因滅果生、體不俱有,數論說體常而相變。論借一個具體的例子把抽象的爭點釘住。易誤處:把這段當成離題的插曲。落地上:往後凡讀到『轉變』二字,先問一句『所轉變者的體,前後是同一個嗎』;答同一,就落在數論那一邊;答因滅果生,才是本論的立場。

〔二之附〕九山的收束:入水一律,出水半半漸卑,廣與出水同。 九山之名與排法之後,論以一段話把它們的量一次收齊:「如是九山住金輪上,入水量皆等八萬踰繕那,蘇迷盧山出水亦爾。餘八出水半半漸卑,謂初持雙出水四萬,乃至最後鐵輪圍山出水三百一十二半。如是九山一一廣量,各各與自出水量同」。先問:這裡一共給了幾條規則?三條:①入水一律——九山沒入水中的部分都是八萬踰繕那,無一例外;②出水遞半——蘇迷盧出水也是八萬,其餘八山自持雙山起,出水四萬,然後一重減一半,四萬、二萬、一萬、五千、二千五百、一千二百五十、六百二十五,到鐵輪圍山恰是三百一十二半;③廣=出水——每一山的橫廣,正好等於它自己的出水之量。易誤處:把「入水」也當成遞半。不是——遞半的只有出水,入水是一個常數。落地上:這三條合起來,九山的形貌就完全定了:沒入的一樣深,露出的一重比一重矮一半,而露多高就有多寬;拿最後一項三百一十二半回推,七次折半正好還原到四萬,這就是首尾自驗之法。


三、八重海與八功德水

〔三之一〕八海的算法。 九山之間有八重海,「妙高為初、輪圍最後,中間八海,前七名內」。最內一重寬八萬,四面各三倍(各成二億四萬);其餘六重一重比一重窄一半,第二重四萬,直到第七重一千二百五十。第八重是外海,鹹水盈滿,寬三億二萬二千。

先問:為什麼內七海要一半一半地遞減,外海反而特別大?因為內七海夾在山與山之間,山既然一座比一座矮一半、窄一半,海也隨之遞減;外海則在最後一座金山與鐵圍之間,那才是四大洲所在的廣闊水域。論還誠實交代了一件事:內七海的周長不列,「以煩多故」——不是不知道,是嫌繁瑣。

易誤處:以為八重海是八個並列的湖。它們是八圈環形的水。落地上:這一段是全卷第一次出現『一半一半地遞減』這個算式,後面妙高四層級的傍出、諸天身量的遞增,用的都是同一種等比的算法思路;先在這裡把它看熟。

〔三之二〕八功德水,與跨經的另一套八目。 內七海的水具八功德:「一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹」。八目編號分明,前六說水的性質,後二說喝下去的結果。

先問:這八項是唯一的一套嗎?光記在此引《稱讚淨土經》,那裡另立一套八目——「一者澄淨、二者清淨、三者甘美、四者輕耎」等等,二者只有部分重合。光記把兩套並錄,不作優劣之判。易誤處:以為佛典中同名的法數必然逐項相同,於是遇到不合就急著調和。落地上:法數同名而目不同,往往是所依經論不同;讀的時候先問『這一套出於哪一部』,比急著會通有用得多。


四、四大洲與八中洲

〔四之一〕四洲的形狀,就是四洲人的臉。 外海之中有四大洲,正對妙高山的四面。南贍部洲「北廣南陿,三邊量等,其相如車」;東勝身洲「東陿西廣」,形如半月;西牛貨洲「圓如滿月」;北俱盧洲「形如方座,四邊量等」。論還特地解釋頌中一個『等』字——「等言為明無少增減」。最有意思的是收尾一句:「隨其洲相人面亦然」。

先問:洲的形狀為什麼要管到人的臉?因為在本論的框架裡,外器與有情同出於一份共業,所以彼此的相狀是相應的,不是巧合。易誤處:把這句當作趣聞。它其實是「業增上力」那條主軸的一個小小證據——器與有情不是兩套獨立的東西。落地上:後面講身量、講壽量,同樣是這條線的延伸:住在哪一洲,身量壽量就隨之而定。

〔四之二〕金剛座為什麼只在南洲。 「唯此洲中有金剛座,上窮地際下據金輪」,一切菩薩將登正覺時都坐在這裡起「金剛喻定」。論給的理由極簡潔:除此以外,再沒有其餘所依與處所有足夠「堅固力能持此故」。

先問:成佛為什麼還要挑地方?不是挑風水,是承載力的問題——那一念最後的定,力量太大,只有直抵金輪的一塊地承得住。易誤處:讀成南贍部洲比其他三洲『尊貴』。論說的是承載,不是名分;下文反而處處說贍部洲人壽最不定、身量最小。落地上:這一句是全卷少見的、直接落在修證上的一句——器世間的描述在此與『金剛喻定』接榫,讀到後面賢聖品講斷惑之終時,可以回頭看這一處。

〔四之三〕八中洲與一個小小的異說。 四大洲兩側各有兩個中洲,合為八個,論逐一列名。光記為它們留下音義:「遮末邏,此云猫牛。筏羅遮末羅,此云勝猫牛」。論說「此一切洲皆人所住」,隨即記一異說——「有說:唯一邏剎娑居」。

先問:這一句異說為何值得留?因為它在一個看似無關緊要的地理細節上,示範了本論的通例:凡有二說而經無明文,並錄。易誤處:把「有說」讀成論主自己的補充。它是別家之說,論主錄而不判。落地上:本卷「有說」「有餘師說」「有餘部說」出現十餘次,一律作如是觀——先分清哪一句是論的正說、哪一句是所錄的別說,這一步分不清,後面三疏的爭論就無從讀起。

〔四之附〕四洲各邊之量:形狀之外還有數。 四洲之形(車箱、半月、滿月、方座)只是一半,論還逐洲給了邊量:南贍部洲「南邊唯廣三踰繕那半,三邊各有二千」,其餘三洲則作「東三百五十,三邊各二千。西牛貨洲圓如滿月,徑二千五百,周圍七千半。北俱盧洲形如方座,四邊量等,面各二千」。先問:這幾組數怎麼讀?南洲與東洲同屬『三邊各二千、一邊獨短』之型,差別只在那一短邊:南三踰繕那半、東三百五十;西洲是圓,故不說邊而說(徑二千五百、周七千半,仍是周=徑×三);北洲四邊齊等,故一句「面各二千」而盡。易誤處:把南洲的「三踰繕那半」與東洲的「三百五十」看成同一量級——二者相差百倍,正是南洲之所以形如車箱(一端極窄)而東洲形如半月(一端仍寬)的原因。落地上:形與量須合看——形是輪廓,量是尺寸;只記形則四洲混同,只記量則不知其貌。


五、黑山、雪山、香醉山與無熱池

〔五之一〕九座黑山是怎麼數出來的。 「此贍部洲從中向北,三處各有三重黑山」——三處各三重,合起來正是頌文所說的「此北九黑山」。黑山之北是大雪山,雪山之北是香醉山。光記釋香醉之名云「香醉山,謂此山中有諸香氣,嗅令人醉,故名香醉」。

先問:九這個數是怎麼來的?就是三乘三。這一點值得特別留意,因為大正藏在「三處各有三重黑山」的那個「三」字上正好有異讀,宋元明宮四本作「五」。若依四本,三處各五重就成十五,與頌文的「九」對不上。文本上二讀並存,本帙唯錄不判;但讀者至少要知道:底本的讀法與頌文自洽。

易誤處:把校勘的異字看成無關痛癢的小事。有些異字確實無關(如「杖」與「仗」),有些卻直接動到算式。落地上:讀到頌與長行的數字對不上時,先查一查那個字有沒有異讀——這是古德校讀的老辦法。

〔五之二〕無熱池與四條大河。 雪北香南有大池名「無熱惱」,縱廣各五十踰繕那,八功德水盈滿,「非得通人無由能至」,流出四大河——殑伽、信度、徙多、縛芻。池邊有贍部林,「樹形高大其果甘美」,這個洲的名字就是從這片林或這種果來的。

先問:一個池子為什麼要說『非得通人到不了』?這一句把無熱池從『地理』推到了『不可到達之境』——它在圖上有位置,在經驗上卻不開放。易誤處:把整卷的地名一律當作可考的實地。論自己在這裡就標出了界限。落地上:本卷的世界圖,有些部分與人間經驗相接(洲、河、日月),有些部分明說唯神通可至或唯業力可入(無熱池、諸天、地獄)——讀的時候把這兩類分開,比一律當實錄或一律當寓言都準確。


六、地獄的安立:無間與七熱

〔六之一〕無間之所以為無間。 贍部洲往下超過二萬,有「阿鼻旨大㮈落迦」,深廣各二萬,所以它的底離我們四萬踰繕那。名字的由來,論說得很清楚:「以於其中受苦無間,非如餘七大㮈落迦受苦非恒,故名無間」。並且拿等活作對照——等活地獄中的有情被砍刺磨搗之後,「暫遇涼風所吹還活如本」,所以叫等活;阿鼻旨中沒有這種喘息。

先問:那麼『無間』是說苦不停,還是說沒有空隙?論這裡取的是前者(苦無間斷)。但光記引《順正理》補了另一說——「有說:無隙立無間名。雖有情少而身大故」,是說有情雖少而身形廣大,中間沒有空隙。光記又引婆沙評家之語為定:「評曰:不應作是說。生餘地獄多,生無間者少」。

易誤處:把後世常聽到的『無間=沒有間隙』當成本論的正說。本論長行取的是『苦無間斷』。落地上:一個名相有多重訓解時,先認清本論自己給的那一個,其餘作為旁參——這是讀論的次第,也是三疏彼此爭論時各自站的地方。

〔六之二〕八個地獄怎麼排。 「七㮈落迦在無間上重累而住」,自下而上是等活、黑繩、眾合、號叫、大叫、炎熱、極熱,無間在最下。論隨即記一異說——「有說:此七在無間傍」。光記另引第三說:「有說:無間地獄在於中央,餘七地獄周匝圍繞,如今聚落圍繞大城」。

先問:三種排法哪一種對?論不判,光記亦只是並錄。這正是本卷的常態。易誤處:以為地獄的空間布局是一個必須確定的事實問題。在本論的體例裡,凡經無明文者,異說並存不害其義——真正確定的是業與果的對應,不是地圖。落地上:讀本卷的空間描述,把『必定如此』的期待放下,注意力放在每一處『何業感何果』上,收穫會大得多。


七、十六增:八個地獄門外的四所

〔七之一〕先有一首經頌。 論在此引世尊所說之頌:「此八㮈落迦,我說甚難越,以熱鐵為地,周匝有鐵牆,四面有四門,關閉以鐵扇」。這首頌不是本論的正頌,是引來作證的經頌——前文明標「故薄伽梵說此頌言」。它先把八大地獄的總相定住:鐵地、鐵牆、四門鐵扇、猛火洞然。

先問:既然長行已經說了,為何還要引頌?因為十六增的建制要掛在『四門』上——四面各一門,門外各四所,才成十六。頌先立四門,長行才好逐一開列。易誤處:把引頌與本頌混為一談。本卷的頌塊二十三個,其中三個是引頌(此頌、法善現頌、花香頌),其餘二十個才是本論正頌。落地上:讀本論時,看見「頌曰」是本頌,看見「說此頌言」「如彼頌言」「薄伽梵言」則多是引來作證的——這一分辨影響到整品的頌數計算。

〔七之二〕四所增各是什麼。 一是煻煨增,熱灰沒膝,「有情遊彼纔下足時,皮肉與血俱燋爛墜,舉足還生平復如本」。二是屍糞增,屍糞泥滿,中多娘矩吒蟲,「𭪿利如針身白頭黑」,鑽皮破骨食髓。三是鋒刃增,內含三種——刀刃路(刀刃仰鋪為道)、劍葉林(劍刃為葉,風吹葉墜)、鐵刺林(鐵刺長十六指,上下鑱刺);三者雖殊,「而鐵杖同故一增攝」。四是烈河增,滿中熱鹹水,浮沉逆順,如大鑊中煮麻米,兩岸獄卒執刀槍禦捍令迴。

先問:三種刑具為何合為一增,而烈河獨立?論給的理由是材質——前三同為鐵造,故一增攝;烈河是水,且「此河如塹,前三似園」,形制也不同。易誤處:只把這一段當作恐怖的描寫而略過那句合併的理由。它是阿毘達磨的看家本領:凡合為一者,必說明依何理而合。落地上:後面凡遇『某幾法合立為一』的地方(五受合三、九處立三樂生),都要問同一句話——依什麼理由合?

〔七之三〕『增』字為什麼叫增。 論自釋其名:「此是增上被刑害所,故說名增,本地獄中適被害已重遭害故」——本地獄已受一次刑,出到門外又受一次,苦上加苦,故名增。論又錄一別說:「有說:有情從地獄出更遭此苦,故說為增」。光記另引《順正理》補一解:「或於此中受種種苦,苦具多類,故說為增」。

先問:這個字為什麼值得費這麼多筆墨?因為它是一個純粹的譯名選擇——真諦舊譯此字不作「增」而作「園」,取苑囿之象;玄奘作「增」,取苦之遞加。同一所指,二譯著眼全然不同(詳承衍)。易誤處:以為譯名不同只是用字習慣。此處二譯所取的意象一空間一程度,讀者若只讀一本,很難察覺原詞本可有兩面。落地上:遇到本論的關鍵譯名,若有異譯可對,值得並看一眼——不是為了判優劣,是為了看見這個詞的厚度。


八、獄卒是不是有情,與八寒地獄、餘趣之處

〔八之一〕一個由論題生出的論題。 論自己標明:「今於此中因論生論。諸地獄卒是有情不?」——這是傍論,不是正科。一家說非情,理由是「有情業力,如成劫風」;成劫時的風也沒有誰在吹,一樣起作用。難者立刻舉出大德法善現的頌反問:「心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒」——既然有人死後作琰魔卒,那不就是有情了嗎?

答者的分判很細:琰魔王差遣邏剎娑把有情丟進地獄,那些叫琰魔卒,是實有情;但地獄中直接行刑的那些不是實有情。也就是說,頌中所說與所諍者,本非同一批。另一家則說是有情,並回答了隨之而來的兩個難處:他們的惡業在哪裡受報——就在地獄中;火為什麼燒不到他們——「此定由業力所隔礙故,或感異大種故不被燒」。

先問:這一諍的關鍵在哪?在於『地獄中的施刑者』究竟是業力所化的無情作用,還是別有一批受報的有情。二說並錄。易誤處:把前一家的『非情』讀成『不存在』。非情是說它沒有心識,不是說沒有這回事。落地上:這一段是本卷最典型的傍論範例——論主容許問題岔出去,但岔出去之後仍逐難而答,不留半截。

〔八之二〕八寒地獄的名字是怎麼來的。 熱地獄有八,另有八寒——頞部陀、尼剌部陀、頞唽吒、臛臛婆、虎虎婆、嗢鉢羅、鉢特摩、摩訶鉢特摩。論給了一個總的命名原則:「此中有情嚴寒所逼,隨身聲變以立其名」——名字或依身體被凍出的變化,或依凍到發不出完整音節的呼聲。光記逐一坐實:「頞部陀,此云皰,嚴寒逼身,其身皰也」·「尼剌部陀,此云皰裂,嚴寒逼身,身皰裂也」·「次三寒逼,口出異聲」·「嗢鉢羅,此云青蓮花,嚴寒逼切,身變拆裂,如青蓮花」,鉢特摩與摩訶鉢特摩同式而作紅蓮花、大紅蓮花。

先問:為何寒地獄的名字聽起來像擬聲詞?因為中間三個本來就是就聲立名的。光記把這一組名字的分工說得最清楚——「前二後三隨身變故以立其名,中三隨聲變故以立其名」:前二與後三依身相之變,中三依寒逼時口中所出之異聲。易誤處:把八個名字當成八個不相干的專名死記。它其實是一條由淺入深的凍傷序列:起皰、皰裂、發不出聲、身體綻裂。落地上:法數之名往往自帶次第;能看出次第,就不必硬背。

〔八之三〕小洲怎麼裝得下大地獄。 論設一問:贍部洲面積不大,「下寧容受無間等耶」?答得極巧:「洲如穀聚,上尖下闊,是故大海漸陿漸深」——洲像堆起來的穀子,上尖下闊,所以越往下越寬。

先問:這一問一答有什麼分量?它示範了阿毘達磨對自身體系的自我校核:凡數字相互衝突處,必給出調和。易誤處:以為這只是幾何上的巧辯。它同時定住了大海的形狀(越深越窄),二者是同一個立體的兩面。落地上:讀本卷若遇到數字看似矛盾,先假定論主已經想過,往下讀,多半會有一句話交代。

〔八之四〕孤地獄與其餘二趣的本處。 十六地獄是「一切有情增上業感」(共業),孤地獄則「各別業招」(別業),或多或二或一,處所不定——江河山邊曠野、地下、空中皆有。傍生的本處在大海,「後流餘處」。鬼的本處是琰魔王國,在贍部洲下五百踰繕那,「從此展轉散居餘處」;鬼中也有「端嚴具大威德,受諸富樂自在如天」的,也有「飢羸顏貌醜陋」的。

先問:為什麼要分本處與散居?論於地獄一段明分二業——「如上所論十六地獄,一切有情增上業感。餘孤地獄各別業招」;至於傍生、鬼之本處與流布,論則另起句直述其地,未以共業/別業配之。易誤處:把鬼趣一律想成飢餓醜陋。論明說鬼中有威德富樂如天者。落地上:三惡趣的內部差別極大,這一段是本論少見的明文;後面讀業品講別業感別果時,可以回頭取這一段作實例。


九、日月:所依、大小,與晝夜的增減

〔九之一〕日月依什麼而住。 論問「日月眾星依何而住」,答「依風而住」——仍是有情業增上力所引之風,繞妙高山旋轉,「運持日等令不停墜」。高度與持雙山頂齊,正是妙高山的一半。大小:日五十一,月五十,星最小一俱盧舍、最大十六踰繕那。日輪下面是火珠所成,「能熱能照」;月輪下面是水珠所成,「能冷能照」。

先問:為什麼要特地說日月的下面是什麼寶?因為要交代它們的作用來源——熱與冷不是抽象屬性,而繫於所成之寶。且論隨即說,這作用是「隨有情業增上所生」,對眼、身、果、花、稼穡、藥草「如其所應為益為損」。易誤處:以為這是純粹的天文描述。論的落點在『益與損』——日月對世間萬物的作用,仍在業感的框架內。落地上:本卷凡說一物,多半連著說它對有情的作用;把這條線抓住,數字就不會讀成流水帳。

〔九之二〕一個日月怎麼照四洲。 論問:一日所作的事,四洲是同時的嗎?答不是。「北洲夜半東洲日沒,南洲日中西洲日出。此四時等」——這四個時刻是同時發生的,只是四洲各見其一。

先問:這一段的意義何在?它用一個日月解釋了四種時差,等於在毘曇的框架裡安放了一個可以自洽的晝夜模型。易誤處:把「此四時等」讀成四洲時間相同。「等」在這裡是說這四個時刻彼此相當(同一剎那),不是說四洲同見日中。落地上:這是本卷最容易讀反的一句;一字之差,整幅圖就倒過來了。

〔九之三〕晝夜為什麼會長短。 「日行此洲路有差別,故令晝夜有減有增」。從雨際第二月後半第九日起夜漸增,從寒際第四月後半第九日起夜漸減,晝則相反。每次增減一「臘縛」。日向南向北運行,依次使夜增、晝增。至於月何以有缺,論錄二說:《世施設》說是月宮殿行近日輪,被日光侵照,「餘邊發影自覆月輪」;先舊師則說是「日月輪行度不同現有圓缺」。

先問:這一段最難的是什麼?是三際(熱、雨、寒)的起算日換到漢地曆法時該怎麼對。本論只給印度的三際,不給換算。也正因如此,這裡成了三疏分歧最烈的一處(詳承衍)。易誤處:以為經論中的曆法可以直接套用漢地月份。落地上:凡遇跨曆法的細節,先確認論文自己說到哪一步為止;論沒說的,是古德各自補的,不可混為論說。


十、妙高山的四層級與四大王眾天

〔十之一〕四層級的兩組數字。 「蘇迷盧山有四層級,始從水際盡第一層相去十千踰繕那量」,層與層相距都是一萬。而向旁伸出的寬度則遞減:一萬六千、八千、四千、二千。這四層「從妙高山傍出圍繞盡其下半」——正好占滿妙高山出水部分的下半(八萬之半為四萬,四層各一萬)。

先問:為什麼要分兩組數字?因為一組講垂直間距(都相等),一組講水平伸出(一半一半遞減)。混在一起讀就亂了。易誤處:把「傍出十六千」讀成第一層的高度。它是寬度。落地上:本論談量,習慣把縱與橫分開說;讀的時候先問一句『這個數是高還是寬』,多數混亂可解。

〔十之二〕誰住在哪一層。 「有藥叉神名為堅手住初層級,有名持鬘住第二級,有名恒憍住第三級」,這三位都屬四大天王所部;第四層才是四大天王與眷屬共住,「經依此說四大王眾天」。更要緊的是下面一句:七金山上也有天居,是四大王所部封邑,「是名依地住四大王眾天」;因此「於欲天中此天最廣」。

先問:四大王眾天為什麼是欲天中最廣的?因為它不只占妙高山第四層,還兼有其餘七座金山之上的封邑——地盤最大。易誤處:以為天的高低就代表其範圍的大小。最低的一重反而最廣。落地上:這一句在後面講六欲天的身量、壽量遞增時是個提醒——階位的高下與範圍的廣狹,是兩個獨立的軸。


十一、三十三天與善見城

〔十一之一〕山頂的量,與一場數字上的並存。 「三十三天住迷盧頂,其頂四面各八十千,與下四邊其量無別」——山頂每邊八萬,與山底四邊相同。論隨即記一異說:「有餘師說:周八十千,別說四邊各唯二萬」——是說八萬乃周長,每邊只二萬。

先問:這兩個數差別有多大?很大:每邊八萬與每邊二萬,面積相差十六倍。論主取前者,餘師取後者,並存不判。光記還替餘師把算式補了出來,說那一師的意思是四層級「漸次却入侵山體成」,一層層向內收,所以到頂只剩每邊二萬。易誤處:以為既然論主已說,異說就可以不看。此處恰恰相反——真諦舊譯的頌本主張的正是每邊二萬(詳承衍),可見這個異說在另一系傳本裡是正說。落地上:一組數字之爭,往往牽涉到所依頌本的不同;讀到「有餘師說」而數字相差懸殊時,值得多留一眼。

〔十一之二〕善見城的建制。 四角各有一峰,高廣五百,藥叉神金剛手住在其中守護諸天。山頂中央是善見城,「面二千半,周萬踰繕那」,金城高一踰繕那半,地用「百一雜寶嚴飾」,觸感柔軟「如妬羅綿,於踐躡時隨足高下」——光記釋妬羅綿云「妬羅是樹名,綿從樹菓中出,名妬羅綿,如言柳絮」。城中有殊勝殿,「蔽餘天宮故名殊勝」。城外四苑:眾車、麁惡、雜林、喜林。四苑四邊有四妙池,「諸天於彼捔勝歡娛」。

先問:四苑的名字各有什麼講究?本論只列名不釋義;光記引婆沙補齊了——「一眾車苑,謂此苑中隨天福力種種車現」,其餘依次是戰時甲仗現、入中所玩皆同而俱生勝喜、極妙欲塵殊類皆集。易誤處:把「麁惡」讀成不好的地方。那是諸天演武之處,故現甲仗。落地上:本論列名而不釋義處甚多,古德的補釋正是為此而作;讀到只有名目的清單,不妨去疏中找一找。

〔十一之三〕圓生樹與一場關於香的追問。 城外東北有圓生樹,「是三十三天受欲樂勝所」,盤根深廣五十踰繕那,高廣各百,花香「順風熏滿百踰繕那,若逆風時猶遍五十」。難者立刻抓住:順風可以,「云何逆熏」?一家說香本無逆熏之義,只是依「不越樹界」而說;論主則正面立之——「理實圓生有如是德,所流香氣能逆風熏」,只是被天上和風所擁遏,「漸劣漸微近處便歇」,所以不能像順風那樣遠達。論又設一問:花香究竟是隨風轉到別處,還是只熏了風而別生香氣?答「此義無定,諸軌範師於此二門俱許無失」。

先問:兩問之中,哪一問論主給了答案,哪一問沒給?前一問(能否逆熏)論主給了正解,後一問(香如何傳)明說二門並許。易誤處:把兩問一併讀成『論主都沒判』。落地上:分清哪裡是論主的正解、哪裡是兩存,是讀本論最基本的一項功夫;此處一段之中二者並見,正好作範例。順帶一提:這段盤根「五十踰繕那」的「十」字,宋元明宮四本俱無——若依四本則只有五踰繕那,相差十倍。文本二讀並存,本帙唯錄不判。


十二、逆風之香:一首經頌引出的收束

〔十二之一〕世尊的話與論主的分際。 難者搬出經證:「花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾;善士功德香芬馥,逆風流美遍諸方」——世尊明明說花香不能逆風熏,論主卻說圓生樹的香能逆熏,豈不相違?論主的解法是劃定範圍:「據人間香故作是說,以世共了無如是能」——世尊那句話是就人間的香說的,人間的香確實沒有這種能耐。並補一條旁證:「化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十」。

先問:這是不是在替論主的說法開脫?不是。它是阿毘達磨處理『經文與論義看似相違』的標準辦法——先問那句經所據的是什麼範圍,範圍一分,相違自解。易誤處:以為凡引經即是定論,論主不可另立。本論的做法是:經是定的,但要看它所對之機、所據之境。落地上:這一招在後面各品反覆出現(凡遇『據某某故作是說』之句式皆是),此處是本卷的樣本。

〔十二之二〕善法堂與一段的收尾。 城外西南角有善法堂,「三十三天時集於彼詳論如法不如法事」。三十三天所居的外器至此說完。

先問:一座議事堂為何要專門記一筆?因為它與前面的四苑、妙池、圓生樹形成對照:那些是遊戲受樂之處,這一座是議事之處。易誤處:把天界一味想成享樂之地。論在收尾處特地留下這一筆。落地上:從器世間往上讀,會發現論主始終沒有把諸天寫成純粹的樂境——它仍在欲界,仍有事要議、有法與非法要分。


十三、三十三天以上,宮殿住在空中

〔十三之一〕從『依地』到『依空』的一跳。 「此上有色天,住依空宮殿」——三十三天以上的有色諸天,宮殿都在空中。哪些算上有色諸天?「謂夜摩天、覩史多天、樂變化天、他化自在天。及前所說梵眾天等有十六處,并前合有二十二天,皆依外器」。

先問:這一句的分界在哪?在三十三天——三十三天以上皆依空。但這條界線只能往上說,不能反推『以下皆依地』:四大王所部本身即分二類。論於日月一段先問「日等宮殿何有情居」,答「四大天王所部天眾」,隨即自分曰「是諸天眾唯住此耶?若空居天唯住如是日等宮殿,若地居天住妙高山諸層級等」。⇒ 四大王所部之中,日月等宮殿者是空居,妙高層級等者是地居;三十三天則居妙高山頂,屬地居。故正確的說法是:三十三天以上皆依空;三十三天與四大王所部之地居分居妙高山頂與諸層級,而四大王所部另有空居一分住於日月等宮殿。易誤處:把「有色」讀成『有形狀』。它是相對無色界而說——色界天雖依空,仍屬有色。落地上:二十二這個數字要記住:欲界六天、色界十六處,合為二十二;下文講「諸天二十二處,上下相去其量云何」,用的就是這個數。

〔十三之二〕空怎麼承得住宮殿。 本論長行對此不作解釋,只說依空而住。光記為此引《順正理》補了一說——「有說:空中密雲彌布如地,為彼宮殿所依」,是把密雲當作宮殿的所依。

先問:既然論不解釋,古德為何要補?因為讀者必然生疑:空無所有,何以持物?補釋是為了讓文義通暢,不是改論之義。易誤處:把這一說當作本論的主張。它是《順正理》的補說,經由光記轉引,本論並無此文。落地上:讀疏時要隨時分清哪一句是論、哪一句是疏所補;這一分際不清,讀論就變成讀疏。


十四、六欲天的婬相:交、抱、執手、笑、視

〔十四之一〕越往上越輕。 「唯六欲天受妙欲境」。最下二重依地而住的天,「形交成婬與人無別」,只是「風氣泄熱惱便除,非如人間有餘不淨」。往上依次是:夜摩天「纔抱成婬」、覩史多天「但由執手」、樂變化天「唯相向笑」、他化自在天「相視成婬」。

先問:為什麼越往上越輕微?論給了理由——「以上諸天欲境轉妙、貪心轉捷故使之然」。境越妙、貪心動得越快——依毘婆沙師此解,六天婬相之名相差別所顯者是成婬所需之時量漸短,不是所需之接觸漸少。易誤處:把這一段讀成天界的風俗誌。它的落點在貪心的速度:這是一條以外相測內心的尺。落地上:這一條在修行上是可用的——依此說,境越妙則貪心轉捷,同一事之所須時量漸短,正可見貪之力道越上越猛,不是越淡。

〔十四之二〕另一家的讀法,與天上的子女。 毘婆沙師另有一解:「六天皆以形交成婬」,《世施設》所說的相抱、執手等等,只是為了顯示「彼時量差別」——即成婬所需時間的長短,不是動作的不同。論並錄之。至於天上的男女從何而來:「隨彼諸天男女膝上,有童男童女欻爾化生」。

先問:兩解差在哪?前解說動作不同,後解說動作相同而時間不同。並錄不判。易誤處:以為毘婆沙師之說必是本論所宗。本論此處是錄而不判。落地上:本卷中「毘婆沙師作如是釋」只此一見,正可與前面各處的「有說」對讀——同樣是別家之說,並錄之例。


十五、初生天眾的身量與言語

〔十五之一〕五個字裡藏著六重天。 頌文只有「初如五至十」五個字。論的長行也只說「且六欲諸天初生,如次如五六七八九十歲人」。這裡的『如次』二字是關鍵——六重天依次對應六個歲數。光記把它全部展開了:「四天王天如五歲,三十三天如六歲,夜摩天如七歲,覩史多天如八歲,樂變化天如九歲,他化自在天如十歲」。

先問:為什麼要靠疏來展開?因為頌文極省,長行也只給一串數字,讀者若不逐一配對,很容易把六個數字讀成一個籠統的『五到十歲之間』。易誤處:正是把它讀成一個區間。它是六個一一對應的定值。落地上:本論中凡見「如次」二字,都要停下來做一次一一配對;漏掉這一步,很多段落會從『精確的表』退化成『大概的話』。

〔十五之二〕色界天與一切天的共同點。 「色界天眾於初生時,身量周圓具妙衣服」——色界天初生就是成年之量,且自然有衣,不像欲界天還要從幼小長成。又說「一切天眾皆作聖言,謂彼言詞同中印度」。

先問:為什麼色界天生下來就圓滿有衣?因為色界已離欲染,本論在此以『有衣』一事作為離欲的外相標記。易誤處:把「有衣」當成禮儀性的細節。它與前一段六欲天的婬相是一對——一邊是欲相的遞減,一邊是離欲的完成。落地上:本卷寫諸天,始終沿著『欲的濃淡』這條線在排;讀到色界一段而覺得敘述忽然簡略,正是因為欲相在此已盡。


十六、欲生三種與樂生三種

〔十六之一〕欲生三種:受用的境從哪裡來。 論列三類:一是「樂受現前諸妙欲境」而自在轉的,包括全部人趣與下四天;二是「樂受自化諸妙欲境」的,唯第五樂變化天;三是「樂受他化諸妙欲境」的,即第六他化自在天。三者的分別不在受樂的多少,在所受之境從何而來——現成的、自己變的、別人變的。

先問:為什麼人與前四天要合成一類,後二天卻各自成類?本論長行沒有回答這個問題。光記引婆沙補之:「問:何故人及前四天眾合立欲生,後二天眾各別建立。答:人及前四天煩惱麁,後二天煩惱細」。易誤處:以為分類的依據是境的高下。依婆沙所補,依據是煩惱的麁細。落地上:法數的分類看似講境,實際常常在講心;問一句『這一組是依境分的還是依心分的』,往往能看穿一張表的骨架。

〔十六之二〕樂生三種,與一個懸而未決的問。 「三靜慮中於九處生受三種樂」——初靜慮的離生喜樂、第二靜慮的定生喜樂、第三靜慮離喜而唯樂,所以「長時安住、長時離苦、長時受樂,故名樂生」。第四靜慮不在其列,因為那裡已捨樂。

論隨即自設一問而不答:「生靜慮中間都無喜樂應思,何故亦號樂生天」——靜慮中間(大梵天所居)既無喜樂,為何也算樂生天?論只寫「應思」二字。光記為此引《順正理》補一解:「大梵既有喜樂現行,名樂生天亦無有失」。

先問:論主為何留一個「應思」在這裡?這是本論常見的筆法——問題已成立而定論未安,寧可標出存疑,不勉強作結。易誤處:把「應思」讀成論主的省略或疏忽。它是明確的存疑標記。落地上:讀到「應思」「此義無定」「二門俱許無失」這類語,要當作路標而不是缺口——那正是論主自己劃出的、尚未收束之處。附帶一提:這一段「離生喜樂」的「生」字,宋元明宮四本俱無;若脫此字,初靜慮的樂名就與第三靜慮的「離喜樂」相亂。文本二讀並存,本帙唯錄不判。


十七、往上的距離,等於往下的距離

〔十七之一〕一個省事的算法。 二十二天上下相距的踰繕那量,「非易可數」,所以論給了一條總則:「隨從何天去下海量,彼上所至與去下同」——任何一重天往上到下一重的距離,等於它往下到大海的距離。舉例:四大天王所住的第四層級去下大海四萬,那麼從那裡往上到三十三天也是四萬;三十三天往上到夜摩天,等於三十三天往下到大海的量;如此類推,直到善見天往上到色究竟天。

先問:這條規則有什麼好處?它把二十二個相距的數字全部省掉了,只要知道每一重天離海多遠,往上就自動得出。這是一個等比的倍增結構——每往上一重,離海的高度剛好加倍。易誤處:把「去上數亦然」讀成上下距離都相等(即固定值)。不是固定值,是各自等於自己的去下量,所以實際上是逐重加倍。落地上:本論用一句話取代一張表的地方不少;遇到這種總則,最好自己動手推兩三重,確認自己讀對了規則。

〔十七之二〕最高的那一重,與它的第二個名字。 「從此向上無復所居,此處最高名色究竟」。論隨即記一異說:「有餘師說:彼名礙究竟天」,並解釋其命名之由——「彼謂礙名目積集色至彼礙盡,得究竟名」,是說質礙之色到此窮盡。

先問:兩個名字差在哪?「色究竟」就色而言,「礙究竟」就質礙而言。二說並錄。易誤處:把兩個名字當成兩重不同的天。是同一重天的二名。落地上:本論中一名二稱之處,多半各據一義;問清各據何義,比記住哪個是『正名』有用。


十八、能昇與能見:一條界地的鐵則

〔十八之一〕昇須通或他力;同處相至可見,跨界地不可見。 「三十三天由自通力,能從本處昇夜摩天;或復依他,謂得通者及上天眾接往夜摩」——上昇要麼靠自己的神通,要麼靠他力接引,二者之外沒有第三條路。至於「見」,論之次第是:「所餘諸天昇上例爾,若來若至下見上天。然下眼不能覩上界上地,非其境界故」——上天來下、或下天昇至其處,同其處者即得見上天;所禁者是下界下地之眼取上界上地之色。兩句須連讀,不可只取後半而說『即使上去也看不見』。論拿觸作類比:「如不覺彼觸」——上界的觸下界也感覺不到。所以上地天人來到下地時,「非自身來,要作下地化」。

先問:「能昇」與「能見」是不是一回事?不是。論分二事:須神通或他力;則若上天來下、下天至上,同其處者得相見,而下界下地之眼終不能覩上界上地之色。論於此只給一句理由——「非其境界故」:下地之眼,其境界就到那裡為止;換一重界地,就換一套根與境。至於「下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」之業果理由,出眾賢,見『承衍』。易誤處:把這條讀成距離太遠所以看不見。與距離無關,是境界不相及。落地上:這一條在後面讀到天眼、讀到界地繫屬時是根本前提——根與境的繫屬由業定,不由空間定。

〔十八之二〕一個被錄下來的別部之說。 論在此段末尾記:「有餘部說:彼下地天隨樂亦能見上地色,如生此界下見上天」——別部主張下地天想看就能看見上地之色。本論只是錄,未加評騭。

先問:論主為何錄而不破?這是本論的通例。但值得注意的是,眾賢在《順正理》中對同一句話正面反破,光記也把那段破文引了進來(詳承衍)。易誤處:把光記所引的破文當作本論的意思。本論此處是存錄之姿。落地上:同一句異部說,在本論是『錄』,在眾賢是『破』,在光記是『引破』——三個層次不同,讀時要各歸其位。

〔十八之三〕天宮依處的量,四說並存。 論接著問夜摩等天宮依處有多大,錄了四家:一說量同妙高山頂;一說「上倍倍增」;一說初靜慮等一四洲、二靜慮等小千、三靜慮等中千、四靜慮等大千;又一說下三靜慮如次等小中大千,第四靜慮「量無邊際」。

先問:四說並列,論主取哪一個?此處未取。易誤處:以為並列必有暗許。落地上:本卷至此,「有餘師說」已數見不鮮;統計一下就會發現,本卷是全論中異說密度極高的一卷——因為器世間的細節多半經無明文。這正是下一節之所以要立三千大千之量的原因:異說再多,總量的定義必須先定住。


十九、小千、中千、大千

〔十九之一〕三個一千疊起來。 「千四大洲乃至梵世,如是總說為一小千,千倍小千名一中千界,千中千界總名一大千」。一小千包含一千個四大洲、日月、蘇迷盧、欲天、梵世;一千小千為中千;一千中千為大千。所以大千是一千的三次方個世界,這就是『三千大千世界』一名的來歷——不是三千個,是三重的千。

先問:這個名字為什麼最容易讀錯?因為漢語的「三千」看起來就是一個數目。它其實是『三種千』的略稱。易誤處:正是把三千讀成數目。落地上:這是佛典中被誤讀頻率最高的名相之一;一旦明白它是三重乘方,經中「三千大千世界」的規模感才會落到實處。

〔十九之二〕同成同壞,與一條邊界。 論說「如是大千同成同壞」,並預告「同成壞相後當廣辯」——那是下一卷劫量章的事。至於小千的邊界,本論長行只說到梵世為止;光記引《順正理》補明其界:「此中小千唯舉其梵世故,小光等非小千界攝」——小光天以上不算在小千之內。

先問:為什麼要問這個邊界?因為若不定住,就不知道『一個世界』究竟包到哪一層天為止。易誤處:以為小千包含全部色界。依所補之說,只到梵世(初靜慮)。落地上:三千大千的計數單位是『一個四大洲加其上諸天到梵世』;把這個單位認清楚,後面講災劫所壞的範圍時才不會錯層。


二十、身量:從三肘半到一萬六千

〔二十之一〕四洲人的身量,一倍一倍地加。 贍部洲人「身多長三肘半」,少數有四肘;東勝身洲八肘、西牛貨洲十六肘、北俱盧洲三十二肘——從東洲起,每往一洲加一倍。

先問:為什麼贍部洲的人量要給兩個數(三肘半與四肘),別洲只給一個?因為贍部洲是壽量與身量都最不定的一洲,下一節壽量處說得更明白。易誤處:把四洲身量讀成一條連續遞增的線(三肘半、七肘、十四肘……)。它是從東洲的八肘開始倍增的,贍部洲自成一格。落地上:凡本論給出兩個數而不合等比的地方,多半是在標記『這一項不定』——這比記住數字本身更有用。

〔二十之二〕諸天的身量,兩種單位、兩種算法。 欲界六天以俱盧舍為單位,最下一重是四分之一俱盧舍,「如是後後一一分增」,到第六重是一俱盧舍半——是等差(每重加四分之一)。色界則以踰繕那為單位:梵眾半、梵輔一、大梵一半、少光二,前四重是每重加半(仍是等差);「此上餘天皆增倍倍」,改為等比。而在等比之中又有一個例外——「唯無雲減三踰繕那」,無量光天由二倍為四,這樣倍增下去,到色究竟天正好「增滿萬六千」。

先問:為什麼中間要減三?本論長行沒有給理由,只給結果。三疏在這裡爭得最兇(詳承衍)。易誤處:把減三看成筆誤或傳寫之訛。光記於此並列數解而不定於一,其一云「又解:為成色究竟天萬六千故,所以減三」,其後又出「又解:法爾故然」——論本自身未給理由,古德亦並存數解,見『承衍』。落地上:遇到一串規則數列中忽然出現的例外,先驗算一次首尾;能對上首尾的例外,多半是為了收數而設的。寶疏在此另補一則生動的參照,引婆沙云「如曷邏呼阿素落王所得身形其量廣大,如色究竟所得身形一萬六千六踰繕那量」——阿素洛王的身量竟可比色究竟天。


二十一、壽量:先要立好天上的晝夜

〔二十一之一〕人間四洲的壽。 「北俱盧人定壽千歲,西牛貨人壽五百歲,東勝身人壽二百五十歲」——三洲各遞減一半,而且是『定壽』。唯獨「南贍部人壽無定限」:劫減到最後只有十年,劫初則「人壽無量,百千等數不能計量」。

先問:贍部洲的『不定』是缺陷還是特點?從壽命看是缺陷,從修行看未必——正是這一洲有金剛座、有佛出世。論在此不作議論,只記事實。易誤處:把「後十初叵量」讀成從十年增到無量。方向相反:劫初無量,劫減之後才降到十年。落地上:四洲之中三洲定壽而一洲不定。須留意壽量有定/不定是否可能中夭是兩軸——論後文明說「諸處壽量皆有中夭,唯北俱盧定壽千歲」,西、東二洲壽量雖定而仍有中夭。

〔二十一之二〕不先立晝夜,就算不了天壽。 論說得很明白:「要先建立天上晝夜,方可算計天壽短長」。辦法是以人間的年數換天上的一晝夜:人間五十年為四大王眾天一晝夜,三十日成月、十二月成年,該天壽五百年。往上依次以人間一百、二百、四百、八百、一千六百歲為一晝夜,壽命依次為一千、二千、四千、八千、一萬六千歲。

先問:這是一個什麼樣的結構?是雙重倍增——晝夜的長度加倍,年數也加倍,所以實際壽命是四倍地往上跳。易誤處:只看到「彼壽五百」「彼壽千歲」這一串數字,忘了那些『年』的長度本身各不相同。落地上:這是本卷最容易被輕輕讀過而其實最需要動筆的一段;把兩重倍增分開算一次,六欲天的壽量表才真正到手。

〔二十一之三〕沒有日月的地方怎麼分晝夜。 論自設一問:持雙山以上沒有日月,那些天如何建立晝夜與光明?答有四途:「依花開合建立晝夜,如拘物陀、鉢特摩等」,或依諸鳥鳴叫與安靜的差別,或依天眾睡醒的不同;至於光明,則「依自身光明成外光明事」。

先問:這一問為什麼必須問?因為前一段剛剛用『晝夜』作了壽量的計算單位;若上面諸天根本沒有晝夜,整套算法就落空了。所以這一問是補上算法的地基。易誤處:把它當成一段風物描寫。它是論證上的必要環節。落地上:阿毘達磨凡立一算法,必回頭補其前提——這是它與一般敘述最不同的地方。

〔二十一之四〕色界與無色界:壽與身相等。 色界「無晝夜別,但以劫數知壽短長」,而且「彼劫壽短長與身量數等」——身量半踰繕那則壽半劫,身量一萬六千則壽一萬六千劫。無色界四天自下而上是二萬、四萬、六萬、八萬劫。

先問:色界的壽為什麼要與身量掛鉤?因為色界已無晝夜可計,需要另找一個尺;本論取身量之數作為壽劫之數,一表兩用。易誤處:以為身量與壽量之間有因果關係。論只說「數等」——是數目相等,不是說一個生出另一個。落地上:法相之學中「數等」與「即是」是兩回事;分清這一層,很多對應表就不會被讀成因果。

〔二十一之五〕『劫』究竟是哪一種劫。 論自問:上面所說的劫,是壞劫、成劫、中劫還是大劫?答:「少光以上大全為劫,自下諸天大半為劫」——少光天以上用一個完整的大劫,以下三重天用半個大劫。並以大梵王為例驗算:大梵超過梵輔天壽一劫半,成、住、壞各二十中劫共六十中劫為一劫半,所以下三天所用的『劫』就是四十中劫(即大劫之半)。

先問:為什麼要特地問一句『哪一種劫』?因為前面一路說『壽一劫』『壽半劫』,若不定住劫的種類,所有數字都懸空。易誤處:把「大半」讀成『大部分』。它是『大劫之半』。落地上:這一段是本卷計量最緊的一節,論主用一個可以驗算的例子(大梵一劫半)把定義坐實——凡遇單位之爭,找一個能驗算的實例,是最可靠的辦法。


二十二、惡趣的壽量:以天壽為地獄的一晝夜

〔二十二之一〕六欲天與六地獄的對應。 「四大王等六欲天壽,如其次第為等活等六㮈落迦一晝一夜,壽量如次亦同彼天」——四大王眾天的五百年,是等活地獄的一晝夜;以這樣的晝夜算成年,等活地獄壽五百年。乃至他化自在天的一萬六千年,是炎熱地獄的一晝夜,炎熱地獄壽一萬六千年。

先問:這個對應為什麼要建立?因為地獄與天一樣沒有日月可計晝夜,所以借天壽為尺。這是與前一節同一個手法的再用。易誤處:以為「壽量如次亦同彼天」是說地獄壽命與天壽命相等。數字相同而單位不同——地獄的『年』遠遠長於天的『年』。落地上:本卷至此已三次用到『換單位』的算法(天壽、色界劫、地獄),三次的結構完全相同;認得這個結構,後面兩重極熱與無間就不必再算。

〔二十二之二〕不入這個表的四種。 極熱地獄壽半中劫,無間地獄壽一中劫——這二者不用天壽換算,直接以劫計。傍生壽量「多無定限」,最長者一中劫,「謂難陀等諸大龍王」;論引世尊之語為證:「大龍有八,皆住一劫能持大地」。光記把這八位的名字從《法花經》中補齊:「有八龍王,難陀龍王、跋難陀龍王、娑伽羅龍王、和修吉龍王、德叉迦龍王、阿那婆達多龍王、摩那斯龍王、優盋羅龍王」。鬼則「以人間一月為一日」,壽五百年。

先問:為什麼極熱與無間跳出了那張對應表?因為六欲天只有六重,對應六個地獄就用完了;剩下二個只能另立。易誤處:以為八大地獄的壽量是一條連續的等比。前六是換算來的,後二是直接規定的。落地上:一張表用盡之後如何接續,是阿毘達磨常見的技術問題;本論的辦法是換一種單位重新起算,不硬湊。

〔二十二之三〕寒地獄之壽:一個芝麻的譬喻。 寒地獄的壽量無法用前法計算,於是「世尊寄喻顯彼壽言」:人間二十佉梨成摩揭陀國的一麻婆訶,裝滿胡麻,假設有人一百年取出一粒;「如是巨勝易有盡期,生頞部陀壽量難盡」。第二重是它的二十倍,此後「後後二十倍增」,八寒地獄的壽量由此而定。寶疏為這兩個容量單位作了訓詁:「佉梨」者「受一斛器名」,「婆訶」者「此云篅,受二十斛」,並說「摩揭陀國盛麻篅多受二十石」。

先問:為什麼此處要用譬喻而不給數字?因為這個數大到給出數字也無感;譬喻反而能讓人量得到。而且世尊只說『難盡』,並未給定值——第一重尚且如此,其後每重二十倍,八重之後的數已不必說。易誤處:把百年取一粒的芝麻當作實際的壽數計法。它是顯示『難盡』的方便,不是算式。落地上:本論在計量最極端處改用譬喻,這一手法值得記住——當數目已超出可感的範圍時,比喻比數字更誠實。


二十三、中夭,與不會中夭的人

〔二十三之一〕『諸處』與『別有情』兩層。 「諸處壽量皆有中夭,唯北俱盧定壽千歲」——除北俱盧洲之外,各處的壽量都可能中途夭折。但論立刻補了關鍵的一層:「此約處說,非別有情,有別有情不中夭故」。

先問:這一句補在哪裡?補在『處』與『人』的分別上。就處所而言,除北俱盧外皆有中夭;但在有中夭的處所裡,仍有特定的個人不會中夭。所以這是兩層判斷,不是一層。易誤處:把「諸處有中夭」讀成『每一個人都可能中夭』。論明說不是。落地上:本論凡言『某處如何』,都要問一句『這是就處說還是就人說』——這一分別在後面談趣、談界繫時反覆出現,此處是最清楚的一個樣本。

〔二十三之二〕哪些人不中夭。 論列出來的是:住覩史多天的「一生所繫菩薩」、「最後有」者、佛所授記者、佛所差使者、隨信行者、隨法行者,以及懷菩薩胎之母與懷輪王胎之母。論總結一句:「此等如應皆無中夭」。

先問:這一串人有什麼共同點?都是身上擔著一件必須完成的事的人——待成佛的、待受記的、待受使命的、乃至懷著這種人的母親。壽命在這裡不是果報的長短問題,而是任務能否完成的問題。光記為首一類作了訓釋:「謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,無始已來為多生死之所繫縛,今唯一生所繫」——『一生所繫』是說只剩一生的繫縛,不是繫在某一生上。

易誤處:把「一生所繫」讀成『被一生所束縛』的消極義。依光記之訓,它是只剩一生的意思,是接近解脫的標記。落地上:本卷從最下的風輪講到最上的色究竟,從最短的十年講到八萬劫,數字鋪陳到極處,最後收在這一句——有些人不受這張表的支配,因為他們身上有未了之事。整卷的量表至此有了一個出口。


承衍:三疏之鏡

以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:三疏之判釋與互異、眾賢之破與補、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。

一、三疏互異之處

一部只在轉引中留下隻語的疏。 本卷的疏有一個特別的情形:神泰疏是殘本,現存七卷分屬界品、根品、賢聖品,世品全闕,所以本卷沒有泰疏的逐文釋可繫。然而三疏之中卻四次明引「泰法師」(寶疏作「太法師」)之說,且所引都正是本卷範圍內的論題——晝夜三際的算法、彌勒上生下生的劫數。這說明泰疏原本確曾釋過世品,只是那部分今已不傳,唯藉他家轉引得見數語。據實標闕,不以他卷之文充之。

「增」字究竟有幾解。 本論長行給了二說,光記在其上又析出一個獨立的「第三解云:有說有情從地獄出已,數更遭此苦,故說為增」,並謂「此約出本地獄已數數受苦名增,故與第二不同」;此外又引《順正理》補一解。寶疏正面駁之:「評其論意,只是兩釋,不是三解。有人謂是三解,誤也」。頌疏於此節不介入。二疏所爭者是同一段論文該切成幾段,並錄不判。

金剛座與琰魔王都的地理。 光記引《正理論》云「此贍部洲南邊直下深過五百踰繕那量,有琰魔王都,縱廣亦爾」,並自出調停:「以此文證,明知金剛座近北,諸地獄等在王都下稍近南邊,不相妨也」。寶疏逕駁:「今詳此釋,事恐不然。無間地獄廣二萬踰繕那,於四門外有十六增,或說七地獄遶無間獄,其傍復有寒地獄處,縱少近南亦侵金剛座下」,並另立己解——人趣的居處與鬼趣的宅舍本來就不相障礙,所以地獄與金剛座亦不相妨。二疏所解不同而所護者同(同要讓金剛座與地獄並存不礙),並錄不判。

無雲天為何減三。 光記解為「從變異受。初修不變異受難,故減三也」,另出二解(為成色究竟一萬六千之整數、法爾故然)。寶疏評其倒置:「此似倒也,既得難定,身壽應加。應言:下變異受以樂欲心勝,由此造業引壽等勝;不變異受引欣心劣,由此造業引壽等減」——所立方向與光記正相反。此為本卷三疏正面交鋒最鮮明的一組,並錄不判。

晝夜三際的算法:三家三種收法。 這是本卷分歧最烈之處,也最能見三疏各自的性格。光記詳引泰法師之算與真諦法師之算,繼而自出詰難「難曰:此亦非理。若言七月九日說夜漸增,為據何時」,末後自立調停:「今解云:西方諸國寒、熱、雨三時節不定,還隨方俗立三際異。世親菩薩造論處立三際」。寶疏則轉引玄奘本人的口義——「唐三藏以三月十六日為雨際之初,取五月九日夜增,亦不違《婆沙》」——並列太法師之說,最後以兩地寒熱不同為由調停,自定其算:「今釋《俱舍》雨際第二月白半第九日,即是此方五月第九日為定」。頌疏則並列泰法師與「光法師」(即光記作者)二說,末後明白宣告不判:「此上兩釋,泰法師意,約晝夜停等後說有增減。光法師意,約晝夜極長後說有增減。各據一義,任情取捨。更有多解,不能具敘」。

三家於同一問題,一自出新解、一歸諸方俗、一明白兩存。頌疏那一句「各據一義,任情取捨」尤可注意——它是古德自己對『一義二宗並錄』體例的說明,不是後人為之立的規矩。

光記獨評異譯之算。 光記於寒地獄壽量的容量換算處,逕評真諦之算為不然,所評者作「二十佉梨為一婆訶,一婆訶有二百五十六斛」。此為疏評異譯,非疏與疏互評,寶疏於此未涉,而自出「佉梨」「婆訶」之訓詁。並錄不判。

寶疏獨補而光記未涉的一處。 三輪相對廣狹的問題,本論長行未論,光記亦不涉;寶疏獨立稽核,先斥一誤「有人謂十二餘億為大千之徑。全不相當」,繼引婆沙所出數種師說,末後自下己判:「今詳前之二說、前說為善。既同一雨水以成水輪、於中何要分金、水別?又三輪相依,風輪既等大千,水、金因何即小」。寶疏獨立批判之特色,於此可見。

古德自身的存疑之標。 寶疏於本論「有餘部說」一句下自陳未詳:「論『有餘部說至如篅持穀』,述異部釋。未知何部,應撿」——不知此異部出於何部,明白標出待考。古德於未安處標存疑,此亦體例,據實錄。

光記處理婆沙未評決時的自述判準。 於妙高層級量之異說處,光記云「《婆沙》雖無評家,此論既無異說,即以此論為正」——婆沙自己沒有評決的,就以本論為正。此為光記自述其取捨之法,非論文所有。

彌勒何劫下生:三說並陳而不決。 光記引泰法師依《立世經》之說(第九住劫上生、第十劫下生),並記真諦法師亦同此說;繼引其師承之異說「然和上云:釋迦牟尼當住劫第一劫出世。於此劫中已有四佛出世,即拘盧孫佛至釋迦佛。若彌勒佛,當第二住劫下生」——則彌勒當於次一住劫下生。光記三說並陳,不作最終決斷。此屬曆算附論,並錄不判。

二、眾賢之破與補釋

眾賢的兩部論在此品的品名不作「世品」,而作「辯緣起品」;其起界作「如是已辯有情世間,器世間今當辯」,與本卷同界。

眾賢在本卷沒有用「經主」點世親的名——但這不等於本卷無爭。 以《順正理》慣用的反破標記逐字檢,「經主」一詞在本卷嚴格範圍內零命中;其唯一之見已落在下一卷(極微字剎那)的釋文中。《顯宗論》同範圍內亦零命中。這是一條誠實的負命題,但它所能證的只有一件事:眾賢在本卷沒有用「經主」這個標名去點世親的名。不能由此推出本卷無爭。事實上眾賢順讀到四洲相這一頌時,對本頌的措辭有逐句批評:既已說「畟方,面各二千」,義已自顯,「等」字便無用;「圓無缺」與「畟方」兩兩互顯,也是重出;他認為應該逕說「如滿月」「如方座」。《顯宗論》同場景的頌就已經改成「西瞿陀尼洲,其相如滿月」與「北洲如方座」。⇒ 標名之零命中 ≠ 無批評。逐字與頁錨見本子考據目五。此處唯錄,不判誰是。

獄卒之諍:眾賢換了一種體裁。 本論以問答體並陳二宗,並引法善現頌為證;眾賢於同一位置全不採問答體,也不引那首頌,逕作綜合陳述:「無間大熱及炎熱三,於中皆無獄卒防守。大叫號叫及眾合三,少有獄卒,琰魔王使時時往來巡檢彼故。其餘皆為獄卒防守。有情無情異類獄卒,防守治罰罪有情故,火不焚燒」。《顯宗論》同段逐字略同。眾賢以「有情無情異類獄卒」一語兼收二類,並補出本論未及的細節——何獄有卒、何獄無卒。這不是反破(眾賢未言本論非理),是敘述體裁之異。光記亦引了《順正理》這一段以補本論之未詳。並錄不判。

下天見上:眾賢所破者是別部,不是論主。 本論只錄「有餘部說」而未加評騭,眾賢則正面破之:「有餘部說:如欲界中若往若來,下眼見上。如是色界諸地往來,設離下化身,下眼亦見上。彼說非理,以色界中諸地相望因果斷故,要離下地染方得上生故。下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」。光記把這段破文引入,並標明所破之部。要點在於:眾賢所破者與本論所不取者一致,只是本論存錄而眾賢申論。並錄不判。

兩部論之間也有詳略之異。 《顯宗論》於「必化下身,為令下見」之後逕接下一問,沒有「有餘部說……彼說非理」那一段——同一位置,順正理有破而顯宗無破。此為二論本身之異,非世親與眾賢之異,誌錄之。

眾賢於卷首補了一段壞成的背景。 本論一開口就說風輪之生,眾賢則先交代何以有風輪生:「此百俱胝四大洲界如是安立,同壞同成。謂諸有情法爾修得諸靜慮故,下命終已生第二等靜慮地中,下器世間三災所壞,經久遠已,依下空中,由諸有情業增上力有微風起,後後轉增,蟠結成輪,其體堅密」。這是承取而非反破,屬長行詳略的擴充。若讀者要問『上一個世界到哪裡去了』,這一段是可對讀的材料。

三、真諦舊譯之異

真諦《俱舍釋論》於本卷相應段自成一系。最先要知道的是:本卷的起界句在真諦本作「說眾生世界已,器世界今當說」——他全篇作「器世界」而不作「器世間」。以玄奘的詞去搜真諦本,此界永遠找不到;跨本比對只能取場景結構。二本分卷數也不同:真諦世間品分四卷、玄奘分五卷,本卷所對的那一段橫跨真諦的兩卷。

譯名自成一系。 蘇迷盧作須彌婁、踰繕那作由旬、洛叉作洛沙、贍部洲作剡浮洲、阿鼻旨作阿毘指、北俱盧作北鳩婁、等活作更活、覩史多作兜帥多;九山與四河的音寫全部不同。體例上,玄奘作「頌曰/論曰」整頌先出,真諦作「偈曰/釋曰」偈句逐句嵌釋。

兩處最見譯法分途的例。 其一是十六「增」——真諦作十六「園」。玄奘取苦之遞加,真諦取苑囿之象,同一所指而著眼全異。其二是人名:那位說琰魔卒頌的大德,玄奘作「法善現」(半意譯半音寫),真諦作「達摩須部底」(全音寫);頌文本身譯字也不同,玄奘作「見他苦欣悅」,真諦作「見他苦生樂」。同型的還有部派名:玄奘作「化地部」,真諦作「彌嬉沙塞部」——一意譯一音寫。附帶一提,此處二本所繫的條件亦異:玄奘作「若無風時唯遍五十」,真諦作「逆風薰五十由旬」。並錄不判。

一組主副恰相反的數字。 三十三天山頂之量,玄奘頌本主張每邊八萬,而以「四邊各唯二萬」為餘師之說;真諦偈本卻主張「三十三住頂,縱廣二十千」(每邊二萬),並以「一一邊各八萬由旬」為餘師之說,另又重出一師申明每邊二萬、周圍八萬。同一組數字,二本的『正說』與『餘師說』恰好對調。這不是譯名之異,是二本所承頌文的異讀之異,二譯各自忠實其所據底本。並錄不判。

開合之異一例。 中夭段末所列不中夭者,二本皆列兩個首項:奘作「一生所繫菩薩」與「最後有」,諦作「一生補處菩薩」與「最後生菩薩」——首項可對讀,次項之範圍則二本表述有別。究竟是同一位菩薩的兩個階段,還是兩類人,二譯開合不同,並錄不判。

詳略之向雙頭。 本卷不能一概說某本較詳:八功德水處玄奘八目具陳而真諦連讀約舉,初生身量處則玄奘「初如五至十」五字,真諦作「譬五年乃至,譬十年初生」而字數倍之。詳略隨段而異,無定向。

四、可對讀之座標

本卷所立者,是一幅沒有建築師的世界圖。風輪之生、寶物之成、日月之不墜,論一律歸之於「諸有情業增上力」——器世間不由一因所造,亦不由外力所持,只由共業所感。這一命題到了唯識一系轉為另一種說法:器界是識中共相種子之所變。同一個問題、兩代答案,是本卷最可對讀的一處。

三千大千的建制(一千四大洲乃至梵世為小千,三重乘千為大千)與四洲身量壽量之表,瑜伽行系之根本論所立有可逐字對讀者——小千、中千、大千三重乘千之制如此,以人間歲數立天上晝夜而遞推壽量之法亦如此;至於四洲身量,二論皆呈逐洲增大而數值表述不同,唯錄不判;數目相同而所繫的義理框架不同,可以並看。

至於本卷收尾的「一生所繫」,真諦舊譯正作「一生補處菩薩」——一名之異,唯錄。

Before reading this fascicle

This fascicle opens with fourteen graphs only — “Thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated.” The three fascicles above have finished the world of sentient beings (the three realms and five destinies, intermediate existence and entry into the womb, the twelvefold dependent origination), and with one sentence the author turns and begins to speak of the “receptacle” that holds those lives. All three ancient masters let the knife of their outlines fall at this same place: Puguang’s Record marks “from here the second major part explains the receptacle world”; Fabao’s Commentary marks “from here the second major part of the present chapter explains the receptacle world”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary marks “from here the second major part explains the receptacle world” — three masters dividing their fascicles independently and yet with boundaries exactly alike, from which one may see that this cut was not forced upon the text by later hands but is an opening the text made for itself.

Beneath the receptacle world there are three further parts: first the “receptacle dwelt in” (the place where one lives), second the “measure of those who can dwell” (how large those who live there are and how long they live), third the “divisions of the least measures” (the smallest of measures). This fascicle occupies the first two, and the third is in the next fascicle. The receptacle dwelt in divides further into eight headings, and all three masters mark them alike — the three circles, the nine mountains, the eight seas, the four continents, the black mountains and the rest, the hells, the sun and moon, and the receptacles of the gods. These eight headings are the skeleton of the first half of the fascicle, and in reading one may take them as a cross-section drawn from the bottom upward: first the base is laid, then the mountains and seas are set up, then one probes downward to the hells, then follows upward along the sun and moon and the palaces of the gods.

One thing should be said before anything else. This fascicle reads like a geographical treatise, and the numbers in it are startlingly dense; but what really bears the weight is not the numbers but that one sentence that recurs again and again, “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings.” The wind circle arises out of space: it is that. Gold congeals upon the water: it is that. The several jewels come into being: it is that. The sun and moon do not fall: that too. In this whole map of the world there is no architect — this is the most essential thread in the fascicle, and every passage below will run up against it.


I. The Base of the Receptacle World: Wind Circle, Water Circle, Golden Circle

〔1.1〕What is lowest of all in the world. First ask: since a world is to be established, there must be some lowest tier of all — what is that tier? The treatise answers without hesitation — lowest of all is wind, not earth and not water. “That is, by the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings, lowest of all and resting upon space a wind circle arises”: the wind circle arises resting upon space, its breadth “beyond numbering,” its thickness sixteen hundred thousand yojanas. Next comes the water circle, eleven hundred thousand and twenty thousand deep; the upper layer of the water is beaten by the wind of action and congeals into gold, whereupon the water is reduced to eight lakṣa and the gold is three hundred thousand and twenty thousand thick. Of the three tiers, only the lowest, the wind circle, rests directly upon space; the other two rest each upon the tier below.

The easy error is to take this for the description of some physical process of cosmic origination. It is not. The first cause the treatise gives is not wind but “the dominant force of action” — the wind circle is a result and not a cause. So each time below that something new is to be produced (the jewels, the sun and moon), the treatise says “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings” once again; this is not idle repetition but the handing back, time after time, of responsibility to sentient beings themselves.

In practice: in reading the Abhidharma map of the world, the first step is to change one habit — do not ask “who made it,” ask “whose action called it forth.” Once that is changed, the numbers of the whole fascicle fall onto the ledger of practice.

〔1.2〕Why the wind circle has to be described as so hard. The treatise adduces a strange simile: suppose a “great Mahānagna” were to take a vajra wheel and strike down with all his might, and the outcome would be that “the vajra shatters and the wind circle is unharmed.” Puguang’s Record explains this: “a great Mahānagna is the name of a god among men; it means here the Naked One” — a god of great strength. First ask: to speak of a layer of wind, why bring in the vajra for comparison? Because the moment a reader hears “wind circle” his instinct is that it must be light, empty, and not to be relied upon; and the treatise means first to strike that instinct down. A world can be established precisely because that seemingly emptiest of layers has an entity that is “firm and dense.”

The easy error is to read this sentence as mythological ornament. It is a sentence that fixes a nature — the firmness and density of the wind circle is the precondition of all the tiers piled above it. In practice: the degree of solidity in a thing called forth by action is not determined by its “material” but by the force of action; and this item will be needed again below, in speaking of the iron ground of the hells and of the palaces of the gods that dwell resting upon space.

〔1.3〕Why the water does not flow away — an answer with two schools standing side by side. The treatise inserts a very good question here: the water circle hangs above the wind circle, so “how is it that the water circle does not flow away sideways?” The answer comes from two schools. One says that it is held by the force of the actions of sentient beings, and adduces as a simile that food and drink, while not yet digested, “never in the end flow away and fall into the receptacle of the digested”; the other says that it is held by the force of wind, and adduces as a simile “as a chuan holds the grain” — a chuan being a round granary woven of bamboo that pens the grain in.

First ask: where do the two schools differ? The former gathers the cause into action; the latter puts the cause upon a concrete outer condition (wind). The two accounts stand side by side and the treatise passes no verdict. The easy error is to think that because there are two accounts the author is being vague. He is not — the standing practice of this treatise is that wherever there are divergent accounts and the scriptures have no express text, both parties are recorded together. In practice: hereafter, whenever one reads “some other masters say” or “some other school says,” do not hurry to find which is the “right answer”; first see clearly where each of the two schools puts the weight.

〔1 appended〕A third measure of the water circle and the golden circle: diameter and circumference. Besides thickness, the treatise gives a third way of measuring — breadth: “the breadths of the two circles are equal in number, namely a diameter of twelve hundred thousand three thousand four hundred and a half. The number of the circumference is three times its edge, namely a circumference amounting to thirty-six hundred thousand ten thousand three hundred and fifty yojanas.” First ask: what is this sentence reckoning? It is reckoning the diameter and the circumference of the disc formed by the water circle and the golden circle: the breadths of the two circles are the same, the diameter being twelve hundred thousand three thousand four hundred and fifty yojanas (the “half” means half of a hundred, that is, fifty), and the circumference taken as three times the diameter — twelve hundred thousand three thousand four hundred and fifty multiplied by three gives thirty-six hundred thousand ten thousand three hundred and fifty. The easy error is to confuse “breadth” with the “thickness” spoken of above. Thickness is a measure up and down (the water eight lakṣa thick, the gold three hundred thousand and twenty thousand), breadth a measure across (diameter and circumference); the one measures depth and the other width, each has its own figures, and neither may be inferred from the other. In practice: the method of verification lies in the text itself — circumference equals diameter times three; take this and multiply once more, and the two ends lock together of themselves. Of every figure in this fascicle ask first, “is this a thickness, a diameter, or a circumference?” and the numbers will not fall into confusion.


II. The Nine Great Mountains upon the Golden Circle

〔2.1〕How the nine mountains are arranged. First ask: are the nine mountains nine ranges side by side, or arranged in some other way? The treatise gives the answer the moment it opens its mouth — “upon the golden circle there are nine great mountains, the Sublime and Lofty Mountain King standing at the center, and the remaining eight encircling the Sublime and Lofty round about.” Of the nine, the first seven are called “the inner mountains”; only outside the seventh mountain are the four great continents, and outside them the Iron Circle Mountain, “encircling one world-sphere round about as the rim encircles a wheel.” Their substances are distinguished too: the seven mountains beginning with Upholding the Pair are “constituted of gold alone,” while the Sublime and Lofty Mountain King has one jewel on each of its four sides — gold on the north, silver on the east, vaiḍūrya on the south, sphaṭika on the west. The treatise even explains in passing a thing that can be seen in ordinary life: because the south side is vaiḍūrya, “therefore the sky above Jambudvīpa looks like the color of vaiḍūrya” — why the sky over our heads is blue is answered by the south face of the mountain.

The easy error is to take the nine mountains for nine parallel ranges. They are concentric circles: one center and eight surrounding rings, the outermost being the Iron Circle. In practice: hold on to this figure of concentric circles, for the eight seas, the four continents, and even the reckoning of the three-thousandfold great thousand that follow all hang upon this one diagram.

〔2.2〕The names of the mountains were not chosen at random. The names of the nine mountains are all transcriptions, awkward to read; but behind every one of them there is an image. Puguang’s Record explains the sense of each mountain in turn: “Yugandhara means here Upholding the Pair. Upon the summit of this mountain there are two tracks like the ruts of a chariot, and because the mountain upholds the two tracks it is named Upholding the Pair” · “Mount Īṣādhara means here Upholding the Axle; the peak of the mountain towers up like the axle of a chariot” · “Khadiraka is the name of an Indian tree; in the southern parts of this land too there is this tree, called yanmu” · “Sudarśana means here Fair to Behold” · “Aśvakarṇa means here Horse’s Ear, the peak of the mountain being like a horse’s ear” · “Vinataka means here Elephant’s Trunk” · “Nimindhara is the name of a fish; the snout of that fish is pointed, and the peak of the mountain is like that fish’s snout.” The one at the center is the same — Puguang’s Record says, “Sumeru means here the Sublime and Lofty. The old rendering Xumi is a corruption.”

First ask: what use is it to know the senses of these names? Because it tells us that these names were originally words of image and not serial numbers. Upholding the Pair, Upholding the Axle, Horse’s Ear, Elephant’s Trunk, Fish’s Snout — one after another they are all speaking of shapes. The easy error is to take a transcribed name for an unintelligible spell and so skip the whole passage. In practice: whenever one meets a transcribed term of Xuanzang’s, ask first whether the ancient masters left a rendering marked “means here”; with that rendering, a long string of strange words at once becomes a picture that can be seen.

〔2.3〕How the jewels are produced — and a refutation of the Sāṃkhya in passing. The treatise says that the jewels too are called forth by the force of action: great clouds rain upon the golden circle, the gathered water surges into billows, and “this water becomes the seed and store of the several jewels” — Puguang’s Record takes these two words apart and explains, “that the water can produce jewels is what ‘seed’ means; that jewels come out of the water is what ‘store’ means.” Then violent winds drill and beat, and water is transformed and produces jewels. Just here the treatise adds a sentence that goes to the heart of the matter: “the cause ceases and the result arises, their entities not existing together; it is not as in what the Sāṃkhya accomplish by transmutation.”

Thereupon comes a short passage of debate and refutation against the non-Buddhists. The Sāṃkhya maintain that there is a permanently abiding “possessor of dharmas” upon which dharmas arise and dharmas cease; the treatise asks back: having granted that the bearer abides permanently, you cannot also say that upon it there is arising and ceasing. The other side changes his words: “the possessor of dharmas is not apart from the dharma; it is just this dharma that, at the time of transmutation, serves as the support of differing characteristics.” The author settles it in one sentence — “that it should be this very thing and yet not be thus: such a statement I have never heard.” Puguang’s Record adduces an example from the science of reasons to help explain it: “sound is impermanent; impermanence is a dharma. Sound is a possessor of dharmas, and because it has the dharma of impermanence it is called a possessor of dharmas.”

First ask: why, in speaking of the establishing of the world, does a passage refuting the non-Buddhists suddenly appear? Because the matter of “water turning into jewels” is exactly the watershed where the two sides understand the words “transmutation” differently — the Sarvāstivādins say the cause ceases and the result arises and their entities do not exist together, the Sāṃkhya say the entity is permanent and its characteristics change. The treatise uses one concrete example to fasten the abstract point of contention in place. The easy error is to take this passage for a digression off the topic. In practice: hereafter, whenever one reads the words “transmutation,” ask first, “is the entity of what is transmuted one and the same before and after?” If the answer is that it is the same, one has landed on the Sāṃkhya side; only if the answer is that the cause ceases and the result arises is it the position of this treatise.

〔2 appended〕The close of the nine mountains: what is sunk in the water is uniform, what stands out of it grows lower by half and half, and the breadth equals what stands out of the water. After the names and the arrangement of the nine mountains, the treatise gathers their measures at one stroke in a single passage: “Thus the nine mountains stand upon the golden circle, the measure sunk in the water being in every case eighty thousand yojanas, and Mount Sumeru standing out of the water likewise. The remaining eight stand out of the water lower by half and half, that is, the first, Upholding the Pair, stands out of the water forty thousand, and so on to the last, the Iron Circle Mountain, which stands out of the water three hundred and twelve and a half. The breadth of each of these nine mountains is in each case the same as the height by which it itself stands out of the water.” First ask: how many rules are given here in all? Three: ① what is sunk in the water is uniform — the portion of the nine mountains sunk in the water is eighty thousand yojanas in every case, without exception; ② what stands out of the water halves in turn — Sumeru stands out of the water eighty thousand as well, while of the other eight, beginning from Upholding the Pair, the first stands out forty thousand and then each successive one is halved: forty thousand, twenty thousand, ten thousand, five thousand, two thousand five hundred, one thousand two hundred and fifty, six hundred and twenty-five, and at the Iron Circle Mountain exactly three hundred and twelve and a half; ③ breadth equals what stands out of the water — the breadth across of each mountain is exactly equal to its own measure standing out of the water. The easy error is to take “sunk in the water” as halving too. It does not — only what stands out of the water halves; what is sunk is a constant. In practice: these three rules together fix the shape of the nine mountains completely: what is sunk is equally deep, what stands out grows lower by half with each mountain, and however high it stands out, so wide it is; and taking the last item, three hundred and twelve and a half, and working backward, seven halvings restore exactly forty thousand — this is the method by which the two ends verify each other.


III. The Eight Seas and the Water Possessed of Eight Qualities

〔3.1〕How the eight seas are reckoned. Between the nine mountains there are eight seas, “with the Sublime and Lofty first and the Circle Mountain last, and eight seas in between, of which the first seven are called inner.” The innermost is eighty thousand broad and three times as much on each of the four sides (two hundred thousand and forty thousand on each); the remaining six are each narrower than the one before by half, the second forty thousand and so on to the seventh, one thousand two hundred and fifty. The eighth is the outer sea, filled to the brim with salt water, three hundred thousand and twenty-two thousand broad.

First ask: why do the seven inner seas decrease by half and half while the outer sea is on the contrary especially large? Because the seven inner seas are wedged between mountain and mountain, and since the mountains are each lower and narrower than the one before by half, the seas decrease along with them; whereas the outer sea lies between the last golden mountain and the Iron Circle, and that is the broad expanse of water where the four great continents are. The treatise also states one thing honestly: it does not list the circumferences of the seven inner seas, “because they would be too cumbersome” — not that it does not know them, but that it finds them tedious.

The easy error is to think the eight seas are eight lakes side by side. They are eight rings of water. In practice: this passage is the first time in the whole fascicle that the reckoning “decreasing by half and half” appears, and the sideways projection of the four terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the increase of the bodily measures of the gods later on all use the same manner of geometric reckoning; get familiar with it here first.

〔3.2〕The water possessed of eight qualities, and another set of eight items from a different sūtra. The water of the seven inner seas is possessed of eight qualities: “first sweet, second cool, third soft, fourth light, fifth pure, sixth free of foul odor, seventh not hurting the throat when drunk, eighth not harming the belly once drunk.” The eight items are plainly numbered, the first six stating the properties of the water and the last two the results of drinking it.

First ask: is this set of eight the only one? Puguang’s Record here adduces the Sūtra in Praise of the Pure Land, which sets up another set of eight items — “first limpid, second clean, third sweet-tasting, fourth light and soft,” and so on — and the two only partly overlap. Puguang records both sets together and passes no verdict of better or worse. The easy error is to think that numbered categories bearing the same name in Buddhist texts must agree item by item, and so, on meeting a disagreement, to hurry to reconcile them. In practice: when numbered categories share a name but differ in their items, it is often because the sūtra or treatise they rest upon is different; in reading, to ask first “which text does this set come from?” is more useful than hurrying to harmonize them.


IV. The Four Great Continents and the Eight Intermediate Continents

〔4.1〕The shapes of the four continents are the faces of the people of the four continents. Within the outer sea there are four great continents, facing the four sides of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain. Jambudvīpa in the south is “broad on the north and narrow on the south, its three sides equal in measure, its form like a chariot”; the continent of Videha in the east is “narrow on the east and broad on the west,” shaped like a half-moon; the continent of Godānīya in the west is “round like a full moon”; Uttarakuru in the north is “shaped like a square seat, its four sides equal in measure.” The treatise even explains one word, “equal,” in the stanza — “the word ‘equal’ is to make plain that there is no least increase or decrease.” Most interesting of all is the sentence that closes the passage: “according as the continent has its shape, so likewise the faces of its people.”

First ask: why should the shape of a continent have anything to do with people’s faces? Because within the framework of this treatise the outer receptacle and sentient beings issue from one and the same shared action, and so their characteristics correspond to one another and are not a coincidence. The easy error is to take this sentence for an amusing aside. It is in fact a small piece of evidence on that main axis, “the dominant force of action” — the receptacle and sentient beings are not two independent sets of things. In practice: the discussions of bodily measure and lifespan later on are extensions of this same line: in which continent one dwells determines one’s bodily measure and lifespan accordingly.

〔4.2〕Why the vajra seat is in the southern continent alone. “In this continent alone is there the vajra seat, which reaches up to the surface of the ground and rests down upon the golden circle,” and all bodhisattvas, when about to ascend to perfect awakening, sit here and arouse the “vajra-like concentration.” The reason the treatise gives is exceedingly terse: apart from this there is no other support and no other place possessed of firmness enough “to have the power to bear this.”

First ask: why should becoming a buddha require the choosing of a place? It is not a choosing of geomantic fortune but a question of bearing capacity — that last moment of concentration is too great in force, and only a piece of ground that reaches straight down to the golden circle can bear it. The easy error is to read it as making Jambudvīpa “nobler” than the other three continents. What the treatise speaks of is bearing capacity, not rank; and the text below on the contrary says everywhere that the people of Jambudvīpa have the least fixed lifespan and the smallest bodily measure. In practice: this sentence is one of the rare places in the whole fascicle that lands directly upon practice and realization — the description of the receptacle world is here joined to the “vajra-like concentration,” and when one reads later in the chapter on the worthy and the noble about the end of cutting off the afflictions, one may look back to this place.

〔4.3〕The eight intermediate continents and one small divergent account. On either flank of each of the four great continents there are two intermediate continents, eight in all, and the treatise names them one by one. Puguang’s Record leaves us the sound and sense of them: “Cāmara means here Cat-Ox. Varacāmara means here Excellent Cat-Ox.” The treatise says, “all these continents are inhabited by human beings,” and at once records a divergent account — “there is an account: one alone is inhabited by rākṣasas.”

First ask: why is this one divergent account worth keeping? Because upon a geographical detail that looks of no importance whatever, it demonstrates the standing practice of the treatise: wherever there are two accounts and the scriptures have no express text, both are recorded. The easy error is to read “there is an account” as the author’s own supplement. It is another school’s account, which the author records without adjudicating. In practice: in this fascicle “there is an account,” “some other masters say,” and “some other school says” occur more than ten times, and all are to be viewed in this way — first distinguish which sentence is the treatise’s own position and which is a separate account it records; without this step the disputes of the three commentaries below cannot be read at all.

〔4 appended〕The measures of the sides of the four continents: besides shape there are numbers. The shapes of the four continents (chariot box, half-moon, full moon, square seat) are only half of it; the treatise also gives the measures of the sides continent by continent. Of Jambudvīpa in the south, “the south side is only three and a half yojanas broad, and the three sides are two thousand each,” while for the other three continents it says “the east three hundred and fifty, and the three sides two thousand each. The continent of Godānīya in the west is round like a full moon, its diameter two thousand five hundred and its circumference seven thousand five hundred. Uttarakuru in the north is shaped like a square seat, its four sides equal in measure, each face two thousand.” First ask: how are these several sets of figures to be read? The southern and the eastern continents belong to the same type, “three sides two thousand each and one side alone short,” and differ only in that short side: three and a half yojanas in the south, three hundred and fifty in the east; the western continent is round, and so instead of sides it gives diameter and circumference (diameter two thousand five hundred, circumference seven thousand five hundred, still circumference equals diameter times three); the northern continent has four equal sides, and so one phrase, “each face two thousand,” exhausts it. The easy error is to take the southern continent’s “three and a half yojanas” and the eastern continent’s “three hundred and fifty” for quantities of the same order — they differ a hundredfold, and this is exactly why the southern continent is shaped like a chariot box (one end extremely narrow) while the eastern continent is shaped like a half-moon (one end still broad). In practice: shape and measure must be read together — shape is the outline, measure is the dimension; remember only the shapes and the four continents run together, remember only the measures and one does not know how they look.


V. The Black Mountains, the Snow Mountain, the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance, and the Lake Without Heat

〔5.1〕How the nine black mountains are counted out. “In this Jambudvīpa, going north from the middle, there are three places each of which has three ranges of black mountains” — three places with three ranges each, together making exactly the “nine black mountains to the north of this” of which the stanza speaks. North of the black mountains is the Great Snow Mountain, and north of the Snow Mountain the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance. Puguang’s Record explains the name Intoxicating Fragrance: “the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance means that within this mountain there are fragrances whose smell intoxicates a man, and so it is named Intoxicating Fragrance.”

First ask: where does this number nine come from? It is simply three times three. This deserves particular note, because the Taishō canon has a variant reading on exactly that graph “three” in “three places each having three ranges of black mountains”: the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace editions all read “five.” If the four editions were followed, three places with five ranges each would make fifteen, which does not answer to the “nine” of the stanza. Textually the two readings stand side by side, and this collection records without adjudicating; but a reader should at least know that the base text’s reading is self-consistent with the stanza.

The easy error is to regard a collation variant as a trifle of no consequence. Some variant graphs truly are of no consequence (such as the graph for a staff against the graph for arms); some, however, bear directly upon the reckoning. In practice: when the numbers in the stanza and in the prose commentary do not agree, first check whether the graph in question has a variant reading — this is the old method of the ancient masters in collating their reading.

〔5.2〕Lake Without Heat and the four great rivers. North of the Snow Mountain and south of the Fragrance Mountain is a great lake named Without Heat and Torment, fifty yojanas each way, filled to the brim with water possessed of the eight qualities, and “none but a person who has attained the supernormal powers has any way of reaching it”; and out of it flow four great rivers — the Gaṅgā, the Sindhu, the Sītā, and the Vakṣu. At the edge of the lake is a Jambu grove, “the trees tall of form and the fruit sweet to the taste,” and the name of the continent comes either from this grove or from this kind of fruit.

First ask: why should it be said of a lake that “none but one who has attained the supernormal powers can reach it”? This sentence pushes the Lake Without Heat out of “geography” and into “a place that cannot be reached” — it has a position on the map, but in experience it is not open. The easy error is to take all the place names of this fascicle uniformly for actual places that can be investigated. The treatise itself marks out the boundary right here. In practice: of the map of the world in this fascicle, some parts join on to human experience (the continents, the rivers, the sun and moon), while of some parts it is expressly said that only the supernormal powers can reach them or only the force of action can enter them (the Lake Without Heat, the gods, the hells) — to keep these two classes apart in reading is more accurate than taking the whole either as a factual record or as an allegory.


VI. The Establishing of the Hells: the Unremitting and the Seven Hot Ones

〔6.1〕Why the Unremitting is called the Unremitting. Going down from Jambudvīpa past twenty thousand there is “the great naraka Avīci,” twenty thousand each in depth and breadth, so that its floor is forty thousand yojanas away from us. As for the origin of the name, the treatise states it plainly: “because suffering is undergone therein without remission, unlike the remaining seven great narakas where the undergoing of suffering is not constant, it is named the Unremitting.” And it takes Equal Reviving for contrast — the sentient beings in the hell of Equal Reviving, after being hacked, pierced, ground, and pounded, “as soon as they meet a cool wind blowing upon them revive again as they were at first,” and are therefore named Equal Reviving; in Avīci there is no such breathing space.

First ask: does “Unremitting,” then, say that the suffering does not stop, or that there is no gap? What the treatise takes here is the former (suffering without remission). But Puguang’s Record adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle and supplies another account — “there is an account: the name Unremitting is established from there being no gap, for although the sentient beings are few their bodies are large” — that is, though the sentient beings are few they are vast of body, and there is no gap between them. Puguang further adduces the words of the adjudicators of the Mahāvibhāṣā as settling it: “the adjudication says: one should not put it in that way. Those born in the other hells are many, those born in the Unremitting are few.”

The easy error is to take the “Unremitting means no gap” that one commonly hears in later times for the position of this treatise. What the prose commentary of this treatise takes is “suffering without remission.” In practice: when a term has several glosses, first make out the one the treatise itself gives, and take the rest as collateral reference — this is the order in which a treatise is to be read, and it is also where the three commentaries stand when they dispute with one another.

〔6.2〕How the eight hells are arranged. “The seven narakas dwell piled one upon another above the Unremitting,” and from below upward they are Equal Reviving, the Black Rope, Massed Crushing, Howling, Great Howling, Burning Heat, and Extreme Heat, with the Unremitting lowest of all. The treatise at once records a divergent account — “there is an account: these seven are at the flank of the Unremitting.” Puguang’s Record adduces a third account besides: “there is an account: the Unremitting hell is at the center, and the remaining seven hells encircle it round about, as a village today encircles a great city.”

First ask: which of the three arrangements is right? The treatise passes no verdict, and Puguang too merely records them together. This is precisely the normal state of this fascicle. The easy error is to think that the spatial layout of the hells is a question of fact that must be settled. Within the practice of this treatise, wherever the scriptures have no express text, divergent accounts standing side by side do no harm to the sense — what is really settled is the correspondence of action and result, not the map. In practice: in reading the spatial descriptions of this fascicle, lay down the expectation that “it must be thus” and put the attention upon each point of “which action calls forth which result,” and the gain will be far greater.


VII. The Sixteen Increases: the Four Places outside the Gates of the Eight Hells

〔7.1〕First there is a stanza of scripture. The treatise here adduces a stanza spoken by the World-Honored One: “These eight narakas, I say, are exceedingly hard to pass beyond; the ground is made of hot iron, iron walls encircle it round about, on the four sides there are four gates, shut fast with leaves of iron.” This stanza is not a root stanza of the treatise but a stanza of scripture adduced as proof — the text just before it expressly marks it, “and so the Bhagavat spoke this stanza, saying.” It first fixes the general characteristics of the eight great hells: iron ground, iron walls, four gates with leaves of iron, and fierce fire blazing throughout.

First ask: since the prose commentary has already said it, why is the stanza still adduced? Because the institution of the sixteen Increases has to hang upon the “four gates” — one gate on each of the four sides, and four places outside each gate, make sixteen. The stanza establishes the four gates first, and only then can the prose commentary set them out one by one. The easy error is to confuse a quoted stanza with a root stanza. There are twenty-three stanza blocks in this fascicle, of which three are quoted stanzas (this stanza, the stanza of Dharmasubhūti, and the stanza on the fragrance of flowers), and the remaining twenty are root stanzas of the treatise. In practice: in reading this treatise, where one sees “the stanza says” it is a root stanza, and where one sees “spoke this stanza, saying,” “as that stanza says,” or “the Bhagavat said,” it is for the most part adduced as proof — and this one distinction bears upon the reckoning of the stanza count for the whole chapter.

〔7.2〕What each of the four Increases is. The first is the Increase of Hot Ashes, where the hot ashes are knee-deep: “when a sentient being walks there, at the very first setting down of a foot the skin and flesh together with the blood are scorched, festered, and fall away; and at the lifting of the foot they grow again and are restored as before.” The second is the Increase of Corpses and Dung, filled with a mire of corpses and dung, in which are many nyaṅkuṭa worms, “sharp as needles, their bodies white and their heads black,” which bore the skin, break the bone, and eat the marrow. The third is the Increase of Blades, containing three kinds — the Road of Sword Blades (blades laid edge upward to form a road), the Forest of Sword Leaves (sword blades for leaves, which the wind blows down), and the Forest of Iron Thorns (iron thorns sixteen finger-breadths long, piercing upward and downward); and though the three differ, “because the iron implements are the same, they are gathered as one Increase.” The fourth is the Increase of the Fierce River, filled with hot salt water, where beings float and sink, go against the current and with it, as sesame and rice are boiled in a great cauldron, while on the two banks hell warders holding knives and spears bar them and drive them back.

First ask: why are the three instruments of punishment gathered into one Increase while the fierce river stands alone? The reason the treatise gives is material — the first three are alike made of iron and so are gathered as one Increase; the fierce river is water, and moreover “this river is like a moat, while the first three are like a garden park,” so that their forms differ as well. The easy error is to take this passage merely as a description of horrors and to pass over that stated reason for the combining. It is the special skill of Abhidharma: wherever several things are gathered into one, the principle on which they are gathered must be stated. In practice: hereafter, wherever one meets “such and such dharmas are together established as one” (the five feelings gathered into three, the nine places established as three births amid pleasure), one must ask the same question — on what principle are they gathered?

〔7.3〕Why the word “Increase” is called Increase. The treatise explains its own name: “this is a place of being punished over and above, and hence it is called an Increase, because in the hell proper one has just been injured and then suffers injury again” — having undergone punishment once in the hell proper, one comes out of the gate and undergoes it again, suffering upon suffering, and hence the name Increase. The treatise also records another account — “there is an account: sentient beings undergo this suffering after coming out of the hell, and it is therefore called an Increase.” Puguang’s Record adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle for a further explanation: “or else within this one undergoes sufferings of every kind, the instruments of suffering being of many types, and it is therefore called an Increase.”

First ask: why is this one graph worth so much ink? Because it is a pure case of choosing a rendering — Paramārtha’s older translation renders this graph not as “Increase” but as “Park,” taking the image of a garden enclosure; Xuanzang renders it “Increase,” taking the successive addition of suffering. The referent is the same and the two translations look in wholly different directions (see Further Resonances). The easy error is to think that a difference of rendering is only a habit of wording. The images the two translations take here are, the one spatial, the other one of degree; and a reader who reads one version only will hardly notice that the original term could have had two faces. In practice: when one meets a key rendering in this treatise and a divergent translation is available for comparison, it is worth a glance at both — not to judge which is better, but to see the thickness of the word.


VIII. Whether the Hell Warders Are Sentient Beings, the Eight Cold Hells, and the Places of the Other Destinies

〔8.1〕A discussion born out of a discussion. The treatise marks it itself: “now here a discussion arises from the discussion. Are the hell warders sentient beings or not?” — this is an incidental discussion and not the main outline. One school says they are not sentient beings, the reason being “the force of the actions of sentient beings, like the wind at the forming of an aeon”; the wind at the forming of an aeon has no one blowing it either, and works all the same. The objector at once brings up the stanza of the Venerable Dharmasubhūti and asks in return: “Whose heart harbors always rage and venom, who delights to heap up every kind of evil action, who sees the suffering of others and rejoices at it — he becomes at death a warder of Yama” — if someone becomes a warder of Yama after death, is that not a sentient being?

The answerer’s discrimination is very fine: King Yama sends rākṣasas to cast sentient beings into the hells, and those are called the warders of Yama and are real sentient beings; but those who carry out the punishments directly within the hells are not real sentient beings. That is to say, what the stanza speaks of and what is under dispute are not the same set at all. The other school says that they are sentient beings, and answers the two difficulties that follow upon this: where do their evil actions receive retribution — within the hells themselves; and why does the fire not burn them — “this is certainly because they are shut off by the force of action, or because they have called forth different great elements, and so are not burned.”

First ask: where does the crux of this dispute lie? In whether “those who inflict punishment within the hells” are an insentient operation produced by the force of action or a separate set of sentient beings undergoing retribution. Both accounts are recorded together. The easy error is to read the former school’s “not sentient” as “does not exist.” “Not sentient” says that it has no mind and consciousness, not that there is no such thing. In practice: this passage is the most typical instance of an incidental discussion in the fascicle — the author allows the question to branch off, and yet, having branched off, answers difficulty by difficulty and leaves nothing half done.

〔8.2〕Where the names of the eight cold hells come from. The hot hells are eight, and there are eight cold ones besides — Arbuda, Nirarbuda, Aṭaṭa, Hahava, Huhuva, Utpala, Padma, and Mahāpadma. The treatise gives one general principle of naming: “the sentient beings therein are oppressed by bitter cold, and their names are established according to the changes of body and of voice” — the names follow either the changes the freezing works upon the body or the cries of those frozen past uttering a whole syllable. Puguang’s Record makes each one concrete: “Arbuda means here Blister; bitter cold oppresses the body and the body blisters” · “Nirarbuda means here Burst Blister; bitter cold oppresses the body and the blisters of the body burst” · “in the next three the cold oppresses and strange sounds come from the mouth” · “Utpala means here Blue Lotus; bitter cold presses hard and the body changes and splits open like a blue lotus,” with Padma and Mahāpadma on the same pattern as red lotus and great red lotus.

First ask: why do the names of the cold hells sound like onomatopoeia? Because the middle three were named from sound in the first place. Puguang’s Record states the division of labor among this set of names most clearly — “the first two and the last three establish their names from the changes of body, the middle three from the changes of voice”: the first two and the last three follow the changes of bodily appearance, the middle three the strange sounds that come from the mouth when the cold presses. The easy error is to memorize the eight names as eight unrelated proper nouns. They are in fact a sequence of freezing injury running from shallow to deep: blistering, blisters bursting, being unable to utter a sound, the body splitting open. In practice: the names of numbered categories often carry their own sequence; once the sequence can be seen, there is no need to memorize by force.

〔8.3〕How a small continent can hold a great hell. The treatise sets a question: the area of Jambudvīpa is not large, “how then can what is below it hold the Unremitting and the rest?” The answer is exceedingly deft: “the continent is like a heap of piled grain, pointed above and wide below, and this is why the great sea grows narrower and deeper” — the continent is like a heap of piled grain, pointed above and wide below, and so the further down one goes the wider it becomes.

First ask: what weight does this question and answer carry? It demonstrates Abhidharma’s self-checking of its own system: wherever figures conflict with one another, a reconciliation must be given. The easy error is to take this for a merely geometrical piece of cleverness. It fixes at the same time the shape of the great sea (the deeper the narrower), the two being two faces of one and the same solid. In practice: in reading this fascicle, when figures seem to contradict, first assume that the author has already thought it through, and read on; for the most part a sentence will account for it.

〔8.4〕The solitary hells and the base places of the other two destinies. The sixteen hells are “called forth by the dominant action of all sentient beings” (shared action), while the solitary hells are “summoned each by a separate action” (separate action), dwelt in by many or by two or by one, with no fixed place — beside rivers and mountainsides and in the wilderness, underground, and in the sky. The base place of animals is the great sea, and “later they spread abroad to other places.” The base place of the ghosts is the realm of King Yama, five hundred yojanas beneath Jambudvīpa, and “from there they have spread by degrees and settled in other places”; among the ghosts there are also those “upright and majestic and possessed of great dignity, who enjoy every kind of wealth and pleasure in sovereign freedom like the gods,” and those “hungry and gaunt and ugly of countenance.”

First ask: why must base place and scattered dwelling be distinguished? In the passage on the hells the treatise expressly divides the two actions — “the sixteen hells discussed above are called forth by the dominant action of all sentient beings; the remaining solitary hells are summoned each by a separate action”; as for the base places and the spreading abroad of animals and ghosts, the treatise begins a new sentence and states their places directly, without matching them to shared and separate action. The easy error is to imagine the destiny of ghosts as uniformly hungry and ugly. The treatise says expressly that among the ghosts there are those of dignity and wealth and pleasure. In practice: the internal differences within the three evil destinies are very great, and this passage is one of the rare express texts on it in this treatise; when one reads in the chapter on action about separate actions calling forth separate results, one may look back and take this passage as a concrete instance.


IX. The Sun and Moon: Their Support, Their Size, and the Increase and Decrease of Day and Night

〔9.1〕Upon what the sun and moon rest. The treatise asks, “upon what do the sun, the moon, and the host of stars rest?” and answers, “they rest upon wind” — still the wind called forth by the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings, which turns around the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, “carrying and upholding the sun and the rest so that they neither stop nor fall.” Their height is level with the summit of Upholding the Pair, which is exactly half the height of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain. As for size: the sun fifty-one, the moon fifty, the smallest star one krośa and the largest sixteen yojanas. The underside of the sun’s disc is constituted of the fire-pearl and “can give heat and give light”; the underside of the moon’s disc is constituted of the water-pearl and “can give cold and give light.”

First ask: why should it be said expressly what jewel lies beneath the sun and moon? Because the source of their operation has to be accounted for — heat and cold are not abstract properties but are tied to the jewel of which they are constituted. And the treatise says at once that this operation is “produced according to the dominance of the actions of sentient beings,” working “benefit or harm, each as is fitting,” upon eyes, bodies, fruits, flowers, crops, and medicinal herbs. The easy error is to take this for pure astronomical description. The treatise’s landing point is “benefit and harm” — the operation of the sun and moon upon the myriad things of the world still lies within the framework of what action calls forth. In practice: wherever this fascicle speaks of a thing, it mostly goes on to speak of its operation upon sentient beings; grasp this thread and the numbers will not be read as a mere running account.

〔9.2〕How one sun and moon light four continents. The treatise asks: is what one day does the same at one time in the four continents? The answer is no. “When it is midnight in the northern continent the sun is setting in the eastern continent, at midday in the southern continent and rising in the western. These four times are equal” — these four moments occur at one and the same time, and each continent merely sees one of them.

First ask: what is the significance of this passage? It uses one sun and moon to explain four differences of time, which amounts to placing a self-consistent model of day and night within the Abhidharma framework. The easy error is to read “these four times are equal” as meaning that the time is the same in the four continents. “Equal” here says that these four moments correspond to one another (one and the same instant), not that the four continents all see midday. In practice: this is the sentence in the fascicle most easily read backward; a single graph misread turns the whole picture upside down.

〔9.3〕Why day and night grow long and short. “The sun’s course over this continent has its differences, and this makes day and night decrease and increase.” From the ninth day of the latter half of the second month of the rainy season the night gradually increases; from the ninth day of the latter half of the fourth month of the cold season the night gradually decreases; and the day is the opposite. Each increase or decrease is by one lava. The sun travels southward and northward, thereby making the night increase and the day increase in turn. As for why the moon has a gap, the treatise records two accounts: the Designations of the World says that the palace of the moon travels near the disc of the sun and is encroached upon and lit by the sunlight, so that “on its other side it puts forth a shadow that covers its own disc”; the masters of old say that it is “because the two discs of sun and moon differ in the degrees of their courses that fullness and gap appear.”

First ask: what is hardest in this passage? It is how the reckoning days of the three seasons (hot, rainy, cold) are to be matched when transposed to the calendar of the Chinese lands. The treatise gives only the three Indian seasons and gives no conversion. And it is precisely for this reason that this became the place where the three commentaries diverge most sharply (see Further Resonances). The easy error is to think that a calendar in the sūtras and treatises can be applied directly to Chinese months. In practice: whenever a detail crosses calendars, first make sure how far the text itself goes; what the text does not say has been supplied by the ancient masters severally, and may not be confused with what the treatise says.


X. The Four Terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings

〔10.1〕The two sets of figures for the four terraces. “Mount Sumeru has four terraces; reckoning from the water’s edge up to the first terrace, the distance is a measure of ten thousand yojanas,” and the distance between one terrace and the next is in every case ten thousand. The breadths by which they jut out sideways, however, decrease: sixteen thousand, eight thousand, four thousand, two thousand. These four terraces “jut out sideways from the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and encircle it, taking up the whole of its lower half” — they exactly fill the lower half of the portion of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain that stands out of the water (half of eighty thousand is forty thousand, and the four terraces are ten thousand each).

First ask: why must the figures be divided into two sets? Because one set speaks of the vertical intervals (all equal) and the other of the horizontal projection (decreasing by half and half). Read them mixed together and one is lost. The easy error is to read “jutting out sixteen thousand” as the height of the first terrace. It is a breadth. In practice: when this treatise speaks of measures it is its habit to state the vertical and the horizontal separately; ask first, “is this figure a height or a breadth?” and most confusions dissolve.

〔10.2〕Who dwells on which terrace. “There is a yakṣa god named Firm Hand who dwells on the first terrace, one named Garland Holder who dwells on the second, one named Ever Proud who dwells on the third,” and all three belong to the four great heavenly kings; only the fourth terrace is inhabited by the four great heavenly kings together with their retinues, and “the sūtras on this ground speak of the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings.” More important still is the sentence that follows: upon the seven golden mountains too there are gods dwelling, fiefs belonging to the four great kings, “and this is called the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings that dwells in dependence on the ground”; and therefore “among the gods of desire the extent of this heaven is the widest.”

First ask: why is the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings the widest among the gods of desire? Because it occupies not only the fourth terrace of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain but also the fiefs upon the remaining seven golden mountains — the largest territory. The easy error is to think that the height of a heaven represents the size of its extent. The lowest heaven of all is on the contrary the widest. In practice: this sentence is a reminder for the later discussions of the increasing bodily measures and lifespans of the six heavens of desire — height of station and breadth of extent are two independent axes.


XI. The Heaven of the Thirty-Three and the City Fair to Behold

〔11.1〕The measure of the summit, and one instance of two figures standing side by side. “The Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwells on the summit of Meru; its summit is eighty thousand on each of its four sides, no different in measure from the four sides below” — the summit is eighty thousand a side, the same as the four sides at the foot of the mountain. The treatise at once records a divergent account: “some other masters say: it is eighty thousand in circumference, and they state separately that each of the four sides is only twenty thousand” — that is, that the eighty thousand is the circumference and that each side is only twenty thousand.

First ask: how great is the difference between these two figures? Very great: between eighty thousand a side and twenty thousand a side the area differs sixteenfold. The author takes the former and the other masters the latter, and both stand without adjudication. Puguang’s Record even supplies, on behalf of the other masters, the reckoning behind it, saying that that master means that the four terraces are formed “by cutting successively inward into the body of the mountain,” drawing in tier by tier, so that at the summit only twenty thousand a side is left. The easy error is to think that since the author has spoken, the divergent account need not be looked at. Here it is precisely the reverse — what the stanza text of Paramārtha’s older translation maintains is exactly twenty thousand a side (see Further Resonances), from which one may see that this divergent account is the position in another line of transmission. In practice: a dispute over a set of figures often involves a difference in the stanza text relied upon; when one reads “some other masters say” and the figures differ so widely, it is worth a second look.

〔11.2〕The layout of the city Fair to Behold. At each of the four corners there is a peak, five hundred in height and breadth, where the yakṣa god Vajra-Hand dwells and guards the gods. At the center of the summit is the city Fair to Behold, “two thousand five hundred on each side, ten thousand yojanas in circumference,” the golden wall a yojana and a half high, the ground “adorned with a hundred and one kinds of jewel,” soft to the touch “as tūla floss, rising and sinking with the foot when one treads upon it” — Puguang’s Record explains tūla floss: “tūla is the name of a tree, and the floss comes out of the fruit of the tree and is named tūla floss, as one says willow catkins.” Within the city is the Hall of Surpassing Excellence, “named Surpassing Excellence because it surpasses the other palaces of the gods.” Outside the city are four parks: Many Chariots, Coarse and Harsh, Mixed Groves, and the Grove of Joy. On the four sides of the four parks are four excellent pools, where “the gods vie with one another and take their pleasure.”

First ask: what is the point of each of the four parks’ names? The treatise only lists the names and does not explain their senses; Puguang’s Record fills this out from the Mahāvibhāṣā — “first, the Park of Many Chariots, meaning that in this park chariots of every kind appear according to the merit and power of the gods,” and the rest in order: armor and weapons appear in time of war; whatever is played with there is alike and yet all bring forth surpassing joy; the most excellent objects of desire of every different type gather there. The easy error is to read “Coarse and Harsh” as a bad place. It is where the gods practice arms, and so armor and weapons appear there. In practice: there are many places in this treatise where names are listed without their senses explained, and it is for just this that the ancient masters’ supplementary explanations were made; when one reads a list of bare names, it is worth looking for it in the commentaries.

〔11.3〕The Round-Growth Tree and a probing question about fragrance. Northeast of the city is the Round-Growth Tree, “the most excellent place where the Heaven of the Thirty-Three enjoy the pleasures of desire,” its coiling roots fifty yojanas deep and broad, its height and breadth a hundred each, its flower fragrance “perfuming a hundred yojanas with the wind, and when the wind is against it still extending over fifty.” The objector at once seizes upon it: with the wind, granted; “how can it perfume against the wind?” One school says that fragrance has of itself no sense of perfuming against the wind and that this is said only in dependence upon its “not passing beyond the bounds of the tree”; the author, however, establishes it head-on — “in truth of principle the Round-Growth has such a quality, and the fragrance that streams from it can perfume against the wind” — only that it is dammed back by the harmonious winds of the heavens, “growing weaker and subtler by degrees and stopping at no great distance,” and so cannot reach as far as when it perfumes with the wind. The treatise sets a further question: does the flower fragrance turn on with the wind to another place, or does it merely perfume the wind so that a fragrance arises separately? The answer: “this sense is not settled; the preceptors allow both gates without fault.”

First ask: of the two questions, which did the author answer and which did he not? To the first (whether it can perfume against the wind) the author gave a direct solution; to the second (how the fragrance is conveyed) he expressly allowed both gates. The easy error is to read the two questions together as “the author adjudicated neither.” In practice: to tell apart where the author gives his own solution and where he leaves two standing is the most basic skill in reading this treatise, and here both appear within a single passage, which makes it a good specimen. In passing: the graph “ten” in the “fifty yojanas” of the coiling roots is absent from all four of the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace editions — if the four editions were followed there would be five yojanas only, a difference of tenfold. Textually the two readings stand side by side, and this collection records without adjudicating.


XII. Fragrance against the Wind: a Close Drawn from a Stanza of Scripture

〔12.1〕The World-Honored One’s words and the author’s sense of proportion. The objector produces a scriptural proof: “the fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and the fragrance of roots and stems and the rest is likewise; the fragrance of a good man’s qualities is rich and pervading, and against the wind streams its fair name abroad through every quarter” — the World-Honored One plainly says that the fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and yet the author says that the fragrance of the Round-Growth Tree can; is this not a contradiction? The author’s solution is to mark out a range: “this was said with respect to the fragrances of the human world, for the fragrances commonly known to people of the world truly have no such power” — that sentence of the World-Honored One’s was said with respect to the fragrances of the human world, and the fragrances of the human world truly have no such capacity. And he adds one collateral proof: “a sūtra transmitted by the Mahīśāsakas says of this fragrance that with the wind it perfumes a hundred yojanas, and when there is no wind extends over fifty only.”

First ask: is this making excuses on the author’s behalf? It is not. It is the standard method of Abhidharma for handling a case where a scriptural text and a doctrinal sense appear to conflict — ask first what range that sentence of scripture rests upon, and once the range is divided the conflict resolves itself. The easy error is to think that wherever scripture is adduced it is a settled conclusion and the author may not establish anything else. The practice of this treatise is that scripture is settled, but one must see the capacity it addresses and the situation it rests upon. In practice: this move recurs again and again in the chapters that follow (wherever one meets a sentence of the form “this was said with respect to such and such”), and this is the specimen for the fascicle.

〔12.2〕The Hall of Good Dharma and the close of a section. At the southwest corner outside the city is the Hall of Good Dharma, where “the Heaven of the Thirty-Three assemble from time to time and discuss in detail what is according to the Dharma and what is not.” With this the outer receptacle inhabited by the Heaven of the Thirty-Three is finished.

First ask: why should a council hall be recorded expressly? Because it stands in contrast to the four parks, the excellent pools, and the Round-Growth Tree above: those are places of sport and the enjoyment of pleasure, this one a place of deliberation. The easy error is to imagine the world of the gods uniformly as a place of enjoyment. The treatise expressly leaves this one stroke at the close. In practice: reading upward from the receptacle world, one finds that the author never writes the gods as a pure realm of pleasure — it is still within the desire realm, and there is still business to deliberate and Dharma and non-Dharma to be told apart.


XIII. Above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, the Palaces Dwell in Space

〔13.1〕The leap from “resting on the ground” to “resting on space.” “The gods possessed of form above this dwell in dependence upon palaces in space” — the palaces of the gods possessed of form above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three are all in space. Which count as the gods possessed of form above? “That is, the Yāma Heaven, the Tuṣita Heaven, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations, the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, together with the Brahmakāyika Heaven and the rest spoken of above, sixteen places; and with the foregoing there are twenty-two heavens in all, all dwelling in dependence upon an outer receptacle.”

First ask: where does this sentence draw its line? At the Heaven of the Thirty-Three — above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three all rest upon space. But this line can only be stated upward and cannot be inverted into “all below rest upon the ground”: those belonging to the four great kings are themselves divided into two classes. In the passage on the sun and moon the treatise asks first, “what sentient beings inhabit the palaces of the sun and the rest?” and answers, “the host of gods belonging to the four great heavenly kings,” and then divides them itself: “do these gods dwell only here? If they are gods dwelling in space, they dwell only in the palaces of the sun and the rest; if they are gods dwelling on the ground, they dwell on the several terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the like.” ⇒ Among those belonging to the four great kings, those in the palaces of the sun and moon and the rest dwell in space, while those on the terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and the like dwell on the ground; and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwells on the summit of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain and so belongs to those dwelling on the ground. The correct statement is therefore: above the Heaven of the Thirty-Three all rest upon space; the Heaven of the Thirty-Three and the ground-dwelling portion of those belonging to the four great kings occupy respectively the summit and the several terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, while those belonging to the four great kings have besides a space-dwelling portion residing in the palaces of the sun and moon and the rest. The easy error is to read “possessed of form” as “having shape.” It is said in contrast to the formless realm — the gods of the form realm, though they rest upon space, still belong to those possessed of form. In practice: the figure twenty-two should be remembered: six heavens of the desire realm and sixteen places of the form realm make twenty-two; and when the text below speaks of “the twenty-two places of the gods, and what the measures are by which they are distant above and below,” it is this figure that is used.

〔13.2〕How space can bear the palaces up. The prose commentary of this treatise offers no explanation of this and only says that they dwell resting upon space. Puguang’s Record adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle for a supplementary account — “there is an account: in space dense clouds are spread out like ground, and serve as the support of those palaces” — taking the dense clouds for the support of the palaces.

First ask: since the treatise offers no explanation, why did the ancient master supply one? Because a reader is bound to have the doubt: space has nothing in it, so how can it hold a thing up? The supplementary explanation is meant to let the sense of the text run smoothly, not to alter the sense of the treatise. The easy error is to take this account for the position of this treatise. It is a supplementary account from the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, adduced by way of Puguang, and there is no such text in this treatise. In practice: in reading a commentary one must at every point tell apart which sentence is the treatise and which is supplied by the commentary; without this distinction, reading the treatise turns into reading the commentary.


XIV. The Manner of Sexual Union of the Six Heavens of Desire: Intercourse, Embracing, Holding Hands, Laughing, Looking

〔14.1〕The higher, the lighter. “Only the six heavens of desire undergo excellent objects of desire.” In the lowest two heavens, which dwell resting upon the ground, “sexual union is accomplished by the joining of bodies, no different from human beings,” only that “when the breath of wind is released the burning distress is removed, and it is not as in the human world where there is other impurity besides.” Upward from these, in order: in the Yāma Heaven “a single embrace accomplishes it”; in the Tuṣita Heaven “merely by holding hands”; in the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations “only by laughing toward one another”; in the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations “gazing at one another accomplishes it.”

First ask: why does it grow lighter the higher one goes? The treatise gives the reason — “because the higher the gods, the more excellent the objects of desire and the swifter the greedy mind, it is made to be so.” The more excellent the object and the more swiftly the greedy mind stirs — on this explanation of the Vaibhāṣikas, what the differences among the names of the manner of sexual union in the six heavens display is that the length of time required to accomplish it grows shorter, not that the contact required grows less. The easy error is to read this passage as an ethnography of the world of the gods. Its landing point is the speed of the greedy mind: this is a ruler that measures the inner by the outer. In practice: this item is usable in practice — on this account, the more excellent the object the swifter the greedy mind, and the shorter the time required for one and the same thing, from which one may see that the force of greed grows fiercer the higher one goes, not thinner.

〔14.2〕Another school’s reading, and the children of the heavens. The Vaibhāṣikas have a further explanation: “all six heavens accomplish sexual union by the joining of bodies,” and what the Designations of the World says about embracing, holding hands, and the rest is meant only to display “the difference in the length of time for them” — that is, the length of time required to accomplish it, not a difference of act. The treatise records this too. As for where the sons and daughters of the heavens come from: “upon the knees of the male and female among those gods, boys and girls are suddenly born by transformation.”

First ask: where do the two explanations differ? The former says the acts differ; the latter says the acts are the same and the time differs. Both are recorded without adjudication. The easy error is to think that what the Vaibhāṣikas say must be what this treatise upholds. Here this treatise records without adjudicating. In practice: “the Vaibhāṣikas explain it thus” occurs only this once in the fascicle, and it may be read against the several occurrences of “there is an account” above — each alike a separate school’s account, and an instance of recording both.


XV. The Bodily Measure and the Speech of the Host of Gods at Their First Birth

〔15.1〕Six heavens hidden inside five graphs. The stanza has five graphs only: “at first like five up to ten.” The prose commentary of the treatise likewise says only, “the six heavens of desire, at their first birth, are in order like people of five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten years.” The two words “in order” are the key here — the six heavens correspond in order to six ages. Puguang’s Record spreads it all out: “the Heaven of the Four Kings like five years, the Heaven of the Thirty-Three like six years, the Yāma Heaven like seven years, the Tuṣita Heaven like eight years, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations like nine years, the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations like ten years.”

First ask: why must one rely upon the commentary to spread it out? Because the stanza is extremely economical and the prose commentary too gives only a string of numbers; and a reader who does not pair them one by one very easily reads the six numbers as a vague “somewhere between five and ten years old.” The easy error is precisely to read it as a range. It is six fixed values in one-to-one correspondence. In practice: wherever the words “in order” appear in this treatise, one must stop and make a one-to-one pairing; omit this step and many passages degenerate from “a precise table” into “a rough remark.”

〔15.2〕The gods of the form realm, and what all the gods have in common. “The host of gods of the form realm, at the time of their first birth, are complete and full in bodily measure and possessed of excellent garments” — the gods of the form realm are of adult measure at birth and naturally have garments, unlike the gods of desire who must grow up from a small child. It says further, “all the hosts of gods speak the noble speech, that is, their language is the same as that of Central India.”

First ask: why are the gods of the form realm full and clothed as soon as they are born? Because the form realm has already left the defilement of desire, and this treatise here takes the fact of “having garments” as an outward mark of freedom from desire. The easy error is to take “having garments” for a detail of decorum. It forms a pair with the manner of sexual union of the six heavens of desire in the preceding passage — the one a diminishing of the marks of desire, the other the completion of freedom from desire. In practice: in writing of the gods, this fascicle keeps throughout to the line of “the thickness and thinness of desire”; and if the narrative seems suddenly brief when one reaches the form realm, it is precisely because the marks of desire are here exhausted.


XVI. Three Kinds of Birth amid Desires and Three Kinds of Birth amid Pleasure

〔16.1〕The three kinds of birth amid desires: where the objects enjoyed come from. The treatise lists three classes: first, those who “delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire present before them” and turn in sovereign freedom, comprising the whole human destiny and the four heavens below; second, those who “delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire of their own transforming,” the fifth heaven alone, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations; third, those who “delight to undergo the several excellent objects of desire of others’ transforming,” the sixth, the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations. The distinction among the three is not in how much pleasure is received but in where the objects received come from — ready-made, transformed by oneself, transformed by another.

First ask: why are human beings and the first four heavens gathered into one class while the last two heavens each form a class of their own? The prose commentary of this treatise does not answer this question. Puguang adduces the Mahāvibhāṣā to supply it: “question: why are human beings and the hosts of the first four heavens together established as birth amid desires, while the hosts of the last two heavens are each established separately? Answer: the afflictions of human beings and of the first four heavens are coarse, those of the last two heavens subtle.” The easy error is to think the ground of the classification is the height of the objects. On what the Mahāvibhāṣā supplies, the ground is the coarseness or subtlety of the afflictions. In practice: a classification of numbered categories looks as though it speaks of objects, while in fact it very often speaks of mind; to ask, “is this set divided by object or by mind?” often lays bare the skeleton of a table.

〔16.2〕The three kinds of birth amid pleasure, and a question left hanging. “Within the three meditative absorptions, in nine places, one is born and receives three kinds of pleasure” — the joy and pleasure born of seclusion of the first meditative absorption, the joy and pleasure born of absorption of the second, and the pleasure alone, separated from joy, of the third; and therefore “abiding long, long separated from suffering, and long receiving pleasure, it is named birth amid pleasure.” The fourth meditative absorption is not in the list, because pleasure has there been relinquished.

The treatise then sets itself a question and does not answer it: “those born in the intermediate absorption have no joy or pleasure at all; it should be pondered why they too are called a heaven of birth amid pleasure” — since the intermediate absorption (where the great Brahmā dwells) has no joy or pleasure, why is it counted a heaven of birth amid pleasure? The treatise writes only the two words “should be pondered.” Puguang’s Record adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle to supply an explanation: “since the great Brahmā does have joy and pleasure occurring, there is no fault in naming it a heaven of birth amid pleasure.”

First ask: why does the author leave a “should be pondered” here? This is a manner of writing common in this treatise — where the question stands but no settled conclusion is secure, he would rather mark the doubt than force a conclusion. The easy error is to read “should be pondered” as an omission or oversight of the author’s. It is an express mark of doubt. In practice: when one reads such expressions as “it should be pondered,” “this sense is not settled,” and “both gates are allowed without fault,” they are to be taken as signposts and not as gaps — those are precisely the places the author has himself marked as not yet brought to a close. In passing: the graph “born” in the “joy and pleasure born of seclusion” of this passage is absent from all four of the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace editions; and if this graph drops out, the name of the pleasure of the first meditative absorption becomes confused with the “pleasure separated from joy” of the third. Textually the two readings stand side by side, and this collection records without adjudicating.


XVII. The Distance Upward Equals the Distance Downward

〔17.1〕A labor-saving reckoning. The measure in yojanas by which the twenty-two heavens are distant from one another above and below is “not easily counted,” and so the treatise gives one general rule: “according as one reckons from whichever heaven its measure of distance from the sea below, what it reaches upward is the same as its distance downward” — the distance from any heaven upward to the next equals its distance downward to the great sea. For example: the fourth terrace where the four great heavenly kings dwell is forty thousand from the great sea below, and so from there upward to the Heaven of the Thirty-Three is likewise forty thousand; from the Heaven of the Thirty-Three upward to the Yāma Heaven equals the measure of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three downward to the great sea; and so on, up to the Sudarśana Heaven and from there upward to the Akaniṣṭha Heaven.

First ask: what is the advantage of this rule? It dispenses with all twenty-two figures of distance: one need only know how far each heaven is from the sea, and the distance upward follows automatically. This is a structure of geometric doubling — with each heaven upward, the height above the sea exactly doubles. The easy error is to read “so likewise is its number upward” as meaning that the distances above and below are all equal (a fixed value). It is not a fixed value; each is equal to its own measure downward, so that in fact it doubles heaven by heaven. In practice: there are not a few places in this treatise where one sentence takes the place of a whole table; on meeting such a general rule, it is best to work out two or three heavens with one’s own hand and confirm that one has read the rule correctly.

〔17.2〕The highest heaven and its second name. “From this point upward there is no further place of dwelling; this place is the highest and is named the Akaniṣṭha.” The treatise at once records a divergent account: “some other masters say: it is named the Heaven of the Limit of Resistance,” and explains the ground of that naming — “by resistance they mean form as accumulated, and since resistance is exhausted upon reaching here, it obtains the name limit” — that is, that resistant form is exhausted at this point.

First ask: where do the two names differ? “Limit of form” is said with respect to form, “limit of resistance” with respect to resistance. Both accounts are recorded together. The easy error is to take the two names for two different heavens. They are two names of one and the same heaven. In practice: where one name has two designations in this treatise, each mostly rests upon a different sense; to ask clearly what sense each rests upon is more useful than remembering which is the “proper name.”


XVIII. Ascending and Seeing: An Iron Rule of Realms and Levels

〔18.1〕Ascending requires supernormal power or another’s power; those who arrive at the same place can see, but across realms and levels one cannot. “The Heaven of the Thirty-Three, by their own power of supernormal power, can ascend from their own place to the Yāma Heaven; or else in dependence upon another’s power, that is, one who has attained the supernormal powers or a host of gods above may convey them to the Yāma Heaven” — for ascending there is either one’s own supernormal power or conveyance by another’s power, and apart from these two there is no third road. As for “seeing,” the order of the treatise is: “the ascending of the remaining gods is on this same pattern; whether one comes down or one arrives, those below see the god above. Yet the eye below cannot see an upper realm or upper level, because that is not its object field” — when a god above comes down, or a god below ascends to his place, one who is at the same place gets to see the god above; what is forbidden is that an eye of a lower realm and lower level should take the form of an upper realm and upper level. The two sentences must be read together, and one may not take the latter half alone and say “even if one goes up one cannot see.” The treatise takes the tangible for an analogy: “just as one does not feel the tangible object of that upper realm” — the tangible object of the upper realm cannot be felt by the lower either. Therefore when a god of an upper level comes to a lower level, “he does not come in his own body but must make a transformation body of the lower level.”

First ask: are “being able to ascend” and “being able to see” one and the same thing? They are not. The treatise divides two matters: ascending requires supernormal power or another’s power; as for seeing, if a god above comes down or a god below arrives above, one at the same place gets to see him, while an eye of a lower realm and lower level can never see the form of an upper realm and upper level. On this the treatise gives one reason only — “because that is not its object field”: the object field of an eye of a lower level extends just so far, and changing realm and level changes the whole set of faculty and object. As for the reason from action and result, “the eye faculty of a lower level does not see the form above, because it is a result called forth by lowly action,” that comes from Saṅghabhadra; see Further Resonances. The easy error is to read this item as meaning that the distance is too great to see. It has nothing to do with distance; the object fields do not reach one another. In practice: this item is a fundamental premise for reading of the divine eye later on and of affiliation to realms and levels — the affiliation of faculty and object is determined by action, not by space.

〔18.2〕A separate school’s account that has been recorded. At the end of this passage the treatise records: “some other school says: those gods of a lower level can, according as they wish, also see the form of an upper level, just as one born in this realm can see the gods above from below” — the separate school maintains that the gods of a lower level can see the form of an upper level whenever they wish. This treatise merely records it and adds no critique.

First ask: why does the author record without refuting? This is the standing practice of this treatise. But it is worth noting that Saṅghabhadra, in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, refutes this very sentence head-on, and that Puguang has drawn that refutation in as well (see Further Resonances). The easy error is to take the refutation adduced by Puguang for the sense of this treatise. This treatise here takes the posture of recording. In practice: one and the same statement of another school is in this treatise “recorded,” in Saṅghabhadra “refuted,” and in Puguang “a refutation adduced” — three different layers, and in reading each must be returned to its own place.

〔18.3〕The measure of the supports of the heavenly palaces: four accounts side by side. The treatise goes on to ask how large the supports of the palaces of the Yāma Heaven and the rest are, and records four schools: one says the measure is the same as the summit of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain; one says “each upward doubles the one before”; one says the first meditative absorption equals one set of four continents, the second a small thousand, the third a middling thousand, the fourth a great thousand; and yet another says the three lower meditative absorptions equal in order a small, a middling, and a great thousand, while the fourth meditative absorption is “without limit in measure.”

First ask: with four accounts listed side by side, which does the author take? Here he takes none. The easy error is to think that listing them side by side must imply a tacit approval. In practice: by this point in the fascicle, “some other masters say” has become a common sight; and a count will show that this is a fascicle of extremely high density of divergent accounts within the whole treatise — because for most of the details of the receptacle world the scriptures have no express text. And this is exactly why the next section must establish the measure of the three-thousandfold great thousand: however many the divergent accounts, the definition of the total must be fixed first.


XIX. The Small Thousand, the Middling Thousand, and the Great Thousand

〔19.1〕Three thousands piled up. “A thousand sets of four great continents and so on up to the Brahmā world, thus stated together, are one small thousand; a thousandfold of the small thousand is named one middling-thousand world; a thousand middling-thousand worlds are named together one great thousand.” One small thousand contains a thousand sets of four great continents, sun and moon, Sumeru, gods of desire, and Brahmā worlds; a thousand small thousands are a middling thousand; a thousand middling thousands are a great thousand. So the great thousand is a thousand to the third power of worlds, and this is where the name “three-thousandfold great-thousand world-sphere” comes from — not three thousand of them, but three tiers of thousands.

First ask: why is this name the most easily misread of all? Because in Chinese “three thousand” looks like a plain number. It is in fact an abbreviation for “three kinds of thousand.” The easy error is precisely to read the three thousand as a number. In practice: this is one of the most frequently misread terms in the Buddhist texts; once it is understood to be a threefold power, the sense of scale in the scriptures’ “three-thousandfold great-thousand world-sphere” comes home.

〔19.2〕Coming into being together and being dissolved together, and one boundary. The treatise says, “such a great thousand comes into being together and is dissolved together,” and gives notice that “the characteristics of coming into being and being dissolved together will be analyzed at length below” — that is the business of the section on the measure of aeons in the next fascicle. As for the boundary of the small thousand, the prose commentary of this treatise goes only as far as the Brahmā world; Puguang adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle to make the boundary plain: “here the small thousand adduces the Brahmā world only, and so the Parīttābha and the rest are not included in the small-thousand world” — the Parīttābha Heaven and above are not reckoned within the small thousand.

First ask: why ask after this boundary? Because if it is not fixed, one does not know up to which heaven “one world” extends. The easy error is to think the small thousand contains the whole form realm. On the account supplied, it goes only as far as the Brahmā world (the first meditative absorption). In practice: the unit by which the three-thousandfold great thousand is counted is “one set of four great continents together with the gods above it up to the Brahmā world”; get this unit clear and one will not misplace the tier when the range of what a catastrophe of the aeon destroys is discussed later.


XX. Bodily Measure: from Three and a Half Cubits to Sixteen Thousand

〔20.1〕The bodily measures of the people of the four continents increase by a doubling each time. The people of Jambudvīpa are “for the most part three and a half cubits tall,” a few reaching four cubits; the continent of Videha in the east is eight cubits, the continent of Godānīya in the west sixteen cubits, Uttarakuru in the north thirty-two cubits — from the eastern continent onward each continent doubles.

First ask: why are two figures given for the measure of the people of Jambudvīpa (three and a half cubits and four cubits) while the other continents are given only one? Because Jambudvīpa is the continent least fixed in both lifespan and bodily measure, as the passage on lifespan in the next section says more plainly. The easy error is to read the bodily measures of the four continents as one continuous increasing line (three and a half cubits, seven, fourteen . . .). The doubling begins from the eight cubits of the eastern continent, and Jambudvīpa forms a class of its own. In practice: wherever this treatise gives two figures that do not fit the geometric run, it is usually marking “this item is not fixed” — which is more useful than remembering the figures themselves.

〔20.2〕The bodily measures of the gods: two units and two reckonings. The six heavens of the desire realm take the krośa as their unit, the lowest being a quarter of a krośa, and “thereafter each successive one adds a portion,” until the sixth is a krośa and a half — this is a constant difference (each heaven adding a quarter). The form realm takes the yojana as its unit: the Brahmakāyika half, the Brahmapurohita one, the Mahābrahmā one and a half, the Parīttābha two, the first four heavens each adding a half (still a constant difference); “above these all the remaining gods increase by doubling,” which changes to a constant ratio. And within the geometric run there is one exception — “only the Anabhraka subtracts three yojanas,” the Apramāṇābha increasing from twice to four, and so doubling on until at the Akaniṣṭha Heaven it exactly “reaches a full sixteen thousand.”

First ask: why must three be subtracted in the middle? The prose commentary of this treatise gives no reason and gives only the result. The three commentaries dispute most fiercely here (see Further Resonances). The easy error is to take the subtraction of three for a slip of the brush or a corruption in transmission. Puguang here lists several explanations side by side and settles on none, one of them saying, “a further explanation: three are subtracted in order to make the Akaniṣṭha Heaven sixteen thousand,” and after that another, “a further explanation: it is so by the nature of things” — the treatise itself gives no reason, and the ancient masters likewise keep several explanations side by side; see Further Resonances. In practice: when an exception suddenly appears in a run of regular values, verify the two ends once; an exception that makes the two ends match is usually there for the sake of closing the count. Fabao here supplies a further vivid point of reference, adducing the Mahāvibhāṣā: “as the bodily form obtained by the asura king Rāhu is vast in measure, like the bodily form obtained in the Akaniṣṭha, a measure of sixteen thousand and six yojanas” — the bodily measure of the asura king can be compared with the Akaniṣṭha Heaven.


XXI. Lifespan: the Day and Night of the Heavens Must Be Established First

〔21.1〕The lifespans of the four continents of the human world. “The people of Uttarakuru in the north have a fixed lifespan of a thousand years, the people of the continent of Godānīya in the west five hundred years, the people of the continent of Videha in the east two hundred and fifty years” — each of the three continents halving in turn, and moreover a “fixed lifespan.” Only “the people of Jambudvīpa in the south have no fixed limit of lifespan”: when the aeon has decreased to its last, ten years only; at the beginning of the aeon, “human life is beyond measure and cannot be reckoned by hundreds or thousands.”

First ask: is the “not fixed” of Jambudvīpa a defect or a distinctive feature? From the side of lifespan it is a defect; from the side of practice not necessarily — it is precisely this continent that has the vajra seat and in which buddhas appear. The treatise offers no comment here and merely records the fact. The easy error is to read “at the last ten, at the first beyond measure” as an increase from ten years to immeasurable. The direction is the reverse: at the beginning of the aeon it is immeasurable, and only after the aeon has decreased does it fall to ten years. In practice: of the four continents, three have fixed lifespans and one is not fixed. It should be noted that whether a lifespan is fixed and whether untimely death is possible are two axes — the treatise says expressly below that “in every place the lifespan admits of untimely death, save only Uttarakuru in the north, whose fixed lifespan is a thousand years,” so the western and eastern continents, though their lifespans are fixed, still admit of untimely death.

〔21.2〕Without establishing day and night first, the lifespans of the gods cannot be reckoned. The treatise says it very plainly: “the day and night of the heavens must be established first, and only then can the length and shortness of the lifespans of the gods be reckoned.” The method is to exchange years of the human world for one day and night of the heavens: fifty human years are one day and night of the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings, thirty days making a month and twelve months a year, and that heaven has a lifespan of five hundred years. Upward from there, one hundred, two hundred, four hundred, eight hundred, and one thousand six hundred human years are in order one day and night, and the lifespans are in order one thousand, two thousand, four thousand, eight thousand, and sixteen thousand years.

First ask: what kind of structure is this? It is a double doubling — the length of the day and night doubles and the number of years doubles too, so that the actual lifespan leaps upward fourfold. The easy error is to see only that string of figures, “their lifespan five hundred,” “their lifespan a thousand,” and to forget that the length of those “years” itself differs in each case. In practice: this is the passage in the fascicle most easily read lightly and most in need of pen and paper; work out the two doublings separately once, and the table of the lifespans of the six heavens of desire is really in hand.

〔21.3〕How day and night are divided where there is no sun or moon. The treatise sets itself a question: above Upholding the Pair there is no sun or moon, so how do those gods establish day and night and light? The answer gives four routes: “they establish day and night by the opening and closing of flowers, such as the kumuda and the padma,” or by the difference between the crying and the silence of the birds, or by the difference between the gods’ sleeping and waking; and as for light, “they accomplish outer light by means of the light of their own bodies.”

First ask: why must this question be asked? Because the passage just before used “day and night” as the unit for reckoning lifespan; and if the gods above had no day and night at all, the whole reckoning would come to nothing. So this question supplies the foundation of the reckoning. The easy error is to take it for a passage of local color. It is a necessary link in the argument. In practice: whenever Abhidharma establishes a reckoning it turns back to supply its premise — this is what most distinguishes it from ordinary narrative.

〔21.4〕The form realm and the formless realm: lifespan equals bodily measure. In the form realm there is “no distinction of day and night, and the length and shortness of lifespan is known by the number of aeons alone,” and moreover “the length and shortness of their lifespan in aeons equals the number of their bodily measure” — a bodily measure of half a yojana means a lifespan of half an aeon, and a bodily measure of sixteen thousand a lifespan of sixteen thousand aeons. The four heavens of the formless realm, from below upward, are twenty thousand, forty thousand, sixty thousand, and eighty thousand aeons.

First ask: why should the lifespan of the form realm be tied to bodily measure? Because the form realm has no day and night to count and another ruler must be found; and this treatise takes the number of the bodily measure as the number of the aeons of lifespan, one table serving two uses. The easy error is to think there is a causal relation between bodily measure and lifespan. The treatise says only “the numbers are equal” — the figures are equal, not that one produces the other. In practice: in the study of the characteristics of dharmas, “the numbers are equal” and “it is the same as” are two different things; keep this layer clear and many tables of correspondence will not be read as causal.

〔21.5〕Which kind of aeon the “aeon” is. The treatise asks itself: the aeon spoken of above, is it an aeon of dissolution, of formation, an intermediate aeon, or a great aeon? The answer: “from the Parīttābha upward the whole of a great aeon is the aeon, and for the gods below it the half of a great aeon is the aeon” — from the Parīttābha Heaven upward a whole great aeon is used, and for the three heavens below half a great aeon. And it verifies this by the example of the great Brahmā king: the great Brahmā exceeds the Brahmapurohita Heaven in lifespan by an aeon and a half, and twenty intermediate aeons each for formation, abiding, and dissolution, sixty intermediate aeons in all, make an aeon and a half; so the “aeon” used by the three heavens below is forty intermediate aeons (the half of a great aeon).

First ask: why ask expressly “which kind of aeon”? Because the text has all along been saying “a lifespan of one aeon,” “a lifespan of half an aeon,” and if the kind of aeon is not fixed all the figures hang in the air. The easy error is to read “the great half” as “the greater part.” It is “the half of a great aeon.” In practice: this is the most tightly reckoned section in the fascicle, and the author makes the definition concrete by an example that can be verified (the great Brahmā’s aeon and a half) — whenever there is a dispute about a unit, finding an instance that can be verified is the most reliable method.


XXII. The Lifespans of the Evil Destinies: the Lifespan of a Heaven as One Day and Night of a Hell

〔22.1〕The correspondence of the six heavens of desire and the six hells. “The lifespans of the six heavens of desire, the Four Great Kings and the rest, serve in order as one day and one night for the six narakas beginning with Equal Reviving, and their lifespans in order are likewise the same as those of the gods” — the five hundred years of the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings are one day and night in the hell of Equal Reviving, and reckoning such days and nights into years, the hell of Equal Reviving has a lifespan of five hundred years. And so on to the sixteen thousand years of the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, which are one day and night in the hell of Burning Heat, so that the hell of Burning Heat has a lifespan of sixteen thousand years.

First ask: why must this correspondence be established? Because the hells, like the heavens, have no sun or moon by which to count day and night, and so the lifespans of the gods are borrowed as a ruler. This is the same device as in the preceding section, used a second time. The easy error is to take “their lifespans in order are likewise the same as those of the gods” to mean that the lifespans of the hells and of the gods are equal. The figures are the same but the units are not — a “year” of the hells is far longer than a “year” of the gods. In practice: by this point the fascicle has used the reckoning of “changing the unit” three times, and the structure of all three is exactly the same; recognize the structure and the two remaining hells, Extreme Heat and the Unremitting, need not be reckoned again.

〔22.2〕The four that do not enter this table. The hell of Extreme Heat has a lifespan of half an intermediate aeon and the Unremitting hell of one intermediate aeon — these two are not converted from the lifespans of the gods but reckoned directly in aeons. The lifespan of animals is “for the most part without fixed limit,” the longest being one intermediate aeon, “that is, the great nāga kings such as Nanda and the rest”; and the treatise adduces the words of the World-Honored One as proof: “there are eight great nāgas, all of whom can abide for an aeon and can uphold the great earth.” Puguang fills out the names of these eight from the Sūtra of the Lotus Flower: “there are eight nāga kings: the nāga king Nanda, the nāga king Upananda, the nāga king Sāgara, the nāga king Vāsuki, the nāga king Takṣaka, the nāga king Anavatapta, the nāga king Manasvin, the nāga king Utpalaka.” Ghosts “take one human month as a day” and live five hundred years.

First ask: why do Extreme Heat and the Unremitting jump out of that table of correspondence? Because the heavens of desire are only six, and matching six hells uses them all up; the remaining two can only be established separately. The easy error is to think that the lifespans of the eight great hells form one continuous geometric run. The first six are converted, the last two directly stipulated. In practice: how to carry on once a table is used up is a common technical problem in Abhidharma; the method of this treatise is to change the unit and begin reckoning afresh, rather than force a fit.

〔22.3〕The lifespan of the cold hells: a simile of sesame. The lifespan of the cold hells cannot be reckoned by the foregoing method, and so “the World-Honored One committed it to a simile to display their lifespan”: twenty human khārī make one vāha of sesame in the land of Magadha, filled with sesame, and suppose a man took out one seed every hundred years; “such sesame would readily come to a time of exhaustion, whereas the lifespan of one born in Arbuda would be hard to exhaust.” The second is twenty times it, and thereafter “each successive one increases twentyfold,” and the lifespans of the eight cold hells are fixed by this. Fabao supplies a gloss for these two units of capacity: “khārī” is “the name of a vessel that holds one hu,” and “vāha” is “what is called here a chuan, holding twenty hu,” and he says that “the sesame chuan of the land of Magadha mostly holds twenty dan.”

First ask: why use a simile here instead of giving a figure? Because this number is so great that giving a figure would convey nothing; a simile on the contrary lets one take its measure. Moreover, the World-Honored One says only “hard to exhaust” and gives no fixed value — and since it is so for the first hell, and each successive one is twentyfold, the figures after eight need not be stated at all. The easy error is to take the sesame seed removed every hundred years for an actual method of reckoning the lifespan. It is a skillful means for displaying “hard to exhaust,” not a formula. In practice: that this treatise changes to simile at the extremes of measurement is a device worth remembering — when a number has passed beyond the range of what can be felt, a comparison is more honest than a figure.


XXIII. Untimely Death, and Those Who Do Not Die Untimely

〔23.1〕The two layers of “every place” and “particular sentient beings.” “In every place the lifespan admits of untimely death, save only Uttarakuru in the north, whose fixed lifespan is a thousand years” — apart from Uttarakuru, the lifespan in every place may be cut off midway. But the treatise at once adds the crucial layer: “this is said with respect to place and not with respect to particular sentient beings, for there are particular sentient beings who do not die untimely.”

First ask: where is this sentence added? It is added upon the distinction between “place” and “person.” With respect to place, apart from Uttarakuru all admit of untimely death; yet within the places that do admit of it, there are still particular individuals who will not die untimely. So these are two layers of judgment and not one. The easy error is to read “in every place there is untimely death” as “every single person may die untimely.” The treatise says expressly that it is not so. In practice: wherever this treatise says “in such and such a place it is thus,” one must ask, “is this said with respect to place or with respect to person?” — a distinction that recurs again and again in the discussions of destinies and of affiliation to realms below, and this is the clearest specimen of it.

〔23.2〕Who does not die untimely. What the treatise lists is: the “bodhisattva bound to one more birth” dwelling in the Tuṣita Heaven, one “in his last existence,” one to whom the Buddha has given prediction, one whom the Buddha has sent, one who follows through faith, one who follows the dharma, and the mother who carries a bodhisattva in the womb and the mother who carries a wheel-turning monarch in the womb. The treatise sums up in a phrase: “these, each as is fitting, are all without untimely death.”

First ask: what do these several classes have in common? All of them are people who carry about them a matter that must be brought to completion — one who awaits buddhahood, one who awaits prediction, one who awaits a mission to be received, and even the mothers who carry such persons. Lifespan here is not a question of the length of retribution but of whether a task can be completed. Puguang glosses the first class: “that is, the bodhisattva bound to one more birth dwelling in the Tuṣita Heaven, who from beginningless time has been bound by many births and deaths, and is now bound by one birth only” — “bound to one more birth” means that only one birth of bondage remains, not that he is bound to some one birth.

The easy error is to read “bound to one more birth” in the negative sense of “bound by a single lifetime.” On Puguang’s gloss it means only one birth remaining, and is a mark of nearness to liberation. In practice: this fascicle speaks from the wind circle lowest down to the Akaniṣṭha highest up, from the shortest ten years to eighty thousand aeons, and after the numbers have been set out to their utmost it closes upon this one sentence — that some are not governed by this table, because they carry about them a matter not yet finished. With this the table of measures of the whole fascicle is given an exit.


Further Resonances: A Mirror of Three Commentaries

The foregoing is the sense of the text of this fascicle itself. Below, a separate section gathers four matters: the outlines and adjudications of the three commentaries and where they diverge, Saṅghabhadra’s refutations and supplements, the divergences of Paramārtha’s older translation, and coordinates for collateral reading. A mirror is not the treatise; it is only a different way of reading one and the same text. Both are recorded without adjudication, each returned to its own place.

1. Where the Three Commentaries Diverge

A commentary that has left only a few words, and those in citations. The commentaries on this fascicle present a special case: Shentai’s Commentary is an incomplete text, the seven fascicles now extant belonging to the Chapter on the Elements, the Chapter on the Faculties, and the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble, while the Chapter on the World is wholly wanting; and so there is no verse-by-verse explanation of Shentai’s that can be attached to this fascicle. Yet the three commentaries expressly cite “Master Tai” (Fabao writing the graph differently) four times, and all that is cited falls precisely within the topics of this fascicle — the reckoning of the three seasons of day and night, and the number of aeons for Maitreya’s ascent and descent. This shows that Shentai’s commentary did once explain the Chapter on the World, only that this portion is no longer transmitted and a few words of it are visible only by way of others’ citations. The lacuna is marked as it stands, and text from other fascicles is not made to serve in its place.

How many explanations the word “Increase” has. The prose commentary of this treatise gives two accounts; Puguang analyzes out of them a third and independent one, “a third explanation says: there is an account that sentient beings, having come out of the hell, repeatedly undergo this suffering again, and it is therefore called an Increase,” and says, “this takes as Increase the repeated undergoing of suffering after coming out of the hell proper, and so differs from the second”; besides which he adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle for a further explanation. Fabao refutes this head-on: “weighing the sense of the treatise, there are only two explanations, not three. Some hold that there are three explanations, which is a mistake.” Yuanhui does not enter into this section. What the two commentaries dispute is into how many parts one and the same passage of the treatise should be cut. Both are recorded without adjudication.

The geography of the vajra seat and the capital of King Yama. Puguang adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: “straight down from the southern edge of this Jambudvīpa, past a measure of five hundred yojanas, there is the capital of King Yama, its length and breadth likewise,” and offers a reconciliation of his own: “on the evidence of this text it is plain that the vajra seat is toward the north, and the hells and the rest are below the capital and somewhat toward the south, so that they do not obstruct one another.” Fabao refutes him directly: “examining this explanation now, the matter is likely not so. The Unremitting hell is twenty thousand yojanas broad, and outside its four gates there are sixteen Increases; or it is said that seven hells encircle the Unremitting hell, and at their flank there are further the cold hells; so that even if they lie somewhat toward the south they still encroach beneath the vajra seat,” and he sets up an explanation of his own — that the dwellings of the human destiny and the abodes of the destiny of ghosts do not obstruct one another in the first place, and so neither do the hells and the vajra seat. The two commentaries explain differently while defending the same thing (both wishing to let the vajra seat and the hells coexist without obstruction). Both are recorded without adjudication.

Why the Anabhraka Heaven subtracts three. Puguang explains it as “from feeling that changes. It is difficult at first to cultivate the feeling that does not change, and so three are subtracted,” and gives two further explanations besides (to make the round sixteen thousand of the Akaniṣṭha; that it is so by the nature of things). Fabao judges this inverted: “this seems inverted. Since what is obtained is hard to fix, body and lifespan ought rather to be increased. It should be said: the feeling that changes below has the superior force of a mind of joyous desire, and by this it performs actions that call forth a superior lifespan and the rest; the feeling that does not change draws forth a mind of gladness that is inferior, and by this it performs actions that call forth a diminished lifespan and the rest” — the direction he establishes is exactly the reverse of Puguang’s. This is the most vivid instance in the fascicle of the three commentaries meeting head-on. Both are recorded without adjudication.

The reckoning of the three seasons of day and night: three masters and three ways of closing. This is the place of sharpest divergence in the fascicle, and the one that best displays the character of each of the three commentaries. Puguang adduces in detail the reckoning of Master Tai and the reckoning of Master Paramārtha, then raises a difficulty of his own, “objection: this too is contrary to principle. If it is said that on the ninth day of the seventh month the night begins to increase, on what time is this based?” and at the end sets up a reconciliation of his own: “the explanation now is this: in the countries of the West the three seasons of cold, heat, and rain are not fixed, and the three periods are established differently according to local custom. The bodhisattva Vasubandhu established the three seasons of the place where he composed the treatise.” Fabao adduces instead the oral teaching of Xuanzang himself — “the Tripiṭaka Master of the Tang takes the sixteenth day of the third month as the beginning of the rainy season, and takes the ninth day of the fifth month as the increase of the night, which likewise does not contradict the Mahāvibhāṣā” — and lists the reckoning of Master Tai alongside, and finally reconciles them on the ground that the cold and heat of the two lands differ, fixing his own reckoning: “explaining the Kośa now, the ninth day of the bright half of the second month of the rainy season is settled as the ninth day of the fifth month in this land.” Yuanhui lists the two schools and expressly declares that he passes no verdict: “of these two explanations above, Master Tai’s intent is that increase and decrease are spoken of after day and night are equal; Master Guang’s intent is that increase and decrease are spoken of after the day is longest. Each rests upon one sense; take or leave as you please. There are further many explanations, which cannot be set out in full.”

Three masters upon one and the same question: one sets up a new explanation of his own, one refers it to local custom, one expressly leaves both standing. Yuanhui’s sentence, “each rests upon one sense; take or leave as you please,” is especially to be noted — it is an ancient master’s own statement of the practice of “recording one sense and two schools together,” and not a rule laid down for him by later hands.

Puguang alone criticizes the reckoning of the divergent translation. At the conversion of capacity in the lifespan of the cold hells, Puguang directly judges Paramārtha’s reckoning to be wrong, what he criticizes being “twenty khārī make one vāha, and one vāha holds two hundred and fifty-six hu.” This is a commentary criticizing a divergent translation, not one commentary criticizing another; Fabao does not touch upon it here and instead supplies his own gloss of “khārī” and “vāha.” Both are recorded without adjudication.

One place where Fabao supplies alone and Puguang does not touch. On the question of the relative breadth and narrowness of the three circles, the prose commentary of this treatise does not discuss it and Puguang does not touch upon it either; Fabao audits it independently, first rejecting one error, “some hold that the twelve and more hundred thousand is the diameter of the great thousand. That does not correspond at all,” then adducing the several masters’ accounts given in the Mahāvibhāṣā, and finally setting down his own judgment: “examining the two accounts above, the former is the better. Since one and the same rainwater forms the water circle, what need is there within it to divide gold from water? And since the three circles rest upon one another, if the wind circle equals the great thousand, why should the water and gold be small?” Fabao’s character of independent criticism may be seen here.

The ancient masters’ own marks of doubt. Beneath this treatise’s sentence “some other school says,” Fabao states that he does not know: “the treatise from ‘some other school says’ to ‘as a chuan holds the grain’ relates the explanation of a divergent school. It is not known which school; it should be looked into” — not knowing which school this divergent account comes from, he expressly marks it for investigation. That the ancient masters marked their doubt where nothing was secure is also part of the practice, and is recorded as it stands.

Puguang’s stated criterion for handling a case where the Mahāvibhāṣā has not adjudicated. At the divergent account of the measure of the terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, Puguang says, “although the Mahāvibhāṣā has no adjudicator, since this treatise has no divergent account, this treatise is taken as correct” — where the Mahāvibhāṣā itself has not adjudicated, this treatise is taken as correct. This is Puguang’s own statement of his method of choice, and is not in the text of the treatise.

In which aeon Maitreya descends: three accounts set out without decision. Puguang adduces Master Tai’s account based on the Sūtra of the Establishing of the World (ascent in the ninth aeon of abiding, descent in the tenth), and records that Master Paramārtha likewise held this; then he adduces a divergent account from his own line of transmission, “but the Preceptor says: Śākyamuni appeared in the first aeon of the aeon of abiding. Within this aeon four buddhas have already appeared, from the Buddha Krakucchanda to the Buddha Śākyamuni. As for the Buddha Maitreya, he will descend in the second aeon of abiding” — so that Maitreya would descend in the next aeon of abiding. Puguang sets out three accounts and makes no final decision. This belongs to an appended discussion of calendrical reckoning; both are recorded without adjudication.

2. Saṅghabhadra’s Refutations and Supplementary Explanations

Saṅghabhadra’s two treatises name this chapter not “the chapter on the world” but “the chapter analyzing dependent origination”; his opening boundary reads, “thus has the world of sentient beings been analyzed; the receptacle world is now to be analyzed,” the same boundary as this fascicle.

Saṅghabhadra does not use the name “the Sūtra-master” to point at Vasubandhu in this fascicle — but this does not mean there is no dispute in it. Searching graph by graph for the marks of counter-refutation habitual to the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, the term “the Sūtra-master” has zero hits within the strict range of this fascicle; its one occurrence falls within the explanation belonging to the next fascicle (the ultimate atom, the syllable, the moment). Within the same range the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine likewise has zero hits. This is an honest negative proposition, but the only thing it can prove is this: Saṅghabhadra does not, in this fascicle, use the designation “the Sūtra-master” to point at Vasubandhu by name. From this one cannot infer that there is no dispute in the fascicle. In fact, when Saṅghabhadra reads through to the stanza on the characteristics of the four continents, he criticizes the wording of the root stanza clause by clause: since it has already said “exactly square, each face two thousand,” the sense is already displayed and the word “equal” is useless; and “round without a gap” and “exactly square” display each other and are likewise redundant; he holds that it should simply say “like a full moon” and “like a square seat.” The stanza at the same place in the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine has already been altered to “the continent of Godānīya in the west, its characteristic like a full moon” and “the northern continent like a square seat.” ⇒ Zero hits for a designation is not the absence of criticism. For the wording and page anchors see section V of this unit’s apparatus. Here it is only recorded, and it is not adjudicated who is right.

The dispute over the hell warders: Saṅghabhadra changes the genre. This treatise sets out the two positions together in a form of question and answer and adduces Dharmasubhūti’s stanza as proof; Saṅghabhadra at the same place uses no question-and-answer form at all and does not adduce that stanza, but states it synthetically: “in the three, the Unremitting, Great Heat, and Burning Heat, there are no hell warders on guard within. In the three, Great Howling, Howling, and Massed Crushing, there are few hell warders, since the messengers of King Yama come and go from time to time to inspect them. All the rest are guarded by hell warders. Since hell warders of the differing classes, sentient and insentient, guard and punish the sentient beings that have offended, the fire does not burn them.” The corresponding passage of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine is nearly the same word for word. With the single phrase “hell warders of the differing classes, sentient and insentient,” Saṅghabhadra gathers in both classes and supplies a detail this treatise does not reach — which hells have warders and which do not. This is not a counter-refutation (Saṅghabhadra does not say this treatise is contrary to principle) but a difference of narrative genre. Puguang too has drawn in this passage of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle to supply what this treatise leaves unstated. Both are recorded without adjudication.

A god below seeing above: what Saṅghabhadra refutes is a separate school, not the author. This treatise merely records “some other school says” without adding a critique; Saṅghabhadra refutes it head-on: “some other school says: as in the desire realm, whether going or coming, an eye below sees above, so likewise in the form realm, in the goings and comings among the several levels, even setting aside a transformation body of the lower level, an eye below also sees above. That account is contrary to principle, because among the several levels of the form realm cause and result are cut off from one another, and because one must be free from the defilement of a lower level in order to be born above. That the eye faculty of a lower level does not see the form above is because it is a result called forth by lowly action.” Puguang draws this refutation in and marks which school is refuted. The point is that what Saṅghabhadra refutes agrees with what this treatise does not adopt, only that this treatise records it while Saṅghabhadra argues it out. Both are recorded without adjudication.

Between the two treatises there is also a difference of fullness. The Treatise Revealing the Doctrine, after “he must make a transformation body below in order to be seen by those below,” goes straight on to the next question and has no passage “some other school says . . . that account is contrary to principle” — at the same place the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle has the refutation and the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine does not. This is a difference between the two treatises themselves and not one between Vasubandhu and Saṅghabhadra, and it is recorded as such.

Saṅghabhadra supplies at the head of the fascicle a passage on the background of dissolution and formation. This treatise speaks at the outset of the arising of the wind circle; Saṅghabhadra first accounts for why there is an arising of the wind circle at all: “this hundred koṭi of four-continent realms is established thus, and is dissolved together and formed together. That is, since sentient beings by the nature of things cultivate and obtain the meditative absorptions, when their lives end below they are born in the levels of the second absorption and the rest; the receptacle world below is destroyed by the three catastrophes, and after a long time, resting in the space below, by the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings a slight wind arises, which grows greater and greater and coils into a circle, its entity firm and dense.” This is a taking up and not a counter-refutation, and belongs to an expansion in the fullness of the prose commentary. If a reader would ask “where did the previous world go?”, this passage is the material for collateral reading.

3. The Divergences of Paramārtha’s Older Translation

Paramārtha’s Expository Treatise on the Treasury forms a line of its own in the passage corresponding to this fascicle. The first thing to know is that the opening boundary sentence of this fascicle reads in Paramārtha’s version, “the world-sphere of living beings having been stated, the receptacle world-sphere is now to be stated” — throughout he writes “receptacle world-sphere” and not “receptacle world.” Searching Paramārtha’s version with Xuanzang’s words, this boundary will never be found; comparison across versions can be made only by the structure of the scene. The two versions also differ in the number of fascicles: Paramārtha divides the chapter on the world into four fascicles and Xuanzang into five, and the passage answering to this fascicle straddles two of Paramārtha’s.

The renderings form a line of their own. Sumeru is written Xumilou, yojana youxun, lakṣa luosha, Jambudvīpa the Yanfu Continent, Avīci Apizhi, Uttarakuru North Jiulou, Equal Reviving Renewed Life, Tuṣita Doushuaiduo; the transcriptions of the nine mountains and the four rivers are all different. In point of practice, Xuanzang writes “the stanza says / the treatise says” and brings out the whole stanza first, while Paramārtha writes “the verse says / the explanation says” and embeds his explanation clause by clause among the lines of verse.

Two instances that best display the parting of the ways in method of translation. The first is the sixteen “Increases” — Paramārtha writes sixteen “Parks.” Xuanzang takes the successive addition of suffering, Paramārtha the image of a garden enclosure: the same referent, and wholly different in what they look to. The second is a personal name: that Venerable who spoke the stanza on the warders of Yama is written by Xuanzang as Dharmasubhūti, half rendered by sense and half transcribed, and by Paramārtha as Damo-xubudi, wholly transcribed; and the graphs of the stanza itself differ too, Xuanzang writing “who sees the suffering of others and rejoices at it” and Paramārtha “who sees the suffering of others and takes pleasure in it.” Of the same type is a school’s name: Xuanzang writes the Mahīśāsakas with a sense-rendering and Paramārtha with a transcription. In passing, the condition to which the two versions attach the clause differs here as well: Xuanzang writes “when there is no wind,” Paramārtha “perfumes fifty youxun against the wind.” Both are recorded without adjudication.

One set of figures with principal and secondary exactly reversed. As to the measure of the summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, Xuanzang’s stanza text maintains eighty thousand a side and gives “each of the four sides is only twenty thousand” as the account of other masters; Paramārtha’s verse text maintains “the Thirty-Three dwell on the summit, its length and breadth twenty thousand” (twenty thousand a side) and gives “each side eighty thousand youxun” as an account of other masters, and adds yet another master who affirms twenty thousand a side and eighty thousand in circumference. With one and the same set of figures, the “position” and the “account of other masters” are exactly interchanged between the two versions. This is not a difference of rendering but a difference in the variant readings of the stanza text each version received, each translator being faithful to what he had. Both are recorded without adjudication.

One instance of a difference of grouping. Among those listed at the end of the passage on untimely death as not dying untimely, both versions list two first items: Xuanzang “the bodhisattva bound to one more birth” and “one in his last existence,” Paramārtha “the bodhisattva who fills the place in one birth” and “the bodhisattva of the last birth” — the first items can be read against each other, while the range of the second is stated differently in the two versions. Whether these are two stages of one and the same bodhisattva or two classes of person, the two translations group differently, and both are recorded without adjudication.

The direction of fullness runs both ways. It cannot be said of this fascicle that one version is throughout the fuller: at the water possessed of the eight qualities Xuanzang sets out the eight items in full while Paramārtha states them summarily in a running phrase, whereas at the bodily measure at first birth Xuanzang has the five graphs “at first like five up to ten” while Paramārtha writes “like five years and so on, like ten years at first birth,” twice as many graphs. Fullness and brevity vary with the passage and have no fixed direction.

4. Coordinates for Collateral Reading

What this fascicle establishes is a map of the world without an architect. The arising of the wind circle, the forming of the jewels, the not falling of the sun and moon — all of these the treatise refers without exception to “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings”: the receptacle world is not made by a single cause, nor upheld by an outer power, but is called forth by shared action alone. This proposition turns, in the Yogācāra line, into another kind of statement: the receptacle realm is what the seeds of common characteristics within consciousness transform into. One and the same question with answers from two generations is the most collateral-readable place in this fascicle.

The institution of the three-thousandfold great thousand (a thousand sets of four great continents up to the Brahmā world being a small thousand, and three tiers of multiplying by a thousand a great thousand) and the tables of the bodily measures and lifespans of the four continents have counterparts in the root treatise of the Yogācāra line that can be read against them word for word — so it is with the threefold multiplication by a thousand into small, middling, and great thousands, and so also with the method of establishing the day and night of the heavens by the years of the human world and deriving lifespans from them by degrees; as for the bodily measures of the four continents, both treatises present an increase continent by continent while stating the values differently, and this is recorded without adjudication. The numbers are the same while the doctrinal frameworks to which they are tied differ, and the two may be viewed side by side.

As for the “bound to one more birth” with which this fascicle closes, Paramārtha’s older translation has precisely “the bodhisattva who fills the place in one birth” — a difference of one name, and it is only recorded.

考據Apparatus

有情世間既訖,論主一句「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」轉入外器。此子先立風輪·水輪·金輪之三層底座,次安九山八海四洲,下探㮈落迦與八寒地獄,上循日月·妙高四層級·三十三天以至有色諸天,再以三千大千收其廣,末以身量·壽量·中夭收其久——一部毘曇之『世界圖』全在此卷。


一、科判定位

科判系統此段之位
玄奘 T1558 九品分別世品第三(品題〔T29 0040c22〕)之第四分——本子(子4)=卷十一全〔0057a02–0062a07〕。卷端題〔0057a02〕·品續題「分別世品第三之四」〔0057a06〕。頌塊二十三=本頌二十塊(正45–正84前半·合三十九頌半)+引頌三塊
承前之錨開卷即以承轉句自標其位——「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說。」〔T29 0057a07〕。此為全品最強之科界:有情世間章(子1至子3)至此收,器世間章自此起
收卷之錨本子末句「此等如應皆無中夭」〔0062a04 段〕;次卷(子5)首句「如是已約踰繕那等辯器世間身量差別。約年等辯壽量有殊,二量不同未說應說」〔T29 0062a13〕——以「已約……已辯」回收本子二事(處量·身量·壽量),下轉極少量之辯
三家品級大科(三疏同標)三疏皆判本子之界為世品全體層級之大文第二。光記〔T41n1821 0185b12〕「此下大文第二明器世間。就中,一明所居器、二明能居量、三明三分齊」·寶疏〔T41n1822 0614b25〕「此下當品大文第二明器世間。於中有三:一述所居器、二述能居量、三述分齊」·頌疏〔T41n1823 0878c18〕「從此大文第二,明器世間:一明所居器、二明能居量、三明三分齊」
寶疏獨加「當品」二字三家之中唯寶疏於「大文第二」上加「當品」,明其編號所屬之層級為品級。光記於世品全用裸式(「此下大文第N」不加「當品」,與根品異),故其編號須辨所屬層級(緣起內/器世間內/世品全體),不得逕作品級大科
器世間三分之所屬三分作一所居器·二能居量·三三分齊。本子涵前二分——所居器(風輪至天器)+能居量(身量·壽量);第三分(三分齊)屬子5
所居器八目(光記·頌疏同標)光記〔T41n1821 0185b14〕續云「就明所居器中,一別明小器、二總明大千。就別明小器中,一明三輪、二明九山、三明八海、四明四洲、五明黑山等、六明地獄、七明日月、八明天器」;頌疏〔T41n1823 0878c18〕同此八目而於「小器」下加「有二」「有八」之數目字。三家科判架構全同,動詞小異(光記·頌疏作「明」·寶疏作「述」)
三疏分卷與玄奘分卷全同子1 卷八〔0040c22〕|光記〔0148a05〕|寶疏〔0584a05〕|頌疏〔0863a17〕;子2 卷九〔0045c09〕|〔0160a05〕|〔0593c05〕|〔0868b16〕;子3 卷十〔0051c06〕|〔0173a26〕|〔0604c27〕|〔0873b24〕;子4 卷十一〔0057a06〕|光記〔0185b11〕|寶疏〔0614b24〕|頌疏〔0878c24〕;子5 卷十二〔0062a12〕|〔0192b11〕|〔0620a05〕|〔0885a18〕。⇒ 三家獨立分卷而界全同,與玄奘分卷逐一對應——carve 案一(卷界式)之三重重合實據

頌/長行體例:本頌(T1560 單行本定頌界·世品九十九頌·全頌四句)+長行自釋。本子之本頌二十塊中,整頌合牒者十一塊(正45–47·正48–51·正52·正53·正54–57·正58·正59·正60·正61–63·正64·正65·正66–69·正73·正74·正81–83),恰半頌牒釋者七塊(正70前半〔0060a26〕·正70後半〔0060b03〕·正71前半〔0060b14〕·正71後半〔0060b20〕·正72前半〔0060c06〕·正72後半〔0060c19〕·正84前半〔0061c28〕),跨半頌合牒者二塊(正75·正76·正77前半〔0061a14〕·正77後半·正78–80〔0061a28〕)。⇒ 十一+七+二=二十。引頌三塊(非本頌·前文之徵逐字)

  • 〔T29 0058b16〕「此八㮈落迦,我說甚難越」——前徵「八㮈落迦增各十六,故薄伽梵說此頌言」〔0058b14〕。
  • 〔T29 0058c21〕「心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒」——前徵「若爾,云何通彼大德法善現說?如彼頌言」〔0058c19〕。
  • 〔T29 0060a18〕「花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾」——前徵「若爾,何故薄伽梵言」〔0060a16〕。此塊為七言四句,異於本子餘塊之五言。

頌次標記式:整頌作 正N正N–M,恰半作 正N前半正N後半,不足半作 正N〔M句〕,非本頌之引頌作 引頌·非本頌


二、術語(名相)

漢(玄奘)真諦異名(loc)本論定義句/古德音義釋
器世間器世界〔T29n1559 0214a14〕「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」〔0057a07〕。以奘詞「器世間」搜真諦世品全段零命中——真諦全作「器世界」
有情世間眾生世界〔0214a14〕承前章之名
風輪·水輪·金輪風輪(同)〔0214a15〕「先於最下依止虛空有風輪生,廣無數、厚十六億踰繕那」〔0057a15〕·「如是水輪於未凝結位,深十一億二萬踰繕那」〔0057a20〕·「搏擊此水上結成金」〔0057a25〕
洛叉洛沙〔0214a15〕光記〔T41n1821 0185b19〕「洛叉,此云億」
踰繕那由旬光記〔T41n1821 0185b23〕「踰繕那,如下別釋。舊云由旬,訛也」
大諾健那光記〔T41n1821 0185b23〕「大諾健那,是人中神名,此云露形」
蘇迷盧(迷盧)須彌婁(彌婁)〔0214b07〕〔0216b19〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c07〕「蘇迷盧,此云妙高。舊云須彌,訛也」
踰健達羅由乾陀羅〔0214b07〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c08〕「踰健達羅,此云持雙。此山頂上有二道猶如車跡,山持二跡故名持雙」
伊沙馱羅伊沙陀羅〔0214b07〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c09〕「伊沙馱羅山,此云持軸。山峰上聳猶如車軸,此山能持故名持軸」
朅地洛迦佉特羅柯〔0214b07〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c11〕「朅地洛迦,印度樹名,此方南邊亦有此樹稱為檐木,山上寶樹其形似彼,從樹為名」·〔0185c13〕「舊云佉陀羅木,訛也」
蘇達梨舍那修騰婆那〔0214b08〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c13〕「蘇達梨舍那,此云善見。莊嚴殊妙見者稱善,故名善見」
頞濕縛羯拏阿輸割那〔0214b08〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c15〕「頞濕縛羯拏,此云馬耳,山峯似馬耳也」
毘那怛迦毘那多柯〔0214b08〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c16〕「毘那怛迦,此云象鼻,印度神名。山形似彼象鼻,故以名焉」
尼民達羅尼旻陀羅〔0214b09〕光記〔T41n1821 0185c17〕「尼民達羅,此是魚名。其魚㭰尖,山峰似彼魚㭰,故以名焉」
鐵輪圍山「此外復有鐵輪圍山,周匝如輪圍一世界」〔0057b12〕
八功德水八功德水(同)〔0214c19〕「一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹」〔0057c11〕
種·藏光記〔T41n1821 0185c22〕「水能生寶,名種。水中出寶,名藏」
有法光記〔T41n1821 0186a03〕以因明釋之「聲是無常,無常是法。聲是有法,有無常法故名有法」
數論僧佉〔0214b28〕「數論云何執轉變義?謂執有法自性常存」〔0057b21〕
贍部洲剡浮洲〔0215a06〕「南贍部洲北廣南陿,三邊量等,其相如車」〔0057c28〕
金剛喻定金剛三摩提〔0215a10〕「一切菩薩將登正覺皆坐此座上起金剛喻定」〔0058a02〕
遮末羅·筏羅遮末羅光記〔T41n1821 0186b11〕「遮末邏,此云猫牛。筏羅遮末羅,此云勝猫牛」
香醉山光記〔T41n1821 0186b22〕「香醉山,謂此山中有諸香氣,嗅令人醉,故名香醉」
無熱惱池阿那婆怛多〔0215b13〕「雪北香南有大池水,名無熱惱」〔0058a20〕
殑伽·信度·徙多·縛芻恒伽·辛頭·私多·薄搜〔0215b13〕「出四大河:一殑伽河、二信度河、三徙多河、四縛芻河」〔0058a20〕
㮈落迦(捺落迦·那落迦)地獄〔0215c08〕光記〔T41n1821 0186b29〕「若言捺落迦,顯受罪處。若言那落迦,顯能受罪人」
阿鼻旨(無間)阿毘指〔0215b24〕「以於其中受苦無間,非如餘七大㮈落迦受苦非恒,故名無間」〔0058b05〕
增(十六增)園(十六園)〔0215c08〕「此是增上被刑害所,故說名增,本地獄中適被害已重遭害故」〔0058c15〕
琰魔卒·邏剎娑閻摩卒〔0216a15〕「琰魔王使諸邏剎娑擲諸有情置地獄者名琰魔卒」〔0058c23〕
頞部陀等八寒光記〔T41n1821 0187a28〕「頞部陀,此云皰,嚴寒逼身,其身皰也」·〔0187a29〕「尼剌部陀,此云皰裂,嚴寒逼身,身皰裂也」
臘縛「晝夜增時一晝夜增幾?增一臘縛」〔0059b11〕
堅手·持鬘·恒憍「有藥叉神名為堅手住初層級,有名持鬘住第二級,有名恒憍住第三級」〔0059c02〕
善見(城)「於山頂中有宮名善見」〔0059c23〕;頌疏〔T41n1823 0882b18〕「見者稱善也」
妬羅綿光記〔T41n1821 0189b10〕「妬羅是樹名,綿從樹菓中出,名妬羅綿,如言柳絮」
圓生樹波利(園)〔0217b08〕「城外東北有圓生樹,是三十三天受欲樂勝所」〔0060a05〕
善法堂善法(堂)〔0217b25〕「外西南角有善法堂,三十三天時集於彼詳論如法不如法事」〔0060a22〕
化地部彌嬉沙塞部〔0217b25〕「化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十」〔0060a21〕
欲生·樂生欲生·樂生(同)〔0217c25〕〔0218a05〕「於欲界中分別欲生差別三種」〔0060b28〕·「三靜慮中於九處生受三種樂……故名樂生」〔0060b29〕
色究竟天·礙究竟天「此處最高名色究竟。有餘師說:彼名礙究竟天」〔0060c15〕
俱盧舍寶疏〔T41n1822 0619b12〕「俱盧舍」者,此云鳴喚
佉梨·婆訶寶疏〔T41n1822 0619c12〕「佉梨」者,受一斛器名,如此間計升、斛等名·〔0619c13〕「婆訶」者,此云篅,受二十斛
中夭中夭(同)〔0219c09〕「諸處壽量皆有中夭,唯北俱盧定壽千歲」〔0061c29〕

名相之梵語羅馬字唯繫於古德所傳之音寫可徵者。本子古德音義釋皆屬「此云」式對譯(光記為主),非現代擬音,故本表不附 IAST,亦不據現代校訂本擬補。真諦異名全表見目四。


三、校勘(大正原書校記·卷十一全枚舉)

本子範圍〔0057a02–0062a07〕大正原書註共三十二枚=版本異讀二十一+梵語對音註十一〔0057001 Lakṣa·0057006 Yojana·0058003 Rākṣasa·0058005 Jambūdvīpa·0058009 Utsada·0058010 Yama·0061001 Krośa·0061003 Kumuda·0061004 Padma·0062001 Eka-jātipratibaddha·0062002 Carama-bhavika〕。依本帙體例(界品子1 已定),梵語對音註非異讀,不入表。異讀二十一條全列(本卷無大正*式重出)。底本=大正 lem;凡 CBETA 回改處並錄——本卷回改三處,另 CBETA 他本校異一處(底本不改),俱見表後小節。語境字以【 】標。

註號底本【大】/異讀語境(逐字)是否涉義
00570020057b09半/八【宮】頌「妙高出亦然,餘八【半】半下,廣皆等高量」涉義(遞減之算式:八山出水各半其前,若作「八」則此句算式之表述改觀)
00570030057b15琉璃/瑠璃【明】「金、銀、吠【琉璃】、頗胝迦寶」不涉義(同詞異寫)
00570040057b19擊/繫【明】「由具種種威德猛風鑽【擊】變生眾寶類等」涉義(鑽擊/鑽繫——衝擊生變/繫縛聚合,猛風之作用機制可分)
00570050057c09二/一【元】【明】頌「三洛叉二萬,【二】千踰繕那」涉義(外海廣量之數值本身)
00580010058a10筏/茂【宮】「一遮末羅洲、二【筏】羅遮末羅洲」不涉義(中洲專名音寫之形近異字)
00580020058a11二/一【宮】「勝身洲邊【二】中洲者,一提訶洲、二毘提訶洲」涉義(若作「一」,與「四洲邊各二」之總算式相違;然本論下文逕舉二名)
00580040058a18三/五【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「此贍部洲從中向北,三處各有【三】重黑山」涉義(三處各三重=九,正應頌「此北九黑山」;若作「五」,則與九數不合)
00580060058c03肢/支【宋】【宮】(CBETA 回改:從【麗】【宋】【宮】作「支」·底本流讀「支」)「有情遊彼風吹葉墜,斬刺【支】體骨肉零落」不涉義(支/肢為古今字;與卷十〔0056b23〕「支/肢」同型而大正取字相反——彼處大正作「支」·此處大正作「肢」,可見大正本身不畫一)
00580070058c04摣/䶥【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「有烏駁狗【摣】掣食之」不涉義(同狀抓取撕扯之異體)
00580080058c08杖/仗【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「而鐵【杖】同故一增攝」不涉義(古今通用字·不改『三者同類故合一』之論理)
00590010059b25四/由【宮】頌「如次居【四】級,亦住餘七山」涉義(『如次居由級』不成語,疑形近致訛)
00590020059c17妙池/妙地【宋】【元】【明】【宮】頌「【妙池】居四方,相去各二十」涉義(四妙池/四勝妙之地——具體水體與泛指處所之別)
00590030059c18圓生/園生【元】【明】【宮】頌「東北【圓生】樹,西南善法堂」涉義(命名著眼點異·所指同一樹)
00600010060a04池/地【明】【宮】「四苑四邊有四妙【池】,中間各去苑二十踰繕那」涉義(與 0059002 同詞兩見皆逢異讀·見誠實記二)
00600020060a05捔/角【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「諸天於彼【捔】勝歡娛」不涉義(捔=角·同源異體)
00600030060a07十/〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「盤根深廣五【十】踰繕那」涉義(整字脫落致十倍之差·五十/五·見誠實記三)
00600040060b03抱/𭷝【宋】頌「六受欲交【抱】,執手笑視婬」不涉義(抱之異體俗字)
00600050060c01生/〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「謂彼安住離【生】喜樂、定生喜樂,離喜樂故」涉義(三靜慮之樂名:離生喜樂〔初〕·定生喜樂〔二〕·離喜樂〔三〕;若脫「生」字則首二名與第三名相亂·見誠實記四)
00610020061a28年/歲【明】頌「北洲定千【年】,西東半半減」不涉義(年/歲於壽量語境同義互用)
00610050061b29以/已【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「少光【以】上大全為劫,自下諸天大半為劫」不涉義(以/已通假)
00610060061c12次/次第【宋】【元】【明】「壽量如【次】亦同彼天」不涉義(單字/複詞之繁簡差)

誠實記一(頌文與 T1560 單行本之歧異·五處):本子之本頌與《阿毘達磨俱舍論本頌》T29n1560 逐字比對,得差異五處——其四屬同義異體字/異寫;唯「妙池/妙地」一處涉義(具體水體與泛指處所之別),非異體字,唯錄不判——

本子(T1558)T1560(loc)所在
上七㮈落迦上七捺落迦〔T29n1560 0315a11〕正59
雜飾地柔軟雜飾地柔濡〔0315a27〕正67
妙池居四方妙地居四方〔0315b01〕正68(與校記 0059002 之【宋】【元】【明】【宮】讀同
六受欲交抱,執手笑視婬六受欲交抱,執手笑視淫〔0315b04〕正70後半
下無昇見上下無升見上〔0315b08〕正72後半

⇒ 五處中「妙地」一條,T1560 之讀與大正校記所錄之宋元明宮四本合,而與 T1558 大正底本異——此非孤證之異寫,乃底本與單行頌本兼四藏之系統性歧異唯錄文本事實,不升校本取捨

誠實記二(同詞兩見皆逢異讀):「妙池」一詞於本子頌〔0059c17〕與長行〔0060a04〕各一見,二處各自有校記,且異讀方向相同(皆作「地」)。此為本子二十一條異讀中唯一之同詞併發例。二處若同取「地」,則善見城外之「四妙池」全段須改讀為「四妙地」,波及該段之空間敘述。唯錄不判

誠實記三(唯一致數量級改變者):〔0060a07〕「五【十】踰繕那」之「十」字,宋元明宮四本俱無。若從四本,則圓生樹盤根之量由五十踰繕那降為五踰繕那,十倍之差。二十一條中唯此一條之異讀直接改動數量級。唯錄不判

誠實記四(〔0060c01〕校記所繫之段):該校記所繫之「生」字,實落於樂生段之「謂彼安住離【生】喜樂、定生喜樂」〔0060c01〕,與前文「欲生差別三種」〔0060b29〕無涉。⇒ 其涉義之實為三靜慮樂名之相亂(離生喜樂/離喜樂),非「欲生」一詞之成立與否。

校勘結語:二十一條無一升定本案(無古德牒文+義理雙證俱支持異讀者)。異讀並錄備考,唯錄不判

CBETA 回改(非大正原書校記·底本流從 CB 讀者並錄)

本帙底本文字流取 CBETA 行內讀;凡 CBETA 於大正 lem 之外別作一字者,逐處並錄(依界品子1 已定之體例)。卷十一回改三處

CB 讀/大正 lem語境(逐字·【】=底本流所讀)
0058c03支【CB】【麗-CB】【宋】【宮】,肢【大】「有情遊彼風吹葉墜,斬刺【支】體骨肉零落」(=校勘表〔0058006〕同一處)此處大正原書自有校記,故兼列於上表;CB 之回改與【麗】【宋】【宮】合
0058c12然【CB】【磧-CB】,燃【大】,燃【麗-CB】「麻等於中上下迴轉舉體糜爛,有情亦【然】」〔起錨 0058c11〕CBETA 從【磧】作「然」;此句「亦然」=亦復如是,非『燃燒』;上文自有「猛火下燃」之「燃」,二字分工顯然
0059a11𣲖【CB】【麗-CB】【磧-CB】,泒【大】「諸地獄器安布如是,本處在下、支【𣲖】不定」CBETA 從【麗】【磧】作「𣲖」(派之古字);「支𣲖」=支派,作「泒」為形近之訛

另有 CBETA 校異一處,底本不改(大正與 CB 同讀,僅記他本之異),誌錄備考:〔0058c13〕「槍【大】【磧-CB】,搶【麗-CB】」(「手執刀槍禦捍令迴」)。


四、異譯對勘(真諦《阿毘達磨俱舍釋論》T1559 ★)

對勘基座:玄奘本卷十一〔T29n1558 0057a02–0062a07〕↔ 真諦本〔T29n1559 0214a14–0219c14〕。

二譯分卷數不同,本子之對應段界須以場景結構定:真諦世間品分四卷(之一〔0198a24〕·之二〔0204c02〕·之三〔0211c02〕·之四〔0218b09〕),玄奘分五卷。本子所對之真諦段橫跨其「之三」與「之四」之界,故不得以卷題界充之。二界之逐字證據——

  • 起界:真諦「說眾生世界已,器世界今當說」〔T29n1559 0214a14〕,與玄奘「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」〔0057a07〕場景結構全合(皆為有情世間章訖·器世間章起之承轉句)。
  • 迄界:真諦「除鳩婁中夭」〔0219c09〕釋曰段訖,其後同段直轉「此等由由旬量說處所及身量已」〔0219c14〕——此轉語與玄奘子5 首句「如是已約踰繕那等辯器世間身量差別」〔0062a13〕功能全同。真諦於此未分卷,玄奘則以此轉語起新卷。⇒ 本子於真諦本之迄界止於〔0219c14〕之前。

禁以奘詞搜諦本(本子之直接實證):以「器世間」搜真諦世間品全段〔0198a24–0225a10〕零命中——真諦全篇作「器世界」。以「蘇迷盧」「踰繕那」搜之,亦零命中(真諦作「須彌婁」「由旬」)。若循奘詞搜索,本子之起界永不得見。零命中不構成『彼本無此段』之證據;跨本比對一律取場景結構。

體例基差:玄奘「頌曰/論曰」整頌先出、長行自釋;真諦「偈曰/釋曰」偈句逐句嵌釋,一頌常拆二至四處分引(如三十三天頂量之偈,其二「有餘師說」即分兩處嵌於釋曰中,不若玄奘頌/論二截分明)。

對勘要目(逐條·錄義理承重者二十)

  1. 開卷科界句——奘:「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」〔0057a07〕‖諦:「說眾生世界已,器世界今當說」〔T29n1559 0214a14〕。譯名差:有情世間/眾生世界·器世間/器世界。
  2. 風輪厚量——奘頌:「安立器世間,風輪最居下,其量廣無數,厚十六洛叉」〔0057a08〕‖諦偈:「此中器世界,說於下依住,深十六洛沙,風輪廣無數」〔0214a14〕。譯名差:洛叉/洛沙;開合差:奘先標「風輪最居下」總冒,諦逕入依住與厚量。
  3. 九山音寫——奘:「蘇迷盧處中,次踰健達羅,伊沙馱羅山,朅地洛迦山」〔0057b02〕‖諦:「須彌婁山王,由乾陀羅山、伊沙陀羅山、佉特羅柯山、修騰婆那山、阿輸割那山、毘那多柯山、尼旻陀羅山」〔0214b07〕。九山逐一異寫,系統性譯名分途(見下對照表)。
  4. 數論轉變義之破——奘:「數論云何執轉變義?謂執有法自性常存」〔0057b21〕‖諦:「僧佉外道所立轉變義。僧佉轉變者,此物先已住,轉成別法」〔0214b28〕。譯名差:數論/僧佉(意譯/音寫)。此為本子唯一涉外道之辯破段,二譯進路異而所破之義同。
  5. 八海總說——奘:「妙高為初、輪圍最後,中間八海,前七名內」〔0057c10〕‖諦:「其中間七海」〔0214c17〕。開合差:奘先立「初/後/中間」之全局句式,諦逕承前段山名列敘徑入。
  6. 八功德水——奘八目具陳「一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹」〔0057c11〕‖諦:「八功德水。此水冷美輕軟清香,飲時不咽逆於喉,飲已利益內界不損於腹」〔0214c19〕。詳略差:奘作八目編號式,諦作連讀描述式。
  7. 金剛座·金剛喻定——奘:「一切菩薩將登正覺皆坐此座上起金剛喻定」〔0058a02〕‖諦:「一切菩薩皆於中坐,修習金剛三摩提」〔0215a10〕。譯名差:金剛喻定/金剛三摩提(意譯著「喻」字/逕以音寫承之)。
  8. 東洲之相——奘:「東勝身洲東陿西廣,三邊量等,形如半月」〔0058a04〕‖諦:「東洲如半月」〔0215a13〕。詳略差:奘明陳陿廣之勢,諦僅總言其相。
  9. 四大河——奘:「一殑伽河、二信度河、三徙多河、四縛芻河」〔0058a21〕‖諦:「從此池流出四大河,一恒伽、二辛頭、三私多、四薄搜」〔0215b13〕。四河音寫全異。
  10. 無間地獄之量——奘:「此贍部洲下過二萬,有阿鼻旨大㮈落迦。深廣同前」〔0058b03〕‖諦:「向下二十千,阿毘指廣爾」〔0215b24〕。譯名差:阿鼻旨/阿毘指。
  11. 十六增/十六園——奘:「十六增者,八㮈落迦四面門外各有四所」〔0058b22〕‖諦:「此一切地獄,各各有十六園」〔0215c08〕。譯名分途之最鮮明例:奘取「增」(承『重遭害故說名增』之訓),諦取「園」(苑囿之象)。同一所指,擇字取義全異。
  12. 琰魔卒引頌之歸屬——奘:「若爾,云何通彼大德法善現說?如彼頌言」〔0058c19〕,頌「心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒」〔0058c21〕‖諦:「大德達摩須部底說偈言」〔0216a13〕,偈「恒瞋最麁業,於惡起愛樂,見他苦生樂,必作閻摩卒」〔0216a15〕。人名譯法之對比:奘半意譯半音寫作「法善現」,諦全音寫作「達摩須部底」。頌文譯字亦異(欣悅/生樂·琰魔卒/閻摩卒)。
  13. 日月去妙高之量——奘:「日月迷盧半」〔0059a18〕‖諦:「日月彌婁半」〔0216b19〕。二譯最貼近之逐字平行例(僅迷盧/彌婁二字異)。
  14. 妙高層級——奘:「蘇迷盧山有四層級,始從水際盡第一層相去十千踰繕那量」〔0059b26〕‖諦:「山王層有四,相去各十千」〔0216c24〕。開合差:奘散文層層鋪陳,諦偈以一句總攝四層之等差。
  15. 三十三天頂量(二本主副互異)——奘頌「妙高頂八萬,三十三天居」〔0059c11〕,論曰「其頂四面各八十千,與下四邊其量無別。有餘師說:周八十千,別說四邊各唯二萬」〔0059c19〕‖諦偈「三十三住頂,縱廣二十千」〔0217a10〕,釋曰「有餘師說:一一邊各八萬由旬,如下際,此名最勝處。有餘師說:於須彌婁頂中央,一一邊各二萬由旬,周圍八萬由旬為最勝處」〔0217a13〕。同一組數字(八萬/二萬),二本之『頌本文(主)』與『有餘師(副)』恰相反位——玄奘主八萬而以二萬為餘師說,真諦主二萬而以八萬為餘師說之一。此非譯名之異,乃二本所承頌文異讀之異,二譯各自忠實其所據。並錄不判
  16. 逆風熏香之引頌——奘:「花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾;善士功德香芬馥,逆風流美遍諸方」〔0060a18〕‖諦:「花香非能逆風薰,根實諸香亦皆爾,善人戒香逆風薰,正行芳流遍國界」〔0217b22〕。四句逐句異譯而句法對位全同。譯名差:善士功德香/善人戒香。
  17. 化地部之名——奘:「化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十」〔0060a21〕‖諦:「彌嬉沙塞部說:此香順風薰百由旬,逆風薰五十由旬」〔0217b25〕。同部派名一意譯一音寫(與第 12 對同型)。二本於第二分句所繫之條件亦異——奘作「若無風時」,諦作「逆風薰」。並錄不判。
  18. 上有色天總攝——奘:「此上有色天,住依空宮殿」〔0060a26〕‖諦:「從此上宮殿,天住」〔0217b29〕。句法差:奘主謂賓序整,諦倒裝。
  19. 六欲天婬相——奘:「六受欲交抱,執手笑視婬」〔0060b03〕‖諦:「身交抱捉手,笑相視為婬」〔0217c07〕。字面小異(交抱/身交抱·執手/捉手)。
  20. 初生身量·不中夭者——奘:「初如五至十,色圓滿有衣」〔0060b14〕‖諦:「譬五年乃至,譬十年初生,生中」〔0217c18〕(奘五字概括·諦十字展開);奘:「謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,及最後有佛記佛使隨信法行菩薩輪王,母懷彼二胎時,此等如應皆無中夭」〔0062a02〕‖諦:「除鳩婁中夭」〔0219c09〕下釋曰列一生補處菩薩·最後生菩薩·佛所記·佛所使·信行法行菩薩·輪王母等。開合差:二本皆列兩個首項——奘作「一生所繫菩薩」與「最後有」,諦作「一生補處菩薩」與「最後生菩薩」——首項可對讀,次項之範圍則二本表述有別。並錄不判

譯名對照(子4 範圍·逐字所見):有情世間/眾生世界 · 器世間/器世界 · 洛叉/洛沙 · 踰繕那/由旬 · 蘇迷盧/須彌婁 · 迷盧/彌婁 · 踰健達羅/由乾陀羅 · 伊沙馱羅/伊沙陀羅 · 朅地洛迦/佉特羅柯 · 蘇達梨舍那/修騰婆那 · 頞濕縛羯拏/阿輸割那 · 毘那怛迦/毘那多柯 · 尼民達羅/尼旻陀羅 · 數論/僧佉 · 贍部洲/剡浮洲 · 金剛喻定/金剛三摩提 · 殑伽/恒伽 · 信度/辛頭 · 徙多/私多 · 縛芻/薄搜 · 無熱惱/阿那婆怛多 · 阿鼻旨/阿毘指 · 增/園 · 法善現/達摩須部底 · 琰魔卒/閻摩卒 · 化地部/彌嬉沙塞部 · 圓生樹/波利園 · 通力/通慧 · 北俱盧/北鳩婁 · 等活/更活 · 覩史多/兜帥多 · 頌曰論曰/偈曰釋曰。

誠實記:本子與真諦本未見篇章整體缺失——器世間全部主題(三輪·九山·八海·四洲·黑山無熱池·地獄·琰魔卒·日月·妙高層級·三十三天·上有色天·婬相身量·欲生樂生·天處相去·三千大千·身量·壽量·中夭)真諦本逐一可對應,差異表現為譯名·開合·詳略·頌釋體例,非段落有無。詳略之向雙向而無定(第 6 對奘詳諦略·第 20 對諦詳奘略),與根品子1 之單向記異。異讀本目唯錄不判。


五、系內對辯(眾賢《順正理論》T1562 ★·《顯宗論》T1563)

眾賢之品名非「世品」:T1562 作「辯緣起品第三」〔0456a16–0527b18〕·T1563 作「辯緣起品第四」〔0829a22–0859b21〕。勿以俱舍品名搜之

對辯段之界:T1562 於本子之起界作「如是已辯有情世間,器世間今當辯」〔T29n1562 0514c23〕,下即牒本頌「安立器世間,風輪最居下」——與俱舍卷十一同界。其迄界在「此諸壽量有中夭耶」段之後,「經主率意作是釋言」〔0521b23〕已入子5(極微字剎那)範圍。

誠實記(負命題·限於「經主」標名式·非「無爭」):以「經主」「非理」「不應理」「不然」「太過」等《順正理論》慣用反破標記詞於本子對應段逐字搜尋,「經主」一詞於嚴格子4 範圍內零命中;其唯一之見在〔T29n1562 0521b23〕「經主率意作是釋言」,而該段所對者為玄奘子5 之「極微字剎那,色名時極少」,已逾本子。⇒ 本子範圍內眾賢未以「經主……非理」之標名式反破世親;T1563 於同範圍內「經主」「非理」「不然」亦全數零命中。然標名零命中不等於無批評——眾賢於同一頌塊內對本頌措辭有逐句批評,見下『頌語之批評』一條。⇒ 本記所能證者,唯標名式反破之不存在,不能推及『本子無爭』;以人名標記之零命中推全稱負命題,即四審 F-01 所誡之病。

實質差異(並錄不判·非窮盡)

  1. 量之差二項——①外海之廣:本論作「量廣三億二萬二千」〔T29 0057c18〕,眾賢緊接補云「理實應言其量復有一千二百八十七半」〔T29n1562 0515c04〕。②星之最小量:本論作「星最小者唯一俱盧舍」〔T29 0059a28〕,眾賢作「星最小者半俱盧舍」〔T29n1562 0518a18〕,顯宗同〔T29n1563 0852b07〕。唯錄不判。

  2. 地獄卒是否有情——本論作開放式問答:「今於此中因論生論。諸地獄卒是有情不?」〔0058c17〕下並列「有說:非情」與「有說:有情」二宗,並引大德法善現頌為「有情」宗之證。眾賢於同一義理位置不採問答對辯體,亦不引法善現頌,逕作綜合陳述——「無間大熱及炎熱三,於中皆無獄卒防守。大叫號叫及眾合三,少有獄卒,琰魔王使時時往來巡檢彼故。其餘皆為獄卒防守。有情無情異類獄卒,防守治罰罪有情故,火不焚燒」〔T29n1562 0517a27〕。《顯宗論》同段逐字略同〔T29n1563 0852a02〕。差異之實:本論二宗並陳而不決,眾賢以「有情無情異類獄卒」一語兼收二類,並補述本論未及之何獄有卒·何獄無卒。此非反破(眾賢未言本論非理),乃敘述體裁之異。並錄不判。

  3. 下天能否見上天——本論於「下無昇見上」頌下附一異部說「有餘部說:彼下地天隨樂亦能見上地色,如生此界下見上天」〔0060c25〕,存錄而不加評騭。眾賢於同一位置正面反破此異部說——「有餘部說:如欲界中若往若來,下眼見上。如是色界諸地往來,設離下化身,下眼亦見上。彼說非理,以色界中諸地相望因果斷故,要離下地染方得上生故。下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」〔T29n1562 0520a11〕。其反破之對象為有餘部(光記標為大眾部),非世親本論;本論於此持存錄之姿,眾賢更進一步申其非。並錄不判。 T1562/T1563 二論互異:T1563 於「必化下身,為令下見」〔0854a18〕後逕接「依地居天已說處量,夜摩天等處量云何」,無「有餘部說……彼說非理」一段——顯宗論於此節較順正理論為省。此為二論本身之異,非世親/眾賢之異。誌錄之。

頌語之批評(正面·非標名式):本論四洲相頌作「西瞿陀尼洲,其相圓無缺」〔T29n1558 0057c23〕(下至「北俱盧畟方,面各二千等」)。眾賢順讀至同一頌塊,逐句批其措辭:「既說畟方面各二千,以其義已顯,故等言無用。或應但說圓及等言,無缺畟方便為無用。又應說如滿月方座,不應但說圓無缺等」〔T29n1562 0515c26〕——所指者為「等」字冗、「圓無缺」與「畟方」互顯而重出,並謂應逕以「如滿月」「如方座」為喻。《顯宗論》於同場景之頌即已改作「西瞿陀尼洲,其相如滿月」〔T29n1563 0850b28〕·「北洲如方座,四面各二千」〔T29n1563 0850c01〕。⇒ 此為對本頌措辭之正面批評,且顯宗之改頌與之相應;唯錄不判(不判眾賢之評當否,亦不判改頌之優劣)。

眾賢之承取擴充(非對辯):本子開篇三輪段,眾賢於頌前另加本論所無之壞成因果框架——「此百俱胝四大洲界如是安立,同壞同成。謂諸有情法爾修得諸靜慮故,下命終已生第二等靜慮地中,下器世間三災所壞,經久遠已,依下空中,由諸有情業增上力有微風起,後後轉增,蟠結成輪,其體堅密」〔T29n1562 0515a01〕。本論逕言風輪之生,眾賢先交代何以有風輪生之壞成脈絡。此屬長行詳略之擴充,非反破。誌錄之。

體例:唯於俱舍實有對辯之 loc 引·不通引。『一義二宗』並錄·不判勝負。


六、諸家異釋(光記·寶疏·頌疏)

神泰疏之闕(負命題·據實標闕):神泰《俱舍論疏》X53n0836 為殘本,現存七卷=卷一·二(界品之一二)·卷四·五·六·七(根品之二三四五)·卷十七(賢聖品之三)——世品·業品·隨眠品全闕。以「蘇迷盧」「分別世品」「世間今當說」搜其全文皆零命中;「器世間」四命中而皆在〔X53n0836 0038b23〕–〔0038c17〕一小節內,語境為大梵自稱能作能化之旁例(「我於此梵眾中尊,故是大梵。統攝一切皆得自在,故名自在。能作器世間名作者,能化有情世間名化者」〔X53n0836 0038b23〕),屬他章隨文舉例;「三十三天」二命中〔0039a09〕,語境為諸天輾轉推諉之經文旁引(「彼共推三十三天眾,三十三天復推帝釋」),亦屬他章。⇒ 泰疏殘·世品闕·本子無泰疏逐文釋可繫不以他卷之文充之

然三疏於本子範圍內明引「泰法師」(寶疏作「太法師」)之世品佚說凡四見——光記〔T41n1821 0187c22〕「若依泰法師意解,從二月十六日至六月十五日為熱際四月」(三際算法)·寶疏〔T41n1822 0618a07〕「然太法師釋,以六月十六日是雨際之初者,取八月後半第九日夜增,亦不違《婆沙》」·頌疏〔T41n1823 0881b20〕「泰法師云:從二月十六日至六月十五日為熱際四月,從六月十六日至十月十五日為雨際四月,從十月十六日至二月十五日為寒際四月。雨際第二月後半第九日,當此間八月九日,從秋分已去,夜增晝減也。寒際第四月後半第九日,當此間二月九日,從春分已去,夜減晝增也」·光記〔T41n1821 0192a16〕「泰法師云:依《立世經》,彌勒菩薩第九住劫,釋迦如來百歲時,生上覩史多天。至第十劫,八萬歲劫減時方下生」(彌勒上生下生之劫)。此四引所繫皆本子範圍內之具體論題,與 X836 現存本世品全闕不相違——三家所引當出泰疏原本之世品部分,今不傳於殘卷而藉轉引得見隻語。誌錄不判,仍以『本子無泰疏逐文釋可繫』為據實之標闕。以下三家並錄。

(一)三輪·九山

  • 科判總冒——三家已錄於目一。光記於「就明所居器中」下另分「一別明小器、二總明大千」,八目逐一標次;頌疏加「有二」「有八」之數目字;寶疏動詞作「述」。
  • 音寫之釋——光記逐山「此云」對譯齊備(見目二),為本子名相之主要來源。
  • 種·藏二字——光記〔T41n1821 0185c22〕「水能生寶,名種。水中出寶,名藏」,釋本論「其水即為眾寶種藏」之二字。
  • 有法(破數論之助解)——光記〔T41n1821 0186a03〕引因明論為喻「聲是無常,無常是法。聲是有法,有無常法故名有法」,助解本論「唯即此法於轉變時異相所依名為有法」一句。
  • 三輪廣狹之異說(寶疏獨補)——寶疏〔T41n1822 0614c20〕先斥一誤「有人謂十二餘億為大千之徑。全不相當」,繼引婆沙一百三十四所出風輪/水輪/金輪相對廣狹之數種師說,末自下己判〔0614c28〕「今詳前之二說、前說為善。既同一雨水以成水輪、於中何要分金、水別?又三輪相依,風輪既等大千,水、金因何即小」。光記未涉此細節——寶疏獨立稽核之特色於此可見。
  • 寶疏之自標未詳——〔T41n1822 0614c11〕「論『有餘部說至如篅持穀』,述異部釋。未知何部,應撿」——寶疏自陳不知此異部說出於何部,古德自身之誠實標記。

(二)四洲·八中洲·黑山

  • 八中洲音義——光記〔T41n1821 0186b11〕「遮末邏,此云猫牛。筏羅遮末羅,此云勝猫牛」,餘六洲同式。
  • 八中洲之居者(涉異說去取)——光記〔T41n1821 0186b16〕引婆沙「此八洲中人形短小」,並記異說「有說:七洲是人所住,遮末邏洲唯邏剎娑居」「有說:此所說八,即是四大洲之異名」,末以「如是說者,應如初說」定之——此為光記之取,非論文之判。
  • 八功德水之跨經異數——光記〔T41n1821 0186b01〕引《稱讚淨土經》別出一套八目「一者澄淨、二者清淨、三者甘美、四者輕耎」等,與本論八目(甘·冷·軟·輕·清淨·不臭·不損喉·不傷腹)並錄,不作優劣判
  • 香醉山之訓——光記〔T41n1821 0186b22〕見目二。

(三)地獄(八大·十六增·琰魔卒)——三疏著墨最密處

  • 㮈落迦二音之語法辨——光記〔T41n1821 0186b29〕「若言捺落迦,顯受罪處。若言那落迦,顯能受罪人」。
  • 無間命名之補說——光記〔T41n1821 0186c03〕引《正理》「有說:無隙立無間名。雖有情少而身大故」。
  • 婆沙評家之定論——光記〔T41n1821 0186c11〕「評曰:不應作是說。生餘地獄多,生無間者少。所以者何?以造作增長上品身、語、意惡業者乃生彼處」——此為婆沙自身之評決。寶疏〔T41n1822 0615c22〕引同段,並進一步指其源流〔0616a01〕「此評家義即是《正理論》中一師釋也」。
  • 地獄布局之第三說——光記〔T41n1821 0186c28〕「有說:無間地獄在於中央,餘七地獄周匝圍繞,如今聚落圍繞大城」,與本論長行所記二說(在下重累·在無間傍)並列。
  • 「增」字之訓解幾何(三疏正面交鋒之一)——光記〔T41n1821 0187a05〕明標「第三解云:有說有情從地獄出已,數更遭此苦,故說為增。此約出本地獄已數數受苦名增,故與第二不同」,析為獨立第三義;又〔0187a08〕引《正理》別出一解「或於此中受種種苦,苦具多類,故說為增」。寶疏正面駁之〔T41n1822 0616b02〕「評其論意,只是兩釋,不是三解。有人謂是三解,誤也」。頌疏於此節不介入。
  • 獄卒有無之行政層級——光記〔T41n1821 0187a21〕引《正理》三十一「無間、大熱及炎熱三,於中皆無獄卒防守。大叫、號叫及眾合三,少有獄卒,琰王使時時往來巡撿彼故」(與目五 T1562〔0517a27〕互證)。寶疏〔T41n1822 0616b14〕引同段。
  • 八寒之音義——光記〔T41n1821 0187a28〕「頞部陀,此云皰,嚴寒逼身,其身皰也」,餘七同式。寒地獄方位另引《正理》一說〔0187b12〕「此寒地獄,在繞四洲輪圍山外極冥闇所」(本論長行僅言「并居贍部洲下」)。
  • 琰魔王都與金剛座之地理(三疏正面交鋒之二)——光記引《正理論》〔T41n1821 0187b23〕「此贍部洲南邊直下深過五百踰繕那量,有琰魔王都,縱廣亦爾」,並自下調停之判「以此文證,明知金剛座近北,諸地獄等在王都下稍近南邊,不相妨也」。寶疏逕駁之〔T41n1822 0616c18〕「今詳此釋,事恐不然。無間地獄廣二萬踰繕那,於四門外有十六增,或說七地獄遶無間獄,其傍復有寒地獄處,縱少近南亦侵金剛座下」,另立己解(人趣鬼趣居處不相障礙,故地獄與金剛座亦不相妨)。
  • 薄伽梵之字界字緣——光記〔T41n1821 0187a09〕「𮓁伽,此云功德,梵此云具」。

(四)日月晝夜增減(三疏歧異最烈處)

  • 光記:詳引泰法師之算〔T41n1821 0187c22〕與真諦法師之算〔0188a15〕「又真諦法師立三際云:從此間正月十六日至五月十五日為熱際四月,從五月十六日至九月十五日為雨際四月,從九月十六日至正月十五日為寒際四月。雨際第二月後半第九日夜漸增,當此間七月九日。寒際第四月後半第九日夜漸減,當此間正月九日」,繼自出詰難〔0188a21〕「難曰:此亦非理。若言七月九日說夜漸增,為據何時」,末自立調停解〔0188b11〕「今解云:西方諸國寒、熱、雨三時節不定,還隨方俗立三際異。世親菩薩造論處立三際」。
  • 寶疏:轉引玄奘本人口義〔T41n1822 0618a05〕「唐三藏以三月十六日為雨際之初,取五月九日夜增,亦不違《婆沙》」,並列太法師之算〔0618a07〕,末以兩地寒熱不同調停,自定其算〔0618a18〕「今釋《俱舍》雨際第二月白半第九日,即是此方五月第九日為定」。
  • 頌疏:並列二家而明白宣告不判——〔T41n1823 0881b20〕引泰法師、〔0881b27〕引「光法師云:西方諸國時節不定,還隨方俗以立三際:從十一月十六日至三月十五日為熱際,從三月十六日至七月十五日為雨際,從七月十六日至十一月十五日為寒際。雨際第二月後半第九日,當此間五月九日,此與夏至稍得相當,此時日極長、夜極短,從此已後,夜則漸增。若寒際第四月後半第九日,當此間十一月九日,此與冬至稍得相當,此時晝極短、夜極長,從此已後,夜則漸減,晝則漸增」,末〔0881c18〕「此上兩釋,泰法師意,約晝夜停等後說有增減。光法師意,約晝夜極長後說有增減。各據一義,任情取捨。更有多解,不能具敘」。此語即『一義二宗並錄』之古德自證。

(五)妙高層級·三十三天·天器

  • 婆沙無評家時之判準——光記〔T41n1821 0189a20〕「《婆沙》雖無評家,此論既無異說,即以此論為正」——光記處理婆沙未評決之情形所自述之判準。
  • 餘師「各唯二萬」之算式(光記代演)——光記〔T41n1821 0189a27〕「此師意說,其四層級漸次却入侵山體成」,為本論長行所無之算式補演。
  • 善見城之守衛——光記〔T41n1821 0189b12〕引《正理論》「城有千門嚴飾壯麗,有五百青衣藥叉勇健端嚴」。
  • 妬羅綿——光記〔T41n1821 0189b10〕見目二。
  • 四苑得名之由——光記〔T41n1821 0189b15〕引婆沙一百三十三「一眾車苑,謂此苑中隨天福力種種車現」,四苑逐一釋義(本論長行僅列名不釋)。
  • 善見之訓——頌疏〔T41n1823 0882b18〕「見者稱善也」,與光記〔T41n1821 0185c14〕「莊嚴殊妙見者稱善,故名善見」逐字幾近相同——三疏於基礎音義訓釋上高度共源。
  • 逆風熏香之設問答——頌疏〔T41n1823 0882c07〕「若逆風時,猶遍五十。問:順風可爾,云何逆風熏」·〔0882c08〕「有餘師說:香無逆熏義,依不越樹界故,說逆風熏」——頌疏於此節之問答形式最貼近本論長行之問答體。
  • 依空宮殿何以能持——光記〔T41n1821 0189c28〕引《正理》「有說:空中密雲彌布如地,為彼宮殿所依」。

(六)婬相·初生·欲生樂生·下見上

  • 六天初生歲數之全展——頌以五字總攝「初如五至十」〔T29 0060b14〕,本論長行已依次列出「且六欲諸天初生,如次如五六七八九十歲人」〔T29 0060b15〕;光記〔T41n1821 0190a05〕再逐一標出六天之名「且六欲天初生如次,四天王天如五歲,三十三天如六歲,夜摩天如七歲,覩史多天如八歲,樂變化天如九歲,他化自在天如十歲」。
  • 印度之語源——光記〔T41n1821 0190a12〕「印度,此云月支。月有千名,斯其一矣」,存一說。
  • 欲生三之開合何以如此——光記〔T41n1821 0190b09〕引婆沙一百七十三「問:何故人及前四天眾合立欲生,後二天眾各別建立。答:人及前四天煩惱麁,後二天煩惱細」(本論長行未答此問)。
  • 靜慮中間何以亦號樂生——本論長行止於存疑「應思」;光記〔T41n1821 0190c03〕引《正理》為之解圍「大梵既有喜樂現行,名樂生天亦無有失」。
  • 下見上之破——光記〔T41n1821 0190c18〕引《正理》破云「諸地相望因果別故,要離下地染方得上生,故下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」(與目五 T1562〔0520a11〕直接對應)。
  • 小千之界——光記〔T41n1821 0191a01〕引《正理》「此中小千唯舉其梵世故,小光等非小千界攝」。

(七)身量·壽量·中夭

  • 身量之極(寶疏補譬)——寶疏〔T41n1822 0619b10〕引婆沙一百二十八「如曷邏呼阿素落王所得身形其量廣大,如色究竟所得身形一萬六千六踰繕那量」。
  • 無雲天何以減三(三疏正面交鋒之三)——光記〔T41n1821 0191a11〕釋作「從變異受。初修不變異受難,故減三也」,並別出二解(為成色究竟萬六千之數·法爾故然)。寶疏逕評其倒〔T41n1822 0619b14〕「此似倒也,既得難定,身壽應加。應言:下變異受以樂欲心勝,由此造業引壽等勝;不變異受引欣心劣,由此造業引壽等減」——所立方向與光記相反。
  • 八龍王之名(補「等」字所略)——光記〔T41n1821 0191b28〕引《法花經》「有八龍王,難陀龍王、跋難陀龍王、娑伽羅龍王、和修吉龍王、德叉迦龍王、阿那婆達多龍王、摩那斯龍王、優盋羅龍王」,補本論「謂難陀等諸大龍王」之「等」。
  • 佉梨·婆訶之量(光記評真諦)——寶疏〔T41n1822 0619c12〕詳訓「佉梨」「婆訶」(見目二),並記〔0619c14〕「摩揭陀國盛麻篅多受二十石」。光記則逕評真諦之算為不然〔T41n1821 0191c13〕——所評之算作「二十佉梨為一婆訶,一婆訶有二百五十六斛」。此為疏評異譯,非疏與疏互評。
  • 一生所繫之訓——光記〔T41n1821 0191c18〕「謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,無始已來為多生死之所繫縛,今唯一生所繫」。
  • 彌勒上生下生之劫(三說並陳)——光記〔T41n1821 0192a15〕引泰法師依《立世經》之說(第九住劫上生·第十劫下生),並記真諦法師同主此說;繼引其師承之異說〔0192a19〕「然和上云:釋迦牟尼當住劫第一劫出世。於此劫中已有四佛出世,即拘盧孫佛至釋迦佛。若彌勒佛,當第二住劫下生」。光記三說並陳,不作最終決斷。

三家互異彙整(誌錄不判)

論題光記寶疏頌疏互異之實
「增」字訓解之數三解〔0187a05〕兩解·評「有人謂是三解,誤也」〔0616b02〕不介入寶疏正面駁光記之解數
金剛座與琰魔王都之地理判「不相妨也」〔0187b26〕「今詳此釋,事恐不然」另立己見〔0616c18〕不涉寶疏正面駁光記之判釋
無雲天減三之由「初修不變異受難」〔0191a11〕「此似倒也」·方向相反〔0619b14〕不涉寶疏正面駁光記,且結論方向相反
晝夜三際算法引泰·諦二家而自立「今解」〔0188b11〕引太·光·唐三藏三家而以方俗調停〔0618a18〕引泰·光二家而明言「任情取捨」〔0881c20〕三家並存多說而終判各異——光記自出新解·寶疏歸諸方俗·頌疏明白不判
真諦寒地獄之量算逕評「不然」〔T41n1821 0191c14〕未涉(自出佉梨婆訶之訓)未涉光記獨評異譯
三輪相對廣狹未涉獨立稽核婆沙四說並下己判〔0614c28〕未涉寶疏獨補

三疏互異之處,逐家並錄,不判是非。頌疏之不介入疏際爭議,其本身即一種體例取向,誌錄之。


七、互讀(唯識根系掛鏈·②橋)

本子所立為毘曇之器界圖與有情之量表(處量·身量·壽量),其向唯識系之承接(逐條繫彼系逐字):

  • 器世間之所依 → 阿賴耶識之「外變為器」:《成唯識論》逐字作「器世間是諸有情所依處故……阿賴耶識因緣力故自體生時,內變為種及有根身,外變為器,即以所變為自所緣」〔T31n1585 0010a13〕;其所以稱共相種子者,逐字在「異熟識由共相種成熟力故,變似色等器世間相」〔T31n1585 0010c13〕。本子逐處以「諸有情業增上力」為器界生起之因——「謂諸有情業增上力,先於最下依止虛空有風輪生」〔0057a15〕·「如是寶等從何而生?亦諸有情業增上力」〔0057b16〕·「日月眾星依何而住?依風而住。謂諸有情業增上力共引風起」〔0059a24〕。器界不由一因、不由外造,唯繫於有情共業之增上——此一命題於唯識系轉為阿賴耶識共相種子所變之器世間。同一問題、兩代答案,為本子最穩之互讀錨。
  • 三千大千之建制 → 瑜伽師地論本地分之器世間安立:本子「千四大洲乃至梵世,如是總說為一小千,千倍小千名一中千界,千中千界總名一大千」〔0061a09〕;《瑜伽師地論》本地分逐字作「一、小千界,謂千日月乃至梵世,總攝為一。二、中千界,謂千小千。三、大千界,謂千中千。合此名為三千大千世界」〔T30n1579 0288a17〕,並於風輪金輪之起亦作「三千大千世界,從下而起,與彼世界作所依持」〔T30n1579 0286c14〕。三重乘千之制逐項相同。
  • 身量壽量之表 → 有情量表之承用:本子四洲人量(三肘半·八肘·十六肘·三十二肘)與六欲天壽(五百·千·二千·四千·八千·萬六千歲)之表;《瑜伽師地論》本地分同以人間歲數立天上晝夜而遞推——「北拘盧洲人壽量決定千歲。又人間五十歲是四大王眾天一日一夜。以此日夜,三十日夜為一月,十二月為一歲。彼諸天眾壽量五百歲」〔T30n1579 0295b08〕;其六天遞推之總句另在「如是所餘,乃至他化自在天,日夜及壽量各增前一倍」〔T30n1579 0295b13〕。推算之法與數之推算法可逐字對讀;至於四洲身量,二論皆呈逐洲增大而數值表述不同,唯錄不判。所繫之義理框架亦異。

八、譯史

  • 玄奘新譯(本底本):《俱舍論》三十卷「第二出與真諦出者同本永徽二年五月十日於大慈恩寺翻經院譯至五年七月二十七日畢沙門元瑜筆受」——《開元釋教錄》〔T55n2154 0557a22–23〕。本子之卷端題「阿毘達磨俱舍論卷第十一」〔T29 0057a02〕,品續題「分別世品第三之四」〔0057a06〕。
  • 真諦舊譯(異譯校本):《阿毘達磨俱舍釋論》二十二卷,第一譯〔T55n2154 0545c16 著錄〕。其世間品作「釋論中分別世間品第三」,全段〔T29n1559 0198a24–0225a10〕分四卷,與玄奘之五卷分法不同——本子所對之段橫跨其「之三」「之四」之界(見目四)。
  • 對辯二論之譯:《開元錄》〔T55n2154 0620c25〕「阿毘達磨順正理論八十卷大唐三藏玄奘譯阿毘達磨顯宗論四十卷大唐三藏玄奘譯右二部論與俱舍論頌同釋異並眾賢造」;《貞元錄》〔T55n2157 0954b02〕同著錄而加「尊者眾賢造」。「頌同釋異」四字即目五之體例根據——二論用俱舍本頌而別作長行。二論之品名皆作「辯緣起品」,非「世品」。
  • 譯事旁證:玄奘永徽五年春答書「其《俱舍》、《順正理》,見譯未周,今年必了」——《大慈恩寺三藏法師傳》〔T50n2053 0261c20〕。⇒ 俱舍與順正理同期並譯。
  • 諸疏之次與本子之存佚:光記 T41n1821(普光·主·本子逐句牒釋最詳)·寶疏 T41n1822(法寶·副·獨立稽核為其特色)·頌疏 T41n1823(圓暉·科判·本子段無品題,卷題作「俱舍論頌疏論本第十一」〔T41n1823 0878c16〕)·神泰疏 X53n0836(殘·世品全闕)。三家所引「泰法師」世品之說凡四見(見目六),為泰疏原編曾釋世品之轉引旁證。
  • 異譯之時代標記(三際算法所涉):光記於晝夜增減段轉引真諦法師之三際立法〔T41n1821 0188a15〕,寶疏轉引玄奘本人之口義〔T41n1822 0618a05〕——二譯師於同一曆算問題各有口義而經古德轉錄,此為譯史之旁證,唯錄事實·不作因果之判。

九、校本定位

  • 玄奘 T1558 卷十一(底本)〔0057a02–0062a07〕:卷端題 0057a02 · 品續題 0057a06 · 開卷承轉句 0057a07 · 正45–47 0057a08 · 正48–51 0057b02 · 正52·正53 0057c06 · 正54–57 0057c19 · 正58 0058a16 · 正59·正60 0058a28 · 引頌一 0058b16 · 引頌二 0058c21 · 正61–63 0059a18 · 正64·正65 0059b22 · 正66–69 0059c11 · 引頌三 0060a18 · 正70前半 0060a26 · 正70後半 0060b03 · 正71前半 0060b14 · 正71後半 0060b20 · 正72前半 0060c06 · 正72後半 0060c19 · 正73·正74 0061a05 · 正75·正76·正77前半 0061a14 · 正77後半·正78–80 0061a28 · 正81–83 0061c05 · 正84前半 0061c28。品題之錨 0040c22(世品首)。次卷(子5)之界 0062a12·首句 0062a13。
  • 本頌單行本 T29n1560:本子所對五處異體之錨 0315a11 · 0315a27 · 0315b01 · 0315b04 · 0315b08(見目三誠實記一);本子頌段之起 0314c11 · 迄 0315c02。
  • 真諦 T1559:對應段 0214a14–0219c14。要目 0214a14 · 0214a15 · 0214b07 · 0214b08 · 0214b09 · 0214b28 · 0214c17 · 0214c19 · 0215a06 · 0215a10 · 0215a13 · 0215a22 · 0215b07 · 0215b13 · 0215b24 · 0215c08 · 0216a13 · 0216a15 · 0216b19 · 0216c24 · 0217a10 · 0217a13 · 0217b08 · 0217b22 · 0217b25 · 0217b29 · 0217c07 · 0217c18 · 0217c25 · 0218a05 · 0218a12 · 0218a26 · 0218b21 · 0218c03 · 0218c23 · 0219b08 · 0219c09 · 0219c14。世品全段之界 0198a24–0225a10(分卷 0198a24 · 0204c02 · 0211c02 · 0218b09)——迄錨取正文末行:該品末句「六十四劫是遍淨天壽量」〔T29n1559 0225a09〕之末字落 0225a10,其下 0225a11 為卷九尾題、0225a12–17 為卷十開卷署名、0225a18 始「分別業品第四」品題。
  • 眾賢 T1562〔辯緣起品第三 0456a16–0527b18〕:本子對應段之起 0514c23 · 0515a01 · 0515c26 · 0517a27 · 0520a11;子5 之界標 0521b19 · 0521b23。T1563〔辯緣起品第四 0829a22–0859b21〕:0850b28 · 0850c01 · 0852a02 · 0854a18。
  • 光記 T41n1821〔0185b11–0192b10〕:0185b12 · 0185b14 · 0185b19 · 0185b23 · 0185c07 · 0185c08 · 0185c09 · 0185c11 · 0185c13 · 0185c14 · 0185c15 · 0185c16 · 0185c17 · 0185c22 · 0186a03 · 0186b01 · 0186b11 · 0186b16 · 0186b22 · 0186b29 · 0186c03 · 0186c11 · 0186c28 · 0187a05 · 0187a08 · 0187a09 · 0187a21 · 0187a28 · 0187a29 · 0187b12 · 0187b23 · 0187c22 · 0188a15 · 0188a21 · 0188b11 · 0189a20 · 0189a27 · 0189b10 · 0189b12 · 0189b15 · 0189c28 · 0190a05 · 0190a12 · 0190b09 · 0190c03 · 0190c18 · 0191a01 · 0191a11 · 0191b28 · 0191c13 · 0191c14 · 0191c18 · 0192a15 · 0192a16 · 0192a19 · 0192b11;子5 之界 0192b11。
  • 寶疏 T41n1822〔0614b24–0620a04〕:0614b24 · 0614b25 · 0614c11 · 0614c20 · 0614c28 · 0615c22 · 0616a01 · 0616b02 · 0616b14 · 0616c18 · 0618a05 · 0618a07 · 0618a18 · 0619b10 · 0619b12 · 0619b14 · 0619c12 · 0619c13 · 0619c14 · 0620a05;子5 之界 0620a05。
  • 頌疏 T41n1823〔0878c16–0885a11〕:卷題 0878c16 · 科判總冒 0878c18 · 卷首正文首句 0878c24 · 0881b20 · 0881b27 · 0881c18 · 0882b18 · 0882c07 · 0882c08;子5 之界 0885a18。本子段無品題(全論唯「破我品」與「分別根品二之一」二處有品題)。
  • 神泰疏 X53n0836(取 ed="X" 系):世品全闕;他章旁例之錨 0038b23 · 0039a09——不入本子之逐文釋(據實標闕·不補)。
  • 唯識系互讀錨:T31n1585 0010a13 · 0010c13;T30n1579 0288a17 · 0295b08 · 0295b13。
  • 經錄·僧傳:T55n2154 0545c16 · 0557a22–23 · 0620c25;T55n2157 0954b02;T50n2053 0261c20。
  • 校勘:卷十一大正原書註三十二枚(版本異讀二十一全枚舉·梵語對音註十一不入表)·無升定本案;CBETA 回改三處並錄(另 CBETA 校異一處·底本不改)。T1560 對盤異體五處另記於目三誠實記一。

The world of sentient beings being finished, the author turns into the outer receptacle with a single sentence, 「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」 tr. “Thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated.” This unit first establishes the three-tiered base of wind circle, water circle, and golden circle, next sets in place the nine mountains, the eight seas, and the four continents, then probes downward to the narakas and the eight cold hells, then follows upward along the sun and moon, the four terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and so on to the gods possessed of form; then the three-thousandfold great thousand gathers up its breadth, and at the end bodily measure, lifespan, and untimely death gather up its length — the whole “world map” of Abhidharma lies in this fascicle.


I. Doctrinal Outline and Placement

Outline systemPlacement of this passage
Xuanzang’s nine-chapter T1558The fourth part of the Chapter on the Analysis of the World, Chapter Three (chapter title〔T29 0040c22〕) — this unit (Unit 4) = the whole of Fascicle Eleven〔0057a02–0062a07〕. Fascicle-opening title〔0057a02〕 · chapter continuation title 「分別世品第三之四」 tr. “Chapter Three, the Analysis of the World, Part Four”〔0057a06〕. Twenty-three stanza blocks = twenty root-stanza blocks (Roots 45 through the first half of Root 84 · thirty-nine and a half stanzas in all) + three quoted-stanza blocks
Anchor carrying forward from what precedesThe fascicle marks its own position at the outset with a transitional sentence — 「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說。」 tr. “Thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated.”〔T29 0057a07〕 This is the strongest outline boundary in the whole chapter: the section on the world of sentient beings (Units 1 through 3) closes here, and the section on the receptacle world begins from here
Anchor closing the fascicleThe last sentence of this unit, 「此等如應皆無中夭」 tr. “these, each as is fitting, are all without untimely death”〔0062a04 段〕; the first sentence of the next fascicle (Unit 5), 「如是已約踰繕那等辯器世間身量差別。約年等辯壽量有殊,二量不同未說應說」 tr. “thus the differences of bodily measure in the receptacle world have been analyzed in terms of yojanas and the rest; the disparities of lifespan are analyzed in terms of years and the rest; the two measures being different, what has not been stated should now be stated”〔T29 0062a13〕 — with 「已約……已辯」 tr. “already in terms of . . . already analyzed” it gathers back the two matters of this unit (the measure of places · bodily measure · lifespan) and turns below to the analysis of the least measures
The chapter-level major outline of the three masters (all three commentaries mark it alike)All three commentaries judge the boundary of this unit to be the second major division at the level of the chapter on the world as a whole. Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185b12〕 「此下大文第二明器世間。就中,一明所居器、二明能居量、三明三分齊」 tr. “from here the second major part explains the receptacle world; within it, first the receptacle dwelt in, second the measure of those who can dwell, third the divisions of the least measures” · Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0614b25〕 「此下當品大文第二明器世間。於中有三:一述所居器、二述能居量、三述分齊」 tr. “from here the second major part of the present chapter explains the receptacle world; within it there are three: first, relating the receptacle dwelt in; second, relating the measure of those who can dwell; third, relating the divisions” · Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0878c18〕 「從此大文第二,明器世間:一明所居器、二明能居量、三明三分齊」 tr. “from here the second major part explains the receptacle world: first, explaining the receptacle dwelt in; second, explaining the measure of those who can dwell; third, explaining the divisions of the least measures”
Fabao alone adds the two graphs 「當品」 tr. “the present chapter”Among the three, Fabao alone prefixes 「大文第二」 tr. “the second major part” with 「當品」 tr. “the present chapter,” making plain that the level to which his numbering belongs is that of the chapter. Puguang uses the bare form throughout the chapter on the world (「此下大文第N」 tr. “from here the Nth major part,” without adding 「當品」 tr. “the present chapter,” unlike in the chapter on the faculties), and so his numbering requires that the level it belongs to be determined (within dependent origination / within the receptacle world / the chapter on the world as a whole), and may not be taken straight off as a chapter-level major outline
To which of the three parts of the receptacle world this belongsThe three parts are first the receptacle dwelt in · second the measure of those who can dwell · third the divisions of the least measures. This unit covers the first two — the receptacle dwelt in (from the wind circle to the receptacles of the gods) + the measure of those who can dwell (bodily measure · lifespan); the third part (the divisions of the least measures) belongs to Unit 5
The eight headings of the receptacle dwelt in (Puguang and Yuanhui mark them alike)Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185b14〕 continues: 「就明所居器中,一別明小器、二總明大千。就別明小器中,一明三輪、二明九山、三明八海、四明四洲、五明黑山等、六明地獄、七明日月、八明天器」 tr. “within the explaining of the receptacle dwelt in, first the small receptacles are explained separately, second the great thousand in general. Within the separate explaining of the small receptacles: first the three circles, second the nine mountains, third the eight seas, fourth the four continents, fifth the black mountains and the rest, sixth the hells, seventh the sun and moon, eighth the receptacles of the gods”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0878c18〕 has these same eight headings and adds beneath 「小器」 tr. “small receptacles” the numeral phrases 「有二」 tr. “there are two” and 「有八」 tr. “there are eight.” The outline structures of the three masters are entirely the same and their verbs differ slightly (Puguang and Yuanhui write 「明」 tr. “explain,” Fabao 「述」 tr. “relate”)
The three commentaries divide their fascicles exactly as Xuanzang doesUnit 1, Fascicle Eight〔0040c22〕 / Puguang〔0148a05〕 / Fabao〔0584a05〕 / Yuanhui〔0863a17〕; Unit 2, Fascicle Nine〔0045c09〕 / 〔0160a05〕 / 〔0593c05〕 / 〔0868b16〕; Unit 3, Fascicle Ten〔0051c06〕 / 〔0173a26〕 / 〔0604c27〕 / 〔0873b24〕; Unit 4, Fascicle Eleven〔0057a06〕 / Puguang〔0185b11〕 / Fabao〔0614b24〕 / Yuanhui〔0878c24〕; Unit 5, Fascicle Twelve〔0062a12〕 / 〔0192b11〕 / 〔0620a05〕 / 〔0885a18〕. ⇒ The three masters divide their fascicles independently and yet the boundaries are entirely the same, corresponding one by one to Xuanzang’s division — concrete evidence of the threefold coincidence in case one of the carving (the fascicle-boundary type)

Stanza and prose-commentary practice: root stanzas (the stanza boundaries fixed by the separately circulated T1560 · ninety-nine stanzas in the chapter on the world · every stanza of four lines) + the prose commentary’s own explanation. Of the twenty root-stanza blocks in this unit, eleven blocks cite a whole stanza together (Roots 45–47 · Roots 48–51 · Root 52 · Root 53 · Roots 54–57 · Root 58 · Root 59 · Root 60 · Roots 61–63 · Root 64 · Root 65 · Roots 66–69 · Root 73 · Root 74 · Roots 81–83), seven blocks cite and explain exactly half a stanza (first half of Root 70〔0060a26〕 · second half of Root 70〔0060b03〕 · first half of Root 71〔0060b14〕 · second half of Root 71〔0060b20〕 · first half of Root 72〔0060c06〕 · second half of Root 72〔0060c19〕 · first half of Root 84〔0061c28〕), and two blocks cite across half-stanza boundaries (Root 75 · Root 76 · first half of Root 77〔0061a14〕 · second half of Root 77 · Roots 78–80〔0061a28〕). ⇒ Eleven + seven + two = twenty. Three quoted-stanza blocks (not root stanzas · the adducing in the preceding text given word for word):

  • 〔T29 0058b16〕 「此八㮈落迦,我說甚難越」 tr. “These eight narakas, I say, are exceedingly hard to pass beyond” — the adducing that precedes it is 「八㮈落迦增各十六,故薄伽梵說此頌言」 tr. “the Increases of the eight narakas are sixteen each, and so the Bhagavat spoke this stanza, saying”〔0058b14〕.
  • 〔T29 0058c21〕 「心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒」 tr. “Whose heart harbors always rage and venom, who delights to heap up every kind of evil action, who sees the suffering of others and rejoices at it — he becomes at death a warder of Yama” — the adducing that precedes it is 「若爾,云何通彼大德法善現說?如彼頌言」 tr. “if so, how is what the Venerable Dharmasubhūti said to be reconciled? As that stanza says”〔0058c19〕.
  • 〔T29 0060a18〕 「花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾」 tr. “The fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and the fragrance of roots and stems and the rest is likewise” — the adducing that precedes it is 「若爾,何故薄伽梵言」 tr. “if so, why then did the Bhagavat say”〔0060a16〕. This block is in four lines of seven graphs, unlike the five-graph lines of the other blocks in this unit.

The form of stanza-order marking: a whole stanza is marked Root N / Roots N–M, exactly half is marked first half of Root N / second half of Root N, less than half is marked Root N 〔M句〕, and a quoted stanza that is not a root stanza is marked quoted stanza · not a root stanza.


II. Terminology (Technical Terms)

Chinese (Xuanzang)Paramārtha’s divergent name (loc)The treatise’s defining sentence / the ancient masters’ gloss of sound and sense
the receptacle worldthe receptacle world-sphere〔T29n1559 0214a14〕「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」 tr. “thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated”〔0057a07〕. Searching Paramārtha’s whole chapter on the world with Xuanzang’s term gives zero hits for 「器世間」 tr. “receptacle world” — Paramārtha writes throughout 「器世界」 tr. “receptacle world-sphere”
the world of sentient beingsthe world-sphere of living beings〔0214a14〕the name carried forward from the preceding chapter
wind circle · water circle · golden circlewind circle (the same)〔0214a15〕「先於最下依止虛空有風輪生,廣無數、厚十六億踰繕那」 tr. “lowest of all and resting upon space a wind circle arises, of breadth beyond numbering and sixteen hundred thousand yojanas thick”〔0057a15〕 · 「如是水輪於未凝結位,深十一億二萬踰繕那」 tr. “this water circle, at the stage when it has not yet congealed, is eleven hundred thousand and twenty thousand yojanas deep”〔0057a20〕 · 「搏擊此水上結成金」 tr. “beating upon this water it congeals the surface into gold”〔0057a25〕
lakṣaluosha〔0214a15〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185b19〕 「洛叉,此云億」 tr.lakṣa means here a hundred thousand”
yojanayouxunPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185b23〕 「踰繕那,如下別釋。舊云由旬,訛也」 tr. “yojana, explained separately below. The old rendering youxun is a corruption”
a great MahānagnaPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185b23〕 「大諾健那,是人中神名,此云露形」 tr. “a great Mahānagna is the name of a god among men; it means here the Naked One”
Sumeru (Meru)Xumilou (Milou)〔0214b07〕〔0216b19〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c07〕 「蘇迷盧,此云妙高。舊云須彌,訛也」 tr. “Sumeru means here the Sublime and Lofty. The old rendering Xumi is a corruption”
YugandharaYouqiantuoluo〔0214b07〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c08〕 「踰健達羅,此云持雙。此山頂上有二道猶如車跡,山持二跡故名持雙」 tr. “Yugandhara means here Upholding the Pair. Upon the summit of this mountain there are two tracks like the ruts of a chariot, and because the mountain upholds the two tracks it is named Upholding the Pair”
ĪṣādharaYishatuoluo〔0214b07〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c09〕 「伊沙馱羅山,此云持軸。山峰上聳猶如車軸,此山能持故名持軸」 tr. “Mount Īṣādhara means here Upholding the Axle. The peak of the mountain towers up like the axle of a chariot, and because this mountain can uphold it, it is named Upholding the Axle”
KhadirakaQutuoluoke〔0214b07〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c11〕 「朅地洛迦,印度樹名,此方南邊亦有此樹稱為檐木,山上寶樹其形似彼,從樹為名」 tr. “Khadiraka is the name of an Indian tree; in the southern parts of this land too there is this tree, called yanmu; the jewel trees upon the mountain are like it in form, and the name is taken from the tree” · 〔0185c13〕 「舊云佉陀羅木,訛也」 tr. “the old rendering qutuoluo wood is a corruption”
SudarśanaXiutengpona〔0214b08〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c13〕 「蘇達梨舍那,此云善見。莊嚴殊妙見者稱善,故名善見」 tr. “Sudarśana means here Fair to Behold. Its adornment is surpassingly excellent and those who see it call it fair, and so it is named Fair to Behold”
AśvakarṇaAshugena〔0214b08〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c15〕 「頞濕縛羯拏,此云馬耳,山峯似馬耳也」 tr. “Aśvakarṇa means here Horse’s Ear, the peak of the mountain being like a horse’s ear”
VinatakaPinatuoke〔0214b08〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c16〕 「毘那怛迦,此云象鼻,印度神名。山形似彼象鼻,故以名焉」 tr. “Vinataka means here Elephant’s Trunk, the name of an Indian god. The form of the mountain is like that elephant’s trunk, and it is named from it”
NimindharaNimintuoluo〔0214b09〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c17〕 「尼民達羅,此是魚名。其魚㭰尖,山峰似彼魚㭰,故以名焉」 tr. “Nimindhara is the name of a fish. The snout of that fish is pointed and the peak of the mountain is like that fish’s snout, and it is named from it”
the Iron Circle Mountain「此外復有鐵輪圍山,周匝如輪圍一世界」 tr. “outside this there is further the Iron Circle Mountain, which encircles one world-sphere round about as the rim encircles a wheel”〔0057b12〕
water possessed of the eight qualitieswater possessed of the eight qualities (the same)〔0214c19〕「一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹」 tr. “first sweet, second cool, third soft, fourth light, fifth pure, sixth free of foul odor, seventh not hurting the throat when drunk, eighth not harming the belly once drunk”〔0057c11〕
seed · storePuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c22〕 「水能生寶,名種。水中出寶,名藏」 tr. “that the water can produce jewels is what seed means; that jewels come out of the water is what store means”
the possessor of dharmasPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186a03〕 explains it by the science of reasons: 「聲是無常,無常是法。聲是有法,有無常法故名有法」 tr. “sound is impermanent; impermanence is a dharma. Sound is a possessor of dharmas, and because it has the dharma of impermanence it is called a possessor of dharmas”
Sāṃkhya, by sense-renderingSāṃkhya, by transcription〔0214b28〕「數論云何執轉變義?謂執有法自性常存」 tr. “how do the Sāṃkhya maintain the sense of transmutation? They maintain that the possessor of dharmas exists permanently in its own nature”〔0057b21〕
Jambudvīpathe Yanfu Continent〔0215a06〕「南贍部洲北廣南陿,三邊量等,其相如車」 tr. “Jambudvīpa in the south is broad on the north and narrow on the south, its three sides equal in measure, its form like a chariot”〔0057c28〕
vajra-like concentrationvajra samādhi〔0215a10〕「一切菩薩將登正覺皆坐此座上起金剛喻定」 tr. “all bodhisattvas, when about to ascend to perfect awakening, sit upon this seat and arouse the vajra-like concentration”〔0058a02〕
Cāmara · VaracāmaraPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b11〕 「遮末邏,此云猫牛。筏羅遮末羅,此云勝猫牛」 tr. “Cāmara means here Cat-Ox. Varacāmara means here Excellent Cat-Ox”
the Mountain of Intoxicating FragrancePuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b22〕 「香醉山,謂此山中有諸香氣,嗅令人醉,故名香醉」 tr. “the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance means that within this mountain there are fragrances whose smell intoxicates a man, and so it is named Intoxicating Fragrance”
the Lake Without Heat and TormentAnavatapta〔0215b13〕「雪北香南有大池水,名無熱惱」 tr. “north of the Snow Mountain and south of the Fragrance Mountain there is a great lake of water named Without Heat and Torment”〔0058a20〕
Gaṅgā · Sindhu · Sītā · VakṣuHengqie · Xintou · Situo · Bosou〔0215b13〕「出四大河:一殑伽河、二信度河、三徙多河、四縛芻河」 tr. “from it flow four great rivers: first the river Gaṅgā, second the river Sindhu, third the river Sītā, fourth the river Vakṣu”〔0058a20〕
naraka (in its several transcriptions)hell〔0215c08〕Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b29〕 「若言捺落迦,顯受罪處。若言那落迦,顯能受罪人」 tr. “if it is written with the one transcription, it displays the place where punishment is undergone; if with the other, it displays the person who undergoes punishment”
Avīci (the Unremitting)Apizhi〔0215b24〕「以於其中受苦無間,非如餘七大㮈落迦受苦非恒,故名無間」 tr. “because suffering is undergone therein without remission, unlike the remaining seven great narakas where the undergoing of suffering is not constant, it is named the Unremitting”〔0058b05〕
Increase (the sixteen Increases)Park (the sixteen Parks)〔0215c08〕「此是增上被刑害所,故說名增,本地獄中適被害已重遭害故」 tr. “this is a place of being punished over and above, and hence it is called an Increase, because in the hell proper one has just been injured and then suffers injury again”〔0058c15〕
the warders of Yama · rākṣasasthe warders of Yanmo〔0216a15〕「琰魔王使諸邏剎娑擲諸有情置地獄者名琰魔卒」 tr. “those rākṣasas whom King Yama sends to cast sentient beings into the hells are named the warders of Yama”〔0058c23〕
Arbuda and the rest of the eight cold hellsPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187a28〕 「頞部陀,此云皰,嚴寒逼身,其身皰也」 tr. “Arbuda means here Blister; bitter cold oppresses the body and the body blisters” · 〔0187a29〕 「尼剌部陀,此云皰裂,嚴寒逼身,身皰裂也」 tr. “Nirarbuda means here Burst Blister; bitter cold oppresses the body and the blisters of the body burst”
lava「晝夜增時一晝夜增幾?增一臘縛」 tr. “when day and night lengthen, by how much does one day and night increase? It increases by one lava”〔0059b11〕
Firm Hand · Garland Holder · Ever Proud「有藥叉神名為堅手住初層級,有名持鬘住第二級,有名恒憍住第三級」 tr. “there is a yakṣa god named Firm Hand who dwells on the first terrace, one named Garland Holder who dwells on the second, one named Ever Proud who dwells on the third”〔0059c02〕
Fair to Behold (the city)「於山頂中有宮名善見」 tr. “at the center of the summit there is a palace named Fair to Behold”〔0059c23〕; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0882b18〕 「見者稱善也」 tr. “those who see it call it fair”
tūla flossPuguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189b10〕 「妬羅是樹名,綿從樹菓中出,名妬羅綿,如言柳絮」 tr.tūla is the name of a tree; the floss comes out of the fruit of the tree and is named tūla floss, as one says willow catkins”
the Round-Growth Treethe Pari (Park)〔0217b08〕「城外東北有圓生樹,是三十三天受欲樂勝所」 tr. “northeast of the city there is a Round-Growth Tree, the most excellent place where the Heaven of the Thirty-Three enjoy the pleasures of desire”〔0060a05〕
the Hall of Good Dharmathe Hall of Good (Dharma)〔0217b25〕「外西南角有善法堂,三十三天時集於彼詳論如法不如法事」 tr. “at the southwest corner outside is the Hall of Good Dharma, where the Heaven of the Thirty-Three assemble from time to time and discuss in detail what is according to the Dharma and what is not”〔0060a22〕
the Mahīśāsakas, by sense-renderingthe Mahīśāsakas, by transcription〔0217b25〕「化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十」 tr. “a sūtra of the Mahīśāsakas says of this fragrance that with the wind it perfumes a hundred yojanas, and when there is no wind extends over fifty only”〔0060a21〕
birth amid desires · birth amid pleasurebirth amid desires · birth amid pleasure (the same)〔0217c25〕〔0218a05〕「於欲界中分別欲生差別三種」 tr. “within the desire realm the three distinctions of birth amid desires are analyzed”〔0060b28〕 · 「三靜慮中於九處生受三種樂……故名樂生」 tr. “within the three meditative absorptions, in nine places, one is born and receives three kinds of pleasure . . . and it is therefore named birth amid pleasure”〔0060b29〕
the Akaniṣṭha Heaven · the Heaven of the Limit of Resistance「此處最高名色究竟。有餘師說:彼名礙究竟天」 tr. “this place is the highest and is named the Akaniṣṭha, the limit of form. Some other masters say: it is named the Heaven of the Limit of Resistance”〔0060c15〕
krośaFabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0619b12〕: 「俱盧舍」 tr.krośa” means here a shout
khārī · vāhaFabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0619c12〕: 「佉梨」 tr.khārī” is the name of a vessel holding one hu, like the names sheng and hu used for measuring in this land · 〔0619c13〕 「婆訶」 tr.vāha” means here a chuan, holding twenty hu
untimely deathuntimely death (the same)〔0219c09〕「諸處壽量皆有中夭,唯北俱盧定壽千歲」 tr. “in every place the lifespan admits of untimely death, save only Uttarakuru in the north, whose fixed lifespan is a thousand years”〔0061c29〕

The Sanskrit in roman letters for a technical term is attached only where an ancient master’s transmitted transcription is attested. The ancient masters’ glosses of sound and sense in this unit are all renderings of the 「此云」 tr. “means here” type (chiefly Puguang’s) and are not reconstructions of sound made later, and so this table appends no IAST and supplies nothing by conjecture from a later collated text. For the full table of Paramārtha’s divergent names see section IV.


III. Textual Collation (Taishō Original Notes · Complete Enumeration for Fascicle Eleven)

Within the range of this unit〔0057a02–0062a07〕 the Taishō’s original notes number thirty-two in all = twenty-one variant readings + eleven notes of Sanskrit transcription〔0057001 Lakṣa·0057006 Yojana·0058003 Rākṣasa·0058005 Jambūdvīpa·0058009 Utsada·0058010 Yama·0061001 Krośa·0061003 Kumuda·0061004 Padma·0062001 Eka-jātipratibaddha·0062002 Carama-bhavika〕. Following the practice of this collection (fixed already at Unit 1 of the Chapter on the Elements), a note of Sanskrit transcription is not a variant reading and is not entered in the table. All twenty-one variant readings are listed (this fascicle has no Taishō asterisked duplicate). The base text = the Taishō lemma; every place of CBETA restoration is recorded alongside — this fascicle has three restorations, and besides them one CBETA collation of another witness (the base text unchanged), both of which are given in the subsection after the table. Within the context sentence the graph collated is marked with 【 】.

Note no.AnchorBase text 【大】 / variantsContext (verbatim)Whether it touches the sense
00570020057b09半/八【宮】the stanza 「妙高出亦然,餘八【半】半下,廣皆等高量」 tr. “the Sublime and Lofty stands out likewise, the remaining eight are lower by half and half, and the breadth of each equals its height”Touches the sense (the reckoning of the decrease: each of the eight mountains stands out of the water at half the one before it; read as 「八」 tr. “eight,” the statement of the reckoning in this line is altered)
00570030057b15琉璃/瑠璃【明】「金、銀、吠【琉璃】、頗胝迦寶」 tr. “gold, silver, vaiḍūrya, and sphaṭika jewel”Does not touch the sense (two spellings of one word)
00570040057b19擊/繫【明】「由具種種威德猛風鑽【擊】變生眾寶類等」 tr. “through the drilling and beating of manifold winds of majestic violence the several kinds of jewel are produced by transformation”Touches the sense (drilling and beating against drilling and binding — a striking that produces change against a binding that gathers together; the mechanism by which the violent wind operates can be distinguished)
00570050057c09二/一【元】【明】the stanza 「三洛叉二萬,【二】千踰繕那」 tr. “three lakṣa twenty thousand and two thousand yojanas”Touches the sense (the numerical value itself of the breadth of the outer sea)
00580010058a10筏/茂【宮】「一遮末羅洲、二【筏】羅遮末羅洲」 tr. “first the continent of Cāmara, second the continent of Varacāmara”Does not touch the sense (graphs close in shape within the transcription of an intermediate continent’s proper name)
00580020058a11二/一【宮】「勝身洲邊【二】中洲者,一提訶洲、二毘提訶洲」 tr. “the two intermediate continents at the flank of the continent of Videha are, first the continent of Deha, second the continent of Videha”Touches the sense (read as 「一」 tr. “one,” it conflicts with the general reckoning 「四洲邊各二」 tr. “two at the flank of each of the four continents”; yet the text below names the two directly)
00580040058a18三/五【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「此贍部洲從中向北,三處各有【三】重黑山」 tr. “in this Jambudvīpa, going north from the middle, there are three places each of which has three ranges of black mountains”Touches the sense (three places with three ranges each = nine, answering exactly to the stanza’s 「此北九黑山」 tr. “nine black mountains to the north of this”; read as 「五」 tr. “five,” it does not agree with the number nine)
00580060058c03肢/支【宋】【宮】(a CBETA restoration: following 【麗】【宋】【宮】 it takes 「支」 tr. “the branch graph” · the base-text stream reads 「支」 tr. “the branch graph”)「有情遊彼風吹葉墜,斬刺【支】體骨肉零落」 tr. “when a sentient being walks there and the wind blows and the leaves fall, his limbs and body are hacked and pierced until bone and flesh are strewn about”Does not touch the sense (the branch graph and the limb graph are an older and a later form of one word; it is of the same type as 「支/肢」 tr. “branch against limb” at〔0056b23〕 in Fascicle Ten, and yet the Taishō there takes the opposite graph — there the Taishō prints 「支」 tr. “branch” and here the Taishō prints 「肢」 tr. “limb,” from which it may be seen that the Taishō is not itself uniform)
00580070058c04摣/䶥【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「有烏駁狗【摣】掣食之」 tr. “there are piebald crows and dogs that seize and tear at him and eat him”Does not touch the sense (variant graphs for the same act of seizing and tearing)
00580080058c08杖/仗【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「而鐵【杖】同故一增攝」 tr. “because they are alike of iron they are gathered as one Increase”Does not touch the sense (an older and a later form in common use · it does not alter the reasoning that the three are gathered as one because they are of one kind)
00590010059b25四/由【宮】the stanza 「如次居【四】級,亦住餘七山」 tr. “they dwell in order upon the four terraces, and dwell also upon the remaining seven mountains”Touches the sense (read with the variant the phrase makes no words, and the error is suspected to come from closeness of shape)
00590020059c17妙池/妙地【宋】【元】【明】【宮】the stanza 「【妙池】居四方,相去各二十」 tr. “the excellent pools lie on the four sides, each twenty away”Touches the sense (four excellent pools against four excellent places — a concrete body of water against a general place)
00590030059c18圓生/園生【元】【明】【宮】the stanza 「東北【圓生】樹,西南善法堂」 tr. “to the northeast the Round-Growth Tree, to the southwest the Hall of Good Dharma”Touches the sense (the point from which the name is taken differs · the referent is one and the same tree)
00600010060a04池/地【明】【宮】「四苑四邊有四妙【池】,中間各去苑二十踰繕那」 tr. “on the four sides of the four parks there are four excellent pools, each twenty yojanas away from its park in between”Touches the sense (the same word occurring twice and meeting a variant both times, as at 0059002 · see honest record two)
00600020060a05捔/角【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「諸天於彼【捔】勝歡娛」 tr. “the gods vie with one another there and take their pleasure”Does not touch the sense (variant forms of one and the same graph)
00600030060a07十/〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「盤根深廣五【十】踰繕那」 tr. “the coiling roots are fifty yojanas deep and broad”Touches the sense (the dropping of a whole graph produces a tenfold difference · fifty against five · see honest record three)
00600040060b03抱/𭷝【宋】the stanza 「六受欲交【抱】,執手笑視婬」 tr. “the six undergo desire by intercourse and embracing, by holding hands, laughing, and looking”Does not touch the sense (a popular variant form of the graph for embracing)
00600050060c01生/〔-〕【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「謂彼安住離【生】喜樂、定生喜樂,離喜樂故」 tr. “that is, they abide in the joy and pleasure born of seclusion, in the joy and pleasure born of absorption, and in the separation from joy”Touches the sense (the names of the pleasures of the three meditative absorptions: joy and pleasure born of seclusion〔初〕 · joy and pleasure born of absorption〔二〕 · pleasure separated from joy〔三〕; if the graph 「生」 tr. “born” drops out, the first two names become confused with the third · see honest record four)
00610020061a28年/歲【明】the stanza 「北洲定千【年】,西東半半減」 tr. “the northern continent has a fixed thousand years, the western and eastern halve it each in turn”Does not touch the sense (the two graphs for year are used interchangeably in the context of lifespan)
00610050061b29以/已【宋】【元】【明】【宮】「少光【以】上大全為劫,自下諸天大半為劫」 tr. “from the Parīttābha upward the whole of a great aeon is the aeon, and for the gods below it the half of a great aeon is the aeon”Does not touch the sense (the two graphs are interchangeable)
00610060061c12次/次第【宋】【元】【明】「壽量如【次】亦同彼天」 tr. “their lifespans in order are likewise the same as those of the gods”Does not touch the sense (a difference of brevity between a single graph and a compound)

Honest record one (divergences between the stanza text and the separately circulated T1560 · five places): comparing the root stanzas of this unit graph by graph with the Root Stanzas of the Abhidharmakośa, T29n1560, five divergences are found — four of them variant or alternative graphs of the same sense; only the one place 「妙池/妙地」 tr. “excellent pools against excellent places” touches the sense (a concrete body of water against a general place), is not a variant graph, and is recorded without adjudication

This unit (T1558)T1560 (loc)Where
『上七㮈落迦』 tr. “the seven narakas above”『上七捺落迦』 tr. “the same with the other transcription of naraka”〔T29n1560 0315a11〕Root 59
『雜飾地柔軟』 tr. “adorned with jewels of every kind, the ground soft”『雜飾地柔濡』 tr. “the same with a variant graph for soft”〔0315a27〕Root 67
『妙池居四方』 tr. “the excellent pools lie on the four sides”『妙地居四方』 tr. “the excellent places lie on the four sides”〔0315b01〕 (agreeing with the 【宋】【元】【明】【宮】 reading recorded in collation note 0059002)Root 68
『六受欲交抱,執手笑視婬』 tr. “the six undergo desire by intercourse and embracing, by holding hands, laughing, and looking”『六受欲交抱,執手笑視淫』 tr. “the same with a variant graph for sexual union”〔0315b04〕second half of Root 70
『下無昇見上』 tr. “those below cannot ascend or see above”『下無升見上』 tr. “the same with a variant graph for ascending”〔0315b08〕second half of Root 72

⇒ Of the five places, in the item 「妙地」 tr. “excellent places” the reading of T1560 agrees with the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace editions recorded in the Taishō collation notes and differs from the Taishō base text of T1558 — this is not an isolated instance of a variant spelling but a systematic divergence between the base text on one side and the separately circulated stanza text together with the four canons on the other. Only the textual fact is recorded; it is not raised into a choice among collated texts.

Honest record two (one word occurring twice and meeting a variant both times): the word 「妙池」 tr. “excellent pools” occurs once in the stanza of this unit〔0059c17〕 and once in the prose commentary〔0060a04〕, each of the two places has its own collation note, and the direction of the variant is the same in both (both reading 「地」 tr. “places”). This is the only instance among the twenty-one variants of this unit in which one word is affected twice. If both places took 「地」 tr. “places,” then the whole passage on 「四妙池」 tr. “the four excellent pools” outside the city Fair to Behold would have to be read as 「四妙地」 tr. “the four excellent places,” which would affect the spatial account of that passage. Recorded without adjudication.

Honest record three (the only one that alters an order of magnitude): in〔0060a07〕 「五【十】踰繕那」 tr. “fifty yojanas,” the graph 「十」 tr. “ten” is absent from all four of the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace editions. Following the four editions, the measure of the coiling roots of the Round-Growth Tree drops from fifty yojanas to five, a tenfold difference. Among the twenty-one items this is the only variant that directly alters an order of magnitude. Recorded without adjudication.

Honest record four (the passage to which the collation note at〔0060c01〕 attaches): the graph 「生」 tr. “born” to which that note attaches in fact falls in the passage on birth amid pleasure, at 「謂彼安住離【生】喜樂、定生喜樂」 tr. “that is, they abide in the joy and pleasure born of seclusion and in the joy and pleasure born of absorption”〔0060c01〕, and has nothing to do with the earlier 「欲生差別三種」 tr. “the three distinctions of birth amid desires”〔0060b29〕. ⇒ What it really touches is the confusion of the names of the pleasures of the three meditative absorptions (joy and pleasure born of seclusion against pleasure separated from joy), not whether the term 「欲生」 tr. “birth amid desires” holds.

Closing remark on the collation: not one of the twenty-one items constitutes a case for emending the established text (none is supported both by an ancient master’s citation and by doctrinal reasoning). The variants are recorded together for reference, recorded without adjudication.

CBETA Restorations (not Taishō original collation notes · where the base-text stream follows the CB reading, recorded alongside)

The base-text stream of this collection takes the CBETA in-line reading; wherever CBETA sets a graph different from the Taishō lemma, each place is recorded alongside (following the practice fixed at Unit 1 of the Chapter on the Elements). Fascicle Eleven has three restorations:

AnchorCB reading / Taishō lemmaContext (verbatim · 【】 = what the base-text stream reads)Judgment
0058c03『支』【CB】【麗-CB】【宋】【宮】, 『肢』【大】「有情遊彼風吹葉墜,斬刺【支】體骨肉零落」 tr. “when a sentient being walks there and the wind blows and the leaves fall, his limbs and body are hacked and pierced until bone and flesh are strewn about” (= the same place as〔0058006〕 in the collation table)The Taishō’s original printing has a collation note of its own here, and so it is listed in the table above as well; CBETA’s restoration agrees with 【麗】【宋】【宮】
0058c12『然』【CB】【磧-CB】, 『燃』【大】, 『燃』【麗-CB】「麻等於中上下迴轉舉體糜爛,有情亦【然】」 tr. “the sesame and the rest turn over and over within it, up and down, and their whole bodies are pulped away; sentient beings are likewise”〔起錨 0058c11〕CBETA follows 【磧】 and reads 「然」 tr. “likewise”; the phrase 「亦然」 tr. “likewise so” here means and so it is again, not to burn; the text above has its own 「猛火下燃」 tr. “fierce fire burns beneath” with 「燃」 tr. “burn,” and the division of labor between the two graphs is plain
0059a11『𣲖』【CB】【麗-CB】【磧-CB】, 『泒』【大】「諸地獄器安布如是,本處在下、支【𣲖】不定」 tr. “the disposition of the receptacles of the hells is thus: the base place is below, while the branches and offshoots are not fixed”CBETA follows 【麗】【磧】 and reads 「𣲖」 tr. “offshoot” (the old form of the graph for a branch stream); 「支𣲖」 tr. “branches and offshoots” means branch lineages, and 「泒」 tr. “the other graph” is an error of close shape

There is besides one CBETA collation of another witness where the base text is not changed (the Taishō and CB read alike, and only the divergence of another witness is noted), recorded for reference:〔0058c13〕 「槍【大】【磧-CB】,搶【麗-CB】」 tr. “the spear graph in 【大】【磧-CB】, the seize graph in 【麗-CB】” (「手執刀槍禦捍令迴」 tr. “holding knives and spears in their hands, they bar them and drive them back”).


IV. Comparison with Paramārtha’s Earlier Translation (Expository Treatise on the Treasury of Abhidharma · T1559 ★)

Collation base: Xuanzang’s Fascicle Eleven〔T29n1558 0057a02–0062a07〕 ↔ Paramārtha〔T29n1559 0214a14–0219c14〕.

The two translations divide their fascicles differently, and the boundary of the passage corresponding to this unit must be fixed by the structure of the scene: Paramārtha divides the chapter on the world into four fascicles (part one〔0198a24〕 · part two〔0204c02〕 · part three〔0211c02〕 · part four〔0218b09〕), while Xuanzang divides it into five. The passage of Paramārtha corresponding to this unit straddles the boundary between his 「之三」 tr. “part three” and 「之四」 tr. “part four,” and so a fascicle-title boundary may not be made to serve for it. The evidence for the two boundaries, word for word —

  • Opening boundary: Paramārtha 「說眾生世界已,器世界今當說」 tr. “the world-sphere of living beings having been stated, the receptacle world-sphere is now to be stated”〔T29n1559 0214a14〕, and Xuanzang 「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」 tr. “thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated”〔0057a07〕 — the structures of the scene agree entirely (both being the transitional sentence at which the section on the world of sentient beings closes and the section on the receptacle world begins).
  • Closing boundary: Paramārtha’s explanation section ends at 「除鳩婁中夭」 tr. “save for untimely death in Kuru”〔0219c09〕, after which the same section turns straight to 「此等由由旬量說處所及身量已」 tr. “these having been stated in terms of youxun as to place and as to bodily measure”〔0219c14〕 — this transitional wording is entirely the same in function as the first sentence of Xuanzang’s Unit 5, 「如是已約踰繕那等辯器世間身量差別」 tr. “thus the differences of bodily measure in the receptacle world have been analyzed in terms of yojanas and the rest”〔0062a13〕. Paramārtha does not divide a fascicle here, while Xuanzang begins a new fascicle with this transitional wording. ⇒ The closing boundary of this unit in Paramārtha’s version falls before〔0219c14〕.

Searching Paramārtha’s version with Xuanzang’s words is forbidden (direct evidence from this unit): searching the whole passage of Paramārtha’s chapter on the world〔0198a24–0225a10〕 for 「器世間」 tr. “receptacle world” gives zero hits — Paramārtha writes 「器世界」 tr. “receptacle world-sphere” throughout. Searching for 「蘇迷盧」 tr. “Sumeru” and 「踰繕那」 tr. “yojana” likewise gives zero hits (Paramārtha writes 「須彌婁」 tr. “Xumilou” and 「由旬」 tr.youxun”). Searching by Xuanzang’s words, the opening boundary of this unit would never be found. A zero result does not constitute evidence that that version lacks this passage; comparison across versions is made by the structure of the scene without exception.

Basic difference of practice: Xuanzang’s 「頌曰/論曰」 tr. “the stanza says / the treatise says” brings out the whole stanza first and then explains it in prose; Paramārtha’s 「偈曰/釋曰」 tr. “the verse says / the explanation says” embeds the explanation clause by clause among the lines of verse, and one stanza is often broken into two to four places and quoted in parts (as with the verse on the measure of the summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, whose two occurrences of 「有餘師說」 tr. “some other masters say” are embedded in two separate places within the explanation, unlike Xuanzang’s clean division into stanza and treatise).

Principal items of the collation (item by item · twenty items that bear doctrinal weight):

  1. The outline-boundary sentence at the opening of the fascicle — Xuanzang: 「如是已說有情世間。器世間今當說」 tr. “thus has the world of sentient beings been stated; the receptacle world is now to be stated”〔0057a07〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「說眾生世界已,器世界今當說」 tr. “the world-sphere of living beings having been stated, the receptacle world-sphere is now to be stated”〔T29n1559 0214a14〕. Difference of rendering: the world of sentient beings / the world-sphere of living beings · the receptacle world / the receptacle world-sphere.
  2. The thickness of the wind circle — Xuanzang’s stanza: 「安立器世間,風輪最居下,其量廣無數,厚十六洛叉」 tr. “to establish the receptacle world, the wind circle is lowest of all, its measure of breadth beyond numbering and its thickness sixteen lakṣa”〔0057a08〕 ‖ Paramārtha’s verse: 「此中器世界,說於下依住,深十六洛沙,風輪廣無數」 tr. “herein the receptacle world-sphere is said to rest below, sixteen luosha deep, the wind circle of breadth beyond numbering”〔0214a14〕. Difference of rendering: lakṣa / luosha; difference of grouping: Xuanzang marks the general heading 「風輪最居下」 tr. “the wind circle is lowest of all” first, while Paramārtha goes straight into its resting and its thickness.
  3. The transcriptions of the nine mountains — Xuanzang: 「蘇迷盧處中,次踰健達羅,伊沙馱羅山,朅地洛迦山」 tr. “Sumeru is at the center, next Yugandhara, Mount Īṣādhara, Mount Khadiraka”〔0057b02〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「須彌婁山王,由乾陀羅山、伊沙陀羅山、佉特羅柯山、修騰婆那山、阿輸割那山、毘那多柯山、尼旻陀羅山」 tr. “Mount King Xumilou, Mount Youqiantuoluo, Mount Yishatuoluo, Mount Qutuoluoke, Mount Xiutengpona, Mount Ashugena, Mount Pinatuoke, Mount Nimintuoluo”〔0214b07〕. The nine mountains are transcribed differently one by one, a systematic parting of the ways in rendering (see the comparison table below).
  4. The refutation of the Sāṃkhya sense of transmutation — Xuanzang: 「數論云何執轉變義?謂執有法自性常存」 tr. “how do the Sāṃkhya maintain the sense of transmutation? They maintain that the possessor of dharmas exists permanently in its own nature”〔0057b21〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「僧佉外道所立轉變義。僧佉轉變者,此物先已住,轉成別法」 tr. “the sense of transmutation established by the Sāṃkhya non-Buddhists. Sāṃkhya transmutation means that this thing, having already abided before, turns into another dharma”〔0214b28〕. Difference of rendering: Sāṃkhya by sense-rendering / Sāṃkhya by transcription. This is the only passage of debate and refutation involving non-Buddhists in this unit, and the two translations differ in approach while the sense refuted is the same.
  5. The general statement of the eight seas — Xuanzang: 「妙高為初、輪圍最後,中間八海,前七名內」 tr. “with the Sublime and Lofty first and the Circle Mountain last, there are eight seas in between, of which the first seven are called inner”〔0057c10〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「其中間七海」 tr. “the seven seas in between them”〔0214c17〕. Difference of grouping: Xuanzang first sets up a global sentence pattern of 「初/後/中間」 tr. “first, last, in between,” while Paramārtha goes straight in, carrying forward the list of mountain names in the preceding passage.
  6. The water possessed of the eight qualities — Xuanzang sets out the eight items in full, 「一甘、二冷、三軟、四輕、五清淨、六不臭、七飲時不損喉、八飲已不傷腹」 tr. “first sweet, second cool, third soft, fourth light, fifth pure, sixth free of foul odor, seventh not hurting the throat when drunk, eighth not harming the belly once drunk”〔0057c11〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「八功德水。此水冷美輕軟清香,飲時不咽逆於喉,飲已利益內界不損於腹」 tr. “water possessed of eight qualities. This water is cool, delicious, light, soft, clear, and fragrant; when drunk it does not choke or go against the throat, and once drunk it benefits the inner elements and does not harm the belly”〔0214c19〕. Difference of fullness: Xuanzang uses a numbered form of eight items, Paramārtha a running descriptive form.
  7. The vajra seat and the vajra-like concentration — Xuanzang: 「一切菩薩將登正覺皆坐此座上起金剛喻定」 tr. “all bodhisattvas, when about to ascend to perfect awakening, sit upon this seat and arouse the vajra-like concentration”〔0058a02〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「一切菩薩皆於中坐,修習金剛三摩提」 tr. “all bodhisattvas sit therein and cultivate the vajra samādhi”〔0215a10〕. Difference of rendering: vajra-like concentration / vajra samādhi (the one adding the graph 「喻」 tr. “like” of simile, the other carrying the term straight over in transcription).
  8. The characteristics of the eastern continent — Xuanzang: 「東勝身洲東陿西廣,三邊量等,形如半月」 tr. “the continent of Videha in the east is narrow on the east and broad on the west, its three sides equal in measure, its form like a half-moon”〔0058a04〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「東洲如半月」 tr. “the eastern continent is like a half-moon”〔0215a13〕. Difference of fullness: Xuanzang states plainly the disposition of narrow and broad, Paramārtha states only its characteristic in general.
  9. The four great rivers — Xuanzang: 「一殑伽河、二信度河、三徙多河、四縛芻河」 tr. “first the river Gaṅgā, second the river Sindhu, third the river Sītā, fourth the river Vakṣu”〔0058a21〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「從此池流出四大河,一恒伽、二辛頭、三私多、四薄搜」 tr. “from this lake flow out four great rivers: first Hengqie, second Xintou, third Situo, fourth Bosou”〔0215b13〕. The transcriptions of the four rivers differ throughout.
  10. The measure of the Unremitting hell — Xuanzang: 「此贍部洲下過二萬,有阿鼻旨大㮈落迦。深廣同前」 tr. “going down from this Jambudvīpa past twenty thousand there is the great naraka Avīci; its depth and breadth are as above”〔0058b03〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「向下二十千,阿毘指廣爾」 tr. “downward twenty thousand, Apizhi is broad to that measure”〔0215b24〕. Difference of rendering: Avīci / Apizhi.
  11. The sixteen Increases / the sixteen Parks — Xuanzang: 「十六增者,八㮈落迦四面門外各有四所」 tr. “the sixteen Increases means that outside the gates on the four sides of the eight narakas there are four places each”〔0058b22〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「此一切地獄,各各有十六園」 tr. “every one of these hells has sixteen Parks”〔0215c08〕. The most vivid instance of the parting of the ways in rendering: Xuanzang takes 「增」 tr. “Increase” (carrying forward the gloss that because one suffers injury again it is called an Increase), Paramārtha takes 「園」 tr. “Park” (the image of a garden enclosure). The referent is the same and the choice of graph and of sense is wholly different.
  12. To whom the quoted stanza on the warders of Yama belongs — Xuanzang: 「若爾,云何通彼大德法善現說?如彼頌言」 tr. “if so, how is what the Venerable Dharmasubhūti said to be reconciled? As that stanza says”〔0058c19〕, the stanza 「心常懷忿毒,好集諸惡業,見他苦欣悅,死作琰魔卒」 tr. “whose heart harbors always rage and venom, who delights to heap up every kind of evil action, who sees the suffering of others and rejoices at it — he becomes at death a warder of Yama”〔0058c21〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「大德達摩須部底說偈言」 tr. “the Venerable Damo-xubudi spoke a verse, saying”〔0216a13〕, the verse 「恒瞋最麁業,於惡起愛樂,見他苦生樂,必作閻摩卒」 tr. “whose anger is constant and whose actions are most coarse, who takes delight in evil, who sees the suffering of others and takes pleasure in it — he must become a warder of Yanmo”〔0216a15〕. A contrast of methods in rendering a personal name: Xuanzang writes 「法善現」 tr. “Dharmasubhūti” half by sense-rendering and half by transcription, Paramārtha 「達摩須部底」 tr. “Damo-xubudi” wholly by transcription. The graphs of the stanza itself differ too (rejoices at it / takes pleasure in it · warder of Yama / warder of Yanmo).
  13. The distance of the sun and moon from the Sublime and Lofty Mountain — Xuanzang: 「日月迷盧半」 tr. “the sun and moon at half of Meru”〔0059a18〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「日月彌婁半」 tr. “the sun and moon at half of Milou”〔0216b19〕. The closest word-for-word parallel between the two translations (only the two graphs of the mountain’s name differ).
  14. The terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain — Xuanzang: 「蘇迷盧山有四層級,始從水際盡第一層相去十千踰繕那量」 tr. “Mount Sumeru has four terraces; reckoning from the water’s edge up to the first terrace, the distance is a measure of ten thousand yojanas”〔0059b26〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「山王層有四,相去各十千」 tr. “the mountain king has four terraces, each ten thousand apart”〔0216c24〕. Difference of grouping: Xuanzang sets it out tier by tier in prose, Paramārtha’s verse gathers the constant difference of the four terraces into a single line.
  15. The measure of the summit of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (principal and secondary interchanged between the two versions) — Xuanzang’s stanza 「妙高頂八萬,三十三天居」 tr. “the summit of the Sublime and Lofty is eighty thousand, and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three dwells there”〔0059c11〕, the treatise saying 「其頂四面各八十千,與下四邊其量無別。有餘師說:周八十千,別說四邊各唯二萬」 tr. “its summit is eighty thousand on each of its four sides, no different in measure from the four sides below. Some other masters say: it is eighty thousand in circumference, and they state separately that each of the four sides is only twenty thousand”〔0059c19〕 ‖ Paramārtha’s verse 「三十三住頂,縱廣二十千」 tr. “the Thirty-Three dwell on the summit, its length and breadth twenty thousand”〔0217a10〕, the explanation saying 「有餘師說:一一邊各八萬由旬,如下際,此名最勝處。有餘師說:於須彌婁頂中央,一一邊各二萬由旬,周圍八萬由旬為最勝處」 tr. “some other masters say: each side is eighty thousand youxun, as at the base; this is named the most excellent place. Some other masters say: at the center of the summit of Xumilou each side is twenty thousand youxun and the circumference eighty thousand youxun, and this is the most excellent place”〔0217a13〕. With one and the same pair of figures (eighty thousand and twenty thousand), the stanza text as the position and the account of other masters as the secondary stand in exactly reversed places in the two versions — Xuanzang holds eighty thousand and gives twenty thousand as the account of other masters, Paramārtha holds twenty thousand and gives eighty thousand as one account of other masters. This is not a difference of rendering but a difference in the variant readings of the stanza text that each version received, each translator being faithful to what he had. Recorded without adjudication.
  16. The quoted stanza on fragrance perfuming against the wind — Xuanzang: 「花香不能逆風熏,根莖等香亦復爾;善士功德香芬馥,逆風流美遍諸方」 tr. “the fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and the fragrance of roots and stems and the rest is likewise; the fragrance of a good man’s qualities is rich and pervading, and against the wind streams its fair name abroad through every quarter”〔0060a18〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「花香非能逆風薰,根實諸香亦皆爾,善人戒香逆風薰,正行芳流遍國界」 tr. “the fragrance of flowers cannot perfume against the wind, and the fragrances of roots and fruits are all likewise; the fragrance of a good man’s discipline perfumes against the wind, and his right conduct streams its sweetness abroad through the lands”〔0217b22〕. The four lines are rendered differently line by line while the syntactic correspondence agrees entirely. Difference of rendering: the fragrance of a good man’s qualities / the fragrance of a good man’s discipline.
  17. The name of the Mahīśāsakas — Xuanzang: 「化地部經說此香氣,順風熏滿百踰繕那,若無風時唯遍五十」 tr. “a sūtra of the Mahīśāsakas says of this fragrance that with the wind it perfumes a hundred yojanas, and when there is no wind extends over fifty only”〔0060a21〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「彌嬉沙塞部說:此香順風薰百由旬,逆風薰五十由旬」 tr. “the Mahīśāsakas say: this fragrance perfumes a hundred youxun with the wind and fifty youxun against the wind”〔0217b25〕. The same school’s name rendered once by sense and once by transcription (of the same type as item 12 above). The condition attached in the second clause differs between the two versions as well — Xuanzang writes 「若無風時」 tr. “when there is no wind,” Paramārtha 「逆風薰」 tr. “perfumes against the wind.” Recorded without adjudication.
  18. The general gathering of the gods possessed of form above — Xuanzang: 「此上有色天,住依空宮殿」 tr. “the gods possessed of form above this dwell in dependence upon palaces in space”〔0060a26〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「從此上宮殿,天住」 tr. “from this upward, palaces, the gods dwelling”〔0217b29〕. Difference of syntax: Xuanzang’s order of subject, predicate, and object is regular, Paramārtha’s is inverted.
  19. The manner of sexual union of the six heavens of desire — Xuanzang: 「六受欲交抱,執手笑視婬」 tr. “the six undergo desire by intercourse and embracing, by holding hands, laughing, and looking”〔0060b03〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「身交抱捉手,笑相視為婬」 tr. “joining bodies, embracing, grasping hands, laughing, and looking at one another are their sexual union”〔0217c07〕. Small differences of wording (intercourse and embracing / joining bodies and embracing · holding hands / grasping hands).
  20. Bodily measure at first birth · those who do not die untimely — Xuanzang: 「初如五至十,色圓滿有衣」 tr. “at first like five up to ten, of full form and possessed of garments”〔0060b14〕 ‖ Paramārtha: 「譬五年乃至,譬十年初生,生中」 tr. “like five years and so on, like ten years at first birth, and within birth”〔0217c18〕 (Xuanzang’s five graphs summing it up · Paramārtha’s ten graphs spreading it out); Xuanzang: 「謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,及最後有佛記佛使隨信法行菩薩輪王,母懷彼二胎時,此等如應皆無中夭」 tr. “that is, the bodhisattva bound to one more birth who dwells in the Tuṣita Heaven, and one in his last existence, one to whom the Buddha has given prediction, one whom the Buddha has sent, the bodhisattva who follows through faith or follows the dharma, a wheel-turning monarch, and the mothers at the time they carry those two in the womb — these, each as is fitting, are all without untimely death”〔0062a02〕 ‖ Paramārtha: beneath 「除鳩婁中夭」 tr. “save for untimely death in Kuru”〔0219c09〕 the explanation lists the bodhisattva who fills the place in one birth · the bodhisattva of the last birth · one to whom the Buddha has given prediction · one whom the Buddha has sent · the bodhisattva who follows in faith or in dharma · the mother of a wheel-turning monarch, and the rest. Difference of grouping: both versions list two first items — Xuanzang writes 「一生所繫菩薩」 tr. “the bodhisattva bound to one more birth” and 「最後有」 tr. “one in his last existence,” Paramārtha 「一生補處菩薩」 tr. “the bodhisattva who fills the place in one birth” and 「最後生菩薩」 tr. “the bodhisattva of the last birth” — the first items may be read against each other, while the range of the second is stated differently in the two versions. Recorded without adjudication.

Correspondence of renderings (within the range of Unit 4 · as found word by word): the world of sentient beings / the world-sphere of living beings · the receptacle world / the receptacle world-sphere · lakṣa / luosha · yojana / youxun · Sumeru / Xumilou · Meru / Milou · Yugandhara / Youqiantuoluo · Īṣādhara / Yishatuoluo · Khadiraka / Qutuoluoke · Sudarśana / Xiutengpona · Aśvakarṇa / Ashugena · Vinataka / Pinatuoke · Nimindhara / Nimintuoluo · Sāṃkhya by sense-rendering / Sāṃkhya by transcription · Jambudvīpa / the Yanfu Continent · vajra-like concentration / vajra samādhi · Gaṅgā / Hengqie · Sindhu / Xintou · Sītā / Situo · Vakṣu / Bosou · Without Heat and Torment / Anavatapta · Avīci / Apizhi · Increase / Park · Dharmasubhūti / Damo-xubudi · the warders of Yama / the warders of Yanmo · the Mahīśāsakas by sense-rendering / by transcription · the Round-Growth Tree / the Pari Park · the power of supernormal power / supernormal insight · Uttarakuru / North Jiulou · Equal Reviving / Renewed Life · Tuṣita / Doushuaiduo · the stanza says and the treatise says / the verse says and the explanation says.

Honest record: between this unit and Paramārtha’s version no wholesale absence of a section is found — every topic of the receptacle world (the three circles · the nine mountains · the eight seas · the four continents · the black mountains and the Lake Without Heat and Torment · the hells · the warders of Yama · the sun and moon · the terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain · the Heaven of the Thirty-Three · the gods possessed of form above · the manner of sexual union and bodily measure · birth amid desires and birth amid pleasure · the distances between the places of the gods · the three-thousandfold great thousand · bodily measure · lifespan · untimely death) has its counterpart in Paramārtha’s version one by one, and the differences appear as differences of rendering, of grouping, of fullness, and of the practice of stanza and explanation, not as the presence or absence of passages. The direction of fullness runs both ways with no fixed direction (in item 6 Xuanzang is fuller and Paramārtha briefer · in item 20 Paramārtha is fuller and Xuanzang briefer), differing from the one-directional record at Unit 1 of the Chapter on the Faculties. In this section divergent readings are recorded without adjudication.


V. Debate within the Abhidharma Lineage (Saṅghabhadra · Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle · T1562 ★ · Where Present)

Saṅghabhadra’s chapter name is not 「世品」 tr. “the chapter on the world”: T1562 has 「辯緣起品第三」 tr. “the chapter analyzing dependent origination, chapter three”〔0456a16–0527b18〕 · T1563 has 「辯緣起品第四」 tr. “the chapter analyzing dependent origination, chapter four”〔0829a22–0859b21〕. Do not search it by the Kośa’s chapter name.

The boundaries of the passage of debate: at the opening boundary of this unit T1562 has 「如是已辯有情世間,器世間今當辯」 tr. “thus has the world of sentient beings been analyzed; the receptacle world is now to be analyzed”〔T29n1562 0514c23〕, and immediately below cites the root stanza 「安立器世間,風輪最居下」 tr. “to establish the receptacle world, the wind circle is lowest of all” — the same boundary as Fascicle Eleven of the Kośa. Its closing boundary lies after the passage 「此諸壽量有中夭耶」 tr. “do these lifespans admit of untimely death?”; 「經主率意作是釋言」 tr. “the Sūtra-master, following his own inclination, explains it thus”〔0521b23〕 has already entered the range of Unit 5 (the ultimate atom, the syllable, the moment).

Honest record (a negative proposition · limited to the designation form 「經主」 tr. “the Sūtra-master” · not 「無爭」 tr. “no dispute”): searching the corresponding passage of this unit graph by graph for 「經主」 tr. “the Sūtra-master,” 「非理」 tr. “contrary to principle,” 「不應理」 tr. “not according with principle,” 「不然」 tr. “not so,” 「太過」 tr. “goes too far,” and the other marks of counter-refutation habitual to the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, the term 「經主」 tr. “the Sūtra-master” has zero hits within the strict range of Unit 4; its one occurrence is at〔T29n1562 0521b23〕 「經主率意作是釋言」 tr. “the Sūtra-master, following his own inclination, explains it thus,” and what that passage answers to is Xuanzang’s Unit 5, 「極微字剎那,色名時極少」 tr. “the ultimate atom, the syllable, and the moment are called the least of form, of name, and of time,” which is already beyond this unit. ⇒ Within the range of this unit Saṅghabhadra does not counter-refute Vasubandhu in the designation form 「經主……非理」 tr. “the Sūtra-master . . . contrary to principle”; within the same range T1563 likewise has zero hits for 「經主」 tr. “the Sūtra-master,” 「非理」 tr. “contrary to principle,” and 「不然」 tr. “not so.” Yet zero hits for a designation is not the absence of criticism — Saṅghabhadra criticizes the wording of the root stanza clause by clause within the same stanza block; see the item on the criticism of the stanza’s wording below. ⇒ What this record can prove is only the nonexistence of counter-refutation in the designation form, and it cannot be extended to the claim that there is no dispute in this unit; to infer a universal negative from zero hits for a personal designation is the very fault warned against at F-01 of the fourth review.

Substantive differences (recorded together without adjudication · not exhaustive):

  1. Two items of divergence in measure — ① The breadth of the outer sea: this treatise has 「量廣三億二萬二千」 tr. “its measure of breadth is three hundred thousand and twenty-two thousand”〔T29 0057c18〕, and Saṅghabhadra adds immediately after, 「理實應言其量復有一千二百八十七半」 tr. “in truth of principle one should say that its measure has a further one thousand two hundred and eighty-seven and a half”〔T29n1562 0515c04〕. ② The smallest measure of a star: this treatise has 「星最小者唯一俱盧舍」 tr. “the smallest of the stars is only one krośa”〔T29 0059a28〕, Saṅghabhadra has 「星最小者半俱盧舍」 tr. “the smallest of the stars is half a krośa”〔T29n1562 0518a18〕, and the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine agrees〔T29n1563 0852b07〕. Recorded without adjudication.

  2. Whether the hell warders are sentient beings — this treatise uses an open form of question and answer: 「今於此中因論生論。諸地獄卒是有情不?」 tr. “now here a discussion arises from the discussion. Are the hell warders sentient beings or not?”〔0058c17〕, and beneath it sets side by side the two positions 「有說:非情」 tr. “there is an account: they are not sentient” and 「有說:有情」 tr. “there is an account: they are sentient beings,” adducing the Venerable Dharmasubhūti’s stanza as proof for the position that they are 「有情」 tr. “sentient beings.” At the same doctrinal place Saṅghabhadra uses neither the question-and-answer form of debate nor the stanza of Dharmasubhūti, and states it synthetically instead — 「無間大熱及炎熱三,於中皆無獄卒防守。大叫號叫及眾合三,少有獄卒,琰魔王使時時往來巡檢彼故。其餘皆為獄卒防守。有情無情異類獄卒,防守治罰罪有情故,火不焚燒」 tr. “in the three, the Unremitting, Great Heat, and Burning Heat, there are no hell warders on guard within. In the three, Great Howling, Howling, and Massed Crushing, there are few hell warders, since the messengers of King Yama come and go from time to time to inspect them. All the rest are guarded by hell warders. Since hell warders of the differing classes, sentient and insentient, guard and punish the sentient beings that have offended, the fire does not burn them”〔T29n1562 0517a27〕. The corresponding passage of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine is nearly the same word for word〔T29n1563 0852a02〕. What the difference really is: this treatise sets out the two positions without deciding, while Saṅghabhadra gathers in both classes with the single phrase 「有情無情異類獄卒」 tr. “hell warders of the differing classes, sentient and insentient,” and supplies in addition what this treatise does not reach — which hells have warders and which do not. This is not a counter-refutation (Saṅghabhadra does not say this treatise is contrary to principle) but a difference of narrative genre. Recorded together without adjudication.

  3. Whether a god below can see a god above — beneath the stanza 「下無昇見上」 tr. “those below cannot ascend or see above,” this treatise appends an account of a separate school, 「有餘部說:彼下地天隨樂亦能見上地色,如生此界下見上天」 tr. “some other school says: those gods of a lower level can, according as they wish, also see the form of an upper level, just as one born in this realm can see the gods above from below”〔0060c25〕, recording it without adding a critique. At the same place Saṅghabhadra refutes this account of the separate school head-on — 「有餘部說:如欲界中若往若來,下眼見上。如是色界諸地往來,設離下化身,下眼亦見上。彼說非理,以色界中諸地相望因果斷故,要離下地染方得上生故。下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」 tr. “some other school says: as in the desire realm, whether going or coming, an eye below sees above, so likewise in the form realm, in the goings and comings among the several levels, even setting aside a transformation body of the lower level, an eye below also sees above. That account is contrary to principle, because among the several levels of the form realm cause and result are cut off from one another, and because one must be free from the defilement of a lower level in order to be born above. That the eye faculty of a lower level does not see the form above is because it is a result called forth by lowly action”〔T29n1562 0520a11〕. The object of his refutation is the separate school (Puguang marks it as the Mahāsāṃghikas), not Vasubandhu’s treatise; this treatise here takes the posture of recording, while Saṅghabhadra goes a step further and argues its wrongness. Recorded together without adjudication. The two treatises T1562 and T1563 differ from each other: after 「必化下身,為令下見」 tr. “he must make a transformation body below in order to be seen by those below”〔0854a18〕, T1563 goes straight on to 「依地居天已說處量,夜摩天等處量云何」 tr. “the measures of the places of the ground-dwelling gods having been stated, what are the measures of the places of the Yāma Heaven and the rest?”, without the passage 「有餘部說……彼說非理」 tr. “some other school says . . . that account is contrary to principle” — the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine is briefer than the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle in this section. This is a difference between the two treatises themselves and not one between Vasubandhu and Saṅghabhadra. It is recorded as such.

Criticism of the stanza’s wording (head-on · not in the designation form): this treatise’s stanza on the characteristics of the four continents reads 「西瞿陀尼洲,其相圓無缺」 tr. “the continent of Godānīya in the west, its characteristic round without a gap”〔T29n1558 0057c23〕 (down to 「北俱盧畟方,面各二千等」 tr. “Uttarakuru in the north is exactly square, each face two thousand, equal”). Reading on to the same stanza block, Saṅghabhadra criticizes its wording clause by clause: 「既說畟方面各二千,以其義已顯,故等言無用。或應但說圓及等言,無缺畟方便為無用。又應說如滿月方座,不應但說圓無缺等」 tr. “since it has said ‘exactly square, each face two thousand,’ the sense is already displayed, and so the word ‘equal’ is useless. Or it should say only ‘round’ together with the word ‘equal,’ so that ‘without a gap’ and ‘exactly square’ become useless. Again, it should say ‘like a full moon’ and ‘like a square seat,’ and should not say only ‘round without a gap’ and the rest”〔T29n1562 0515c26〕 — what he points to is that the graph 「等」 tr. “equal” is redundant and that 「圓無缺」 tr. “round without a gap” and 「畟方」 tr. “exactly square” display each other and are repetitious, and he says that 「如滿月」 tr. “like a full moon” and 「如方座」 tr. “like a square seat” should be used directly as the similes. The stanza at the same place in the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine has already been altered to 「西瞿陀尼洲,其相如滿月」 tr. “the continent of Godānīya in the west, its characteristic like a full moon”〔T29n1563 0850b28〕 · 「北洲如方座,四面各二千」 tr. “the northern continent like a square seat, each of its four faces two thousand”〔T29n1563 0850c01〕. ⇒ This is head-on criticism of the wording of the root stanza, and the altered stanza of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine corresponds to it; recorded without adjudication (neither whether Saṅghabhadra’s criticism is apt nor whether the altered stanza is the better is adjudicated).

Saṅghabhadra’s taking up and expansion (not debate): in the passage on the three circles at the opening of this unit, Saṅghabhadra adds before the stanza a framework of the causes and results of dissolution and formation that this treatise does not have — 「此百俱胝四大洲界如是安立,同壞同成。謂諸有情法爾修得諸靜慮故,下命終已生第二等靜慮地中,下器世間三災所壞,經久遠已,依下空中,由諸有情業增上力有微風起,後後轉增,蟠結成輪,其體堅密」 tr. “this hundred koṭi of four-continent realms is established thus, and is dissolved together and formed together. That is, since sentient beings by the nature of things cultivate and obtain the meditative absorptions, when their lives end below they are born in the levels of the second absorption and the rest; the receptacle world below is destroyed by the three catastrophes, and after a long time, resting in the space below, by the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings a slight wind arises, which grows greater and greater and coils into a circle, its entity firm and dense”〔T29n1562 0515a01〕. This treatise speaks straight off of the arising of the wind circle, while Saṅghabhadra first accounts for why there is an arising of the wind circle at all, the sequence of dissolution and formation. This belongs to an expansion in the fullness of the prose commentary and is not a counter-refutation. It is recorded as such.

Practice: only the locations where there really is debate with the Kośa are cited · no general citation. 『一義二宗』 tr. “One meaning and two schools” — both are recorded · neither is judged to prevail.


VI. Divergent Interpretations of the Commentators (Puguang · Fabao · Yuanhui)

The lacuna in Shentai’s commentary (a negative proposition · the lacuna marked as it stands): Shentai’s Commentary on the Abhidharmakośa, X53n0836, is an incomplete text; the seven fascicles now extant = Fascicles One and Two (Parts One and Two of the Chapter on the Elements) · Fascicles Four, Five, Six, and Seven (Parts Two through Five of the Chapter on the Faculties) · Fascicle Seventeen (Part Three of the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble) — the Chapter on the World, the Chapter on Action, and the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies are wholly wanting. Searching its whole text for 「蘇迷盧」 tr. “Sumeru,” 「分別世品」 tr. “the Chapter on the Analysis of the World,” and 「世間今當說」 tr. “the world is now to be stated” gives zero hits throughout; 「器世間」 tr. “receptacle world” has four hits, all within one short section from〔X53n0836 0038b23〕 to〔0038c17〕, the context being a collateral example of the great Brahmā calling himself the maker and the transformer (「我於此梵眾中尊,故是大梵。統攝一切皆得自在,故名自在。能作器世間名作者,能化有情世間名化者」 tr. “I am honored among this multitude of Brahmās, and so I am the great Brahmā. I govern all and am sovereign in everything, and so I am named the Sovereign. Because he can make the receptacle world he is named the maker; because he can transform the world of sentient beings he is named the transformer”〔X53n0836 0038b23〕), which belongs to another chapter and is an example adduced in passing; 「三十三天」 tr. “the Heaven of the Thirty-Three” has two hits〔0039a09〕, the context being a scriptural passage adduced in passing about the gods deferring to one another in turn (「彼共推三十三天眾,三十三天復推帝釋」 tr. “they together deferred to the host of the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and the Heaven of the Thirty-Three deferred in turn to Śakra”), which likewise belongs to another chapter. ⇒ Shentai’s commentary is incomplete · the Chapter on the World is wanting · there is no verse-by-verse explanation of Shentai’s that can be attached to this unit, and text from other fascicles is not made to serve in its place.

Yet within the range of this unit the three commentaries expressly cite, four times in all, the lost words on the Chapter on the World of 「泰法師」 tr. “Master Tai” (Fabao writing the first graph differently, 「太法師」 tr. “Master Tai”) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187c22〕 「若依泰法師意解,從二月十六日至六月十五日為熱際四月」 tr. “if one follows the sense of Master Tai’s explanation, from the sixteenth day of the second month to the fifteenth day of the sixth month is the four months of the hot season” (the reckoning of the three seasons) · Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0618a07〕 「然太法師釋,以六月十六日是雨際之初者,取八月後半第九日夜增,亦不違《婆沙》」 tr. “but Master Tai explains, taking the sixteenth day of the sixth month as the beginning of the rainy season, that the night increases on the ninth day of the latter half of the eighth month, which likewise does not contradict the Mahāvibhāṣā” · Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0881b20〕 「泰法師云:從二月十六日至六月十五日為熱際四月,從六月十六日至十月十五日為雨際四月,從十月十六日至二月十五日為寒際四月。雨際第二月後半第九日,當此間八月九日,從秋分已去,夜增晝減也。寒際第四月後半第九日,當此間二月九日,從春分已去,夜減晝增也」 tr. “Master Tai says: from the sixteenth day of the second month to the fifteenth day of the sixth month is the four months of the hot season; from the sixteenth day of the sixth month to the fifteenth day of the tenth month is the four months of the rainy season; from the sixteenth day of the tenth month to the fifteenth day of the second month is the four months of the cold season. The ninth day of the latter half of the second month of the rainy season falls on the ninth day of the eighth month in this land, and from the autumn equinox onward the night increases and the day decreases. The ninth day of the latter half of the fourth month of the cold season falls on the ninth day of the second month in this land, and from the spring equinox onward the night decreases and the day increases” · Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0192a16〕 「泰法師云:依《立世經》,彌勒菩薩第九住劫,釋迦如來百歲時,生上覩史多天。至第十劫,八萬歲劫減時方下生」 tr. “Master Tai says: according to the Sūtra of the Establishing of the World, the bodhisattva Maitreya, in the ninth aeon of abiding, when the Tathāgata Śākyamuni was a hundred years old, was born up in the Tuṣita Heaven; and in the tenth aeon, when the aeon has decreased to eighty thousand years, he then descends to be born” (the aeon of Maitreya’s ascent and descent). All four citations attach to concrete topics within the range of this unit, and do not contradict the wholesale absence of the Chapter on the World in the extant X836 — what the three masters cite must come from the Chapter on the World portion of Shentai’s original commentary, which is no longer transmitted in the incomplete fascicles and of which a few words are visible only by way of citation. Recorded without adjudication, and the statement that there is no verse-by-verse explanation of Shentai’s to be attached to this unit is still held as the lacuna marked as it stands. The three masters are recorded together below.

(1) The Three Circles and the Nine Mountains

  • The general heading of the outline — all three are recorded in section I. Beneath 「就明所居器中」 tr. “within the explaining of the receptacle dwelt in,” Puguang divides further into 「一別明小器、二總明大千」 tr. “first the small receptacles explained separately, second the great thousand in general,” marking the eight headings one by one in order; Yuanhui adds the numeral phrases 「有二」 tr. “there are two” and 「有八」 tr. “there are eight”; Fabao’s verb is 「述」 tr. “relate.”
  • Explanations of the transcriptions — Puguang’s renderings of the 「此云」 tr. “means here” type are complete for each mountain (see section II), and are the chief source for the technical terms of this unit.
  • The two graphs seed and store — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0185c22〕 「水能生寶,名種。水中出寶,名藏」 tr. “that the water can produce jewels is what seed means; that jewels come out of the water is what store means,” explaining the two graphs in this treatise’s 「其水即為眾寶種藏」 tr. “this water becomes the seed and store of the several jewels.”
  • The possessor of dharmas (an aid to explaining the refutation of the Sāṃkhya) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186a03〕 adduces a treatise on the science of reasons as an analogy, 「聲是無常,無常是法。聲是有法,有無常法故名有法」 tr. “sound is impermanent; impermanence is a dharma. Sound is a possessor of dharmas, and because it has the dharma of impermanence it is called a possessor of dharmas,” as an aid to explaining this treatise’s sentence 「唯即此法於轉變時異相所依名為有法」 tr. “it is just this dharma that, at the time of transmutation, serves as the support of differing characteristics and is called the possessor of dharmas.”
  • Divergent accounts of the relative breadth of the three circles (supplied by Fabao alone) — Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0614c20〕 first rejects one error, 「有人謂十二餘億為大千之徑。全不相當」 tr. “some hold that the twelve and more hundred thousand is the diameter of the great thousand. That does not correspond at all,” then adduces the several masters’ accounts of the relative breadth of the wind, water, and golden circles given in fascicle one hundred and thirty-four of the Mahāvibhāṣā, and finally sets down his own judgment〔0614c28〕: 「今詳前之二說、前說為善。既同一雨水以成水輪、於中何要分金、水別?又三輪相依,風輪既等大千,水、金因何即小」 tr. “examining the two accounts above, the former is the better. Since one and the same rainwater forms the water circle, what need is there within it to divide gold from water? And since the three circles rest upon one another, if the wind circle equals the great thousand, why should the water and the gold be small?” Puguang does not touch upon this detail — Fabao’s character of independent auditing may be seen here.
  • Fabao’s own mark of an unsettled matter — 〔T41n1822 0614c11〕 「論『有餘部說至如篅持穀』,述異部釋。未知何部,應撿」 tr. “the treatise from ‘some other school says’ to ‘as a chuan holds the grain’ relates the explanation of a divergent school. It is not known which school; it should be looked into” — Fabao states of himself that he does not know from which school this divergent account comes, an ancient master’s own honest mark.

(2) The Four Continents, the Eight Intermediate Continents, and the Black Mountains

  • The sound and sense of the eight intermediate continents — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b11〕 「遮末邏,此云猫牛。筏羅遮末羅,此云勝猫牛」 tr. “Cāmara means here Cat-Ox. Varacāmara means here Excellent Cat-Ox,” and the other six continents on the same pattern.
  • The inhabitants of the eight intermediate continents (involving a choice among divergent accounts) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b16〕 adduces the Mahāvibhāṣā, 「此八洲中人形短小」 tr. “the human forms in these eight continents are short and small,” and records the divergent accounts 「有說:七洲是人所住,遮末邏洲唯邏剎娑居」 tr. “there is an account: seven continents are inhabited by human beings, and the continent of Cāmara alone is inhabited by rākṣasas” and 「有說:此所說八,即是四大洲之異名」 tr. “there is an account: these eight spoken of are simply other names for the four great continents,” settling it at the end with 「如是說者,應如初說」 tr. “as for what is thus said, it should be as in the first account” — this is Puguang’s choice and not an adjudication in the text of the treatise.
  • A divergent set of eight from another sūtra on the water possessed of the eight qualities — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b01〕 adduces the Sūtra in Praise of the Pure Land, which sets out another set of eight items, 「一者澄淨、二者清淨、三者甘美、四者輕耎」 tr. “first limpid, second clean, third sweet-tasting, fourth light and soft,” and the rest, recording them together with this treatise’s eight items (sweet · cool · soft · light · pure · free of foul odor · not hurting the throat · not harming the belly), passing no verdict of better or worse.
  • The gloss of the Mountain of Intoxicating Fragrance — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b22〕; see section II.

(3) The Hells (the Eight Great Hells · the Sixteen Increases · the Warders of Yama) — Where the Three Commentaries Write Most Densely

  • A grammatical discrimination of the two transcriptions of naraka — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186b29〕 「若言捺落迦,顯受罪處。若言那落迦,顯能受罪人」 tr. “if it is written with the one transcription, it displays the place where punishment is undergone; if with the other, it displays the person who undergoes punishment.”
  • A supplementary account of the naming of the Unremitting — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186c03〕 adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「有說:無隙立無間名。雖有情少而身大故」 tr. “there is an account: the name Unremitting is established from there being no gap, for although the sentient beings are few their bodies are large.”
  • The settled verdict of the adjudicators of the Mahāvibhāṣā — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186c11〕 「評曰:不應作是說。生餘地獄多,生無間者少。所以者何?以造作增長上品身、語、意惡業者乃生彼處」 tr. “the adjudication says: one should not put it in that way. Those born in the other hells are many, those born in the Unremitting are few. Why so? Because it is those who have performed and increased superior evil actions of body, speech, and mind who are born in that place” — this is the Mahāvibhāṣā’s own adjudication. Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0615c22〕 adduces the same passage and goes further in pointing out its origin〔0616a01〕: 「此評家義即是《正理論》中一師釋也」 tr. “this sense of the adjudicators is precisely the explanation of one master in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle.”
  • A third account of the layout of the hells — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0186c28〕 「有說:無間地獄在於中央,餘七地獄周匝圍繞,如今聚落圍繞大城」 tr. “there is an account: the Unremitting hell is at the center, and the remaining seven hells encircle it round about, as a village today encircles a great city,” listed beside the two accounts recorded in the prose commentary of this treatise (piled below · at the flank of the Unremitting).
  • How many glosses the graph for Increase has (the first of the three commentaries’ head-on encounters) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187a05〕 expressly marks the graph 「增」 tr. “Increase” with a third gloss, 「第三解云:有說有情從地獄出已,數更遭此苦,故說為增。此約出本地獄已數數受苦名增,故與第二不同」 tr. “a third explanation says: there is an account that sentient beings, having come out of the hell, repeatedly undergo this suffering again, and it is therefore called an Increase. This takes as Increase the repeated undergoing of suffering after coming out of the hell proper, and so differs from the second,” analyzing it out as an independent third sense; and〔0187a08〕 he adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle for yet another, 「或於此中受種種苦,苦具多類,故說為增」 tr. “or else within this one undergoes sufferings of every kind, the instruments of suffering being of many types, and it is therefore called an Increase.” Fabao refutes this head-on〔T41n1822 0616b02〕: 「評其論意,只是兩釋,不是三解。有人謂是三解,誤也」 tr. “weighing the sense of the treatise, there are only two explanations, not three. Some hold that there are three explanations, which is a mistake.” Yuanhui does not enter into this section.
  • The administrative levels of whether there are hell warders — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187a21〕 adduces fascicle thirty-one of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「無間、大熱及炎熱三,於中皆無獄卒防守。大叫、號叫及眾合三,少有獄卒,琰王使時時往來巡撿彼故」 tr. “in the three, the Unremitting, Great Heat, and Burning Heat, there are no hell warders on guard within. In the three, Great Howling, Howling, and Massed Crushing, there are few hell warders, since the messengers of King Yama come and go from time to time to inspect them” (corroborating T1562〔0517a27〕 in section V). Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0616b14〕 adduces the same passage.
  • The sound and sense of the eight cold hells — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187a28〕 「頞部陀,此云皰,嚴寒逼身,其身皰也」 tr. “Arbuda means here Blister; bitter cold oppresses the body and the body blisters,” and the other seven on the same pattern. For the location of the cold hells he further adduces one account from the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle〔0187b12〕: 「此寒地獄,在繞四洲輪圍山外極冥闇所」 tr. “these cold hells are in the utterly dark place outside the Circle Mountain that surrounds the four continents” (the prose commentary of this treatise says only 「并居贍部洲下」 tr. “they all lie beneath Jambudvīpa”).
  • The geography of the capital of King Yama and the vajra seat (the second of the three commentaries’ head-on encounters) — Puguang adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle〔T41n1821 0187b23〕, 「此贍部洲南邊直下深過五百踰繕那量,有琰魔王都,縱廣亦爾」 tr. “straight down from the southern edge of this Jambudvīpa, past a measure of five hundred yojanas, there is the capital of King Yama, its length and breadth likewise,” and sets down a reconciling judgment of his own, 「以此文證,明知金剛座近北,諸地獄等在王都下稍近南邊,不相妨也」 tr. “on the evidence of this text it is plain that the vajra seat is toward the north, and the hells and the rest are below the capital and somewhat toward the south, so that they do not obstruct one another.” Fabao refutes him directly〔T41n1822 0616c18〕: 「今詳此釋,事恐不然。無間地獄廣二萬踰繕那,於四門外有十六增,或說七地獄遶無間獄,其傍復有寒地獄處,縱少近南亦侵金剛座下」 tr. “examining this explanation now, the matter is likely not so. The Unremitting hell is twenty thousand yojanas broad, and outside its four gates there are sixteen Increases; or it is said that seven hells encircle the Unremitting hell, and at their flank there are further the cold hells; so that even if they lie somewhat toward the south they still encroach beneath the vajra seat,” and he sets up an explanation of his own (the dwellings of the human destiny and the abodes of the destiny of ghosts do not obstruct one another in the first place, and so neither do the hells and the vajra seat).
  • The verbal root and accompanying condition of the word Bhagavat — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0187a09〕 「𮓁伽,此云功德,梵此云具」 tr.bhaga means here qualities, and vat means here possessing.”

(4) The Sun and Moon and the Increase and Decrease of Day and Night (Where the Three Commentaries Diverge Most Sharply)

  • Puguang’s Record: adduces in detail the reckoning of Master Tai〔T41n1821 0187c22〕 and the reckoning of Master Paramārtha〔0188a15〕, 「又真諦法師立三際云:從此間正月十六日至五月十五日為熱際四月,從五月十六日至九月十五日為雨際四月,從九月十六日至正月十五日為寒際四月。雨際第二月後半第九日夜漸增,當此間七月九日。寒際第四月後半第九日夜漸減,當此間正月九日」 tr. “again, Master Paramārtha establishes the three seasons thus: from the sixteenth day of the first month of this land to the fifteenth day of the fifth month is the four months of the hot season; from the sixteenth day of the fifth month to the fifteenth day of the ninth month is the four months of the rainy season; from the sixteenth day of the ninth month to the fifteenth day of the first month is the four months of the cold season. On the ninth day of the latter half of the second month of the rainy season the night gradually increases, which falls on the ninth day of the seventh month in this land. On the ninth day of the latter half of the fourth month of the cold season the night gradually decreases, which falls on the ninth day of the first month in this land”; then he raises a difficulty of his own〔0188a21〕, 「難曰:此亦非理。若言七月九日說夜漸增,為據何時」 tr. “objection: this too is contrary to principle. If it is said that on the ninth day of the seventh month the night begins to increase, on what time is this based?”; and at the end sets up a reconciling explanation of his own〔0188b11〕, 「今解云:西方諸國寒、熱、雨三時節不定,還隨方俗立三際異。世親菩薩造論處立三際」 tr. “the explanation now is this: in the countries of the West the three seasons of cold, heat, and rain are not fixed, and the three periods are established differently according to local custom. The bodhisattva Vasubandhu established the three seasons of the place where he composed the treatise.”
  • Fabao’s Commentary: adduces instead the oral teaching of Xuanzang himself〔T41n1822 0618a05〕, 「唐三藏以三月十六日為雨際之初,取五月九日夜增,亦不違《婆沙》」 tr. “the Tripiṭaka Master of the Tang takes the sixteenth day of the third month as the beginning of the rainy season, and takes the ninth day of the fifth month as the increase of the night, which likewise does not contradict the Mahāvibhāṣā,” and lists the reckoning of Master Tai alongside〔0618a07〕, and at the end reconciles them on the ground that the cold and heat of the two lands differ, fixing his own reckoning〔0618a18〕: 「今釋《俱舍》雨際第二月白半第九日,即是此方五月第九日為定」 tr. “explaining the Kośa now, the ninth day of the bright half of the second month of the rainy season is settled as the ninth day of the fifth month in this land.”
  • Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary: lists the two schools and expressly declares that he passes no verdict — at〔T41n1823 0881b20〕 he adduces Master Tai, and at〔0881b27〕 「光法師云:西方諸國時節不定,還隨方俗以立三際:從十一月十六日至三月十五日為熱際,從三月十六日至七月十五日為雨際,從七月十六日至十一月十五日為寒際。雨際第二月後半第九日,當此間五月九日,此與夏至稍得相當,此時日極長、夜極短,從此已後,夜則漸增。若寒際第四月後半第九日,當此間十一月九日,此與冬至稍得相當,此時晝極短、夜極長,從此已後,夜則漸減,晝則漸增」 tr. “Master Guang says: in the countries of the West the seasons are not fixed, and the three periods are established according to local custom: from the sixteenth day of the eleventh month to the fifteenth day of the third month is the hot season; from the sixteenth day of the third month to the fifteenth day of the seventh month is the rainy season; from the sixteenth day of the seventh month to the fifteenth day of the eleventh month is the cold season. The ninth day of the latter half of the second month of the rainy season falls on the ninth day of the fifth month in this land, which corresponds roughly to the summer solstice, when the day is at its longest and the night at its shortest, and from this onward the night gradually increases. As for the ninth day of the latter half of the fourth month of the cold season, it falls on the ninth day of the eleventh month in this land, which corresponds roughly to the winter solstice, when the day is at its shortest and the night at its longest, and from this onward the night gradually decreases and the day gradually increases”; and at the end〔0881c18〕 「此上兩釋,泰法師意,約晝夜停等後說有增減。光法師意,約晝夜極長後說有增減。各據一義,任情取捨。更有多解,不能具敘」 tr. “of these two explanations above, Master Tai’s intent is that increase and decrease are spoken of after day and night are equal; Master Guang’s intent is that increase and decrease are spoken of after the day is longest. Each rests upon one sense; take or leave as you please. There are further many explanations, which cannot be set out in full.” This sentence is the ancient masters’ own attestation of the practice of recording one sense and two schools together.

(5) The Terraces of the Sublime and Lofty Mountain, the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and the Receptacles of the Gods

  • The criterion where the Mahāvibhāṣā has no adjudicator — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189a20〕 「《婆沙》雖無評家,此論既無異說,即以此論為正」 tr. “although the Mahāvibhāṣā has no adjudicator, since this treatise has no divergent account, this treatise is taken as correct” — Puguang’s own statement of the criterion by which he handles a case where the Mahāvibhāṣā has not adjudicated.
  • The reckoning behind the other masters’ account that each side is only twenty thousand (worked out by Puguang on their behalf) — the phrase is 「各唯二萬」 tr. “each is only twenty thousand”; Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189a27〕 says 「此師意說,其四層級漸次却入侵山體成」 tr. “this master’s intent is that the four terraces are formed by cutting successively inward into the body of the mountain,” working out a reckoning that the prose commentary of this treatise does not give.
  • The guards of the city Fair to Behold — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189b12〕 adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「城有千門嚴飾壯麗,有五百青衣藥叉勇健端嚴」 tr. “the city has a thousand gates, adorned and imposing, and there are five hundred blue-clad yakṣas, valiant and comely.”
  • tūla floss — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189b10〕; see section II.
  • How the four parks got their names — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189b15〕 adduces fascicle one hundred and thirty-three of the Mahāvibhāṣā: 「一眾車苑,謂此苑中隨天福力種種車現」 tr. “first, the Park of Many Chariots, meaning that in this park chariots of every kind appear according to the merit and power of the gods,” explaining the four parks one by one (the prose commentary of this treatise lists only the names without explaining them).
  • The gloss of Fair to Behold — Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0882b18〕 「見者稱善也」 tr. “those who see it call it fair,” nearly identical word for word with Puguang’s〔T41n1821 0185c14〕 「莊嚴殊妙見者稱善,故名善見」 tr. “its adornment is surpassingly excellent and those who see it call it fair, and so it is named Fair to Behold” — the three commentaries are highly common in source in their basic glosses of sound and sense.
  • The question and answer on fragrance perfuming against the wind — Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary〔T41n1823 0882c07〕 「若逆風時,猶遍五十。問:順風可爾,云何逆風熏」 tr. “when the wind is against it, it still extends over fifty. Question: with the wind it may be so, but how does it perfume against the wind?” · 〔0882c08〕 「有餘師說:香無逆熏義,依不越樹界故,說逆風熏」 tr. “some other masters say: fragrance has no sense of perfuming against the wind; it is in dependence upon its not passing beyond the bounds of the tree that it is said to perfume against the wind” — in this section Yuanhui’s form of question and answer comes closest to the question-and-answer form of this treatise’s prose commentary.
  • How space can uphold the palaces — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0189c28〕 adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「有說:空中密雲彌布如地,為彼宮殿所依」 tr. “there is an account: in space dense clouds are spread out like ground, and serve as the support of those palaces.”

(6) The Manner of Sexual Union · First Birth · Birth amid Desires and Birth amid Pleasure · Seeing Above from Below

  • The full spreading out of the ages of the six heavens at first birth — the stanza sums it up in five graphs, 「初如五至十」 tr. “at first like five up to ten”〔T29 0060b14〕, and the prose commentary of this treatise has already listed them in order, 「且六欲諸天初生,如次如五六七八九十歲人」 tr. “the six heavens of desire, at their first birth, are in order like people of five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten years”〔T29 0060b15〕; Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0190a05〕 marks out the names of the six heavens one by one besides: 「且六欲天初生如次,四天王天如五歲,三十三天如六歲,夜摩天如七歲,覩史多天如八歲,樂變化天如九歲,他化自在天如十歲」 tr. “the six heavens of desire at their first birth are in order: the Heaven of the Four Kings like five years, the Heaven of the Thirty-Three like six years, the Yāma Heaven like seven years, the Tuṣita Heaven like eight years, the Heaven of Delight in Working Transformations like nine years, the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations like ten years.”
  • The etymology of the name India — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0190a12〕 「印度,此云月支。月有千名,斯其一矣」 tr. “India means here the Moon Branch. The moon has a thousand names, and this is one of them,” one account preserved.
  • Why birth amid desires is grouped as it is — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0190b09〕 adduces fascicle one hundred and seventy-three of the Mahāvibhāṣā: 「問:何故人及前四天眾合立欲生,後二天眾各別建立。答:人及前四天煩惱麁,後二天煩惱細」 tr. “question: why are human beings and the hosts of the first four heavens together established as birth amid desires, while the hosts of the last two heavens are each established separately? Answer: the afflictions of human beings and of the first four heavens are coarse, those of the last two heavens subtle” (the prose commentary of this treatise does not answer this question).
  • Why the intermediate absorption is also called birth amid pleasure — the prose commentary of this treatise stops at the mark of doubt 「應思」 tr. “it should be pondered”; Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0190c03〕 adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle to relieve it: 「大梵既有喜樂現行,名樂生天亦無有失」 tr. “since the great Brahmā does have joy and pleasure occurring, there is no fault in naming it a heaven of birth amid pleasure.”
  • The refutation of seeing above from below — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0190c18〕 adduces the refutation in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「諸地相望因果別故,要離下地染方得上生,故下地眼根不見上色,是卑下業所感果故」 tr. “because among the several levels cause and result differ from one another, and because one must be free from the defilement of a lower level in order to be born above, the eye faculty of a lower level does not see the form above, since it is a result called forth by lowly action” (corresponding directly to T1562〔0520a11〕 in section V).
  • The boundary of the small thousand — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0191a01〕 adduces the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle: 「此中小千唯舉其梵世故,小光等非小千界攝」 tr. “here the small thousand adduces the Brahmā world only, and so the Parīttābha and the rest are not included in the small-thousand realm.”

(7) Bodily Measure, Lifespan, and Untimely Death

  • The extreme of bodily measure (a simile supplied by Fabao) — Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0619b10〕 adduces fascicle one hundred and twenty-eight of the Mahāvibhāṣā: 「如曷邏呼阿素落王所得身形其量廣大,如色究竟所得身形一萬六千六踰繕那量」 tr. “as the bodily form obtained by the asura king Rāhu is vast in measure, like the bodily form obtained in the Akaniṣṭha, a measure of sixteen thousand and six yojanas.”
  • Why the Anabhraka Heaven subtracts three (the third of the three commentaries’ head-on encounters) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0191a11〕 explains it as 「從變異受。初修不變異受難,故減三也」 tr. “from feeling that changes. It is difficult at first to cultivate the feeling that does not change, and so three are subtracted,” and gives two further explanations besides (to make up the sixteen thousand of the Akaniṣṭha · that it is so by the nature of things). Fabao judges it inverted straight off〔T41n1822 0619b14〕: 「此似倒也,既得難定,身壽應加。應言:下變異受以樂欲心勝,由此造業引壽等勝;不變異受引欣心劣,由此造業引壽等減」 tr. “this seems inverted. Since what is obtained is hard to fix, body and lifespan ought rather to be increased. It should be said: the feeling that changes below has the superior force of a mind of joyous desire, and by this it performs actions that call forth a superior lifespan and the rest; the feeling that does not change draws forth a mind of gladness that is inferior, and by this it performs actions that call forth a diminished lifespan and the rest” — the direction he establishes is the reverse of Puguang’s.
  • The names of the eight nāga kings (supplying what is abbreviated) — the abbreviating graph is 「等」 tr. “and the rest”; Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0191b28〕 adduces the Sūtra of the Lotus Flower, 「有八龍王,難陀龍王、跋難陀龍王、娑伽羅龍王、和修吉龍王、德叉迦龍王、阿那婆達多龍王、摩那斯龍王、優盋羅龍王」 tr. “there are eight nāga kings: the nāga king Nanda, the nāga king Upananda, the nāga king Sāgara, the nāga king Vāsuki, the nāga king Takṣaka, the nāga king Anavatapta, the nāga king Manasvin, the nāga king Utpalaka,” supplying what this treatise’s 「謂難陀等諸大龍王」 tr. “the great nāga kings such as Nanda and the rest” abbreviates in its 「等」 tr. “and the rest.”
  • The measures khārī and vāha (Puguang criticizes Paramārtha) — Fabao’s Commentary〔T41n1822 0619c12〕 glosses 「佉梨」 tr.khārī” and 「婆訶」 tr.vāha” in detail (see section II), and records〔0619c14〕 「摩揭陀國盛麻篅多受二十石」 tr. “the sesame chuan of the land of Magadha mostly holds twenty dan.” Puguang, however, judges Paramārtha’s reckoning wrong straight off〔T41n1821 0191c13〕 — the reckoning criticized is 「二十佉梨為一婆訶,一婆訶有二百五十六斛」 tr. “twenty khārī make one vāha, and one vāha holds two hundred and fifty-six hu.” This is a commentary criticizing a divergent translation, not one commentary criticizing another.
  • The gloss of being bound to one more birth — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0191c18〕 「謂住覩史多天一生所繫菩薩,無始已來為多生死之所繫縛,今唯一生所繫」 tr. “that is, the bodhisattva bound to one more birth dwelling in the Tuṣita Heaven, who from beginningless time has been bound by many births and deaths, and is now bound by one birth only.”
  • The aeon of Maitreya’s ascent and descent (three accounts set out together) — Puguang’s Record〔T41n1821 0192a15〕 adduces Master Tai’s account based on the Sūtra of the Establishing of the World (ascent in the ninth aeon of abiding · descent in the tenth), and records that Master Paramārtha held the same; then he adduces a divergent account from his own line of transmission〔0192a19〕: 「然和上云:釋迦牟尼當住劫第一劫出世。於此劫中已有四佛出世,即拘盧孫佛至釋迦佛。若彌勒佛,當第二住劫下生」 tr. “but the Preceptor says: Śākyamuni appeared in the first aeon of the aeon of abiding. Within this aeon four buddhas have already appeared, from the Buddha Krakucchanda to the Buddha Śākyamuni. As for the Buddha Maitreya, he will descend in the second aeon of abiding.” Puguang sets out three accounts and makes no final decision.

A Conspectus of the Divergences among the Three Commentaries (Recorded without Adjudication)

TopicPuguang’s RecordFabao’s CommentaryYuanhui’s Verse CommentaryWhat the divergence really is
The number of glosses of the graph 「增」 tr. “Increase”three glosses〔0187a05〕two glosses · his verdict 「有人謂是三解,誤也」 tr. “some hold that there are three explanations, which is a mistake”〔0616b02〕does not enter inFabao refutes Puguang’s number of glosses head-on
The geography of the vajra seat and the capital of King Yamajudges that 「不相妨也」 tr. “they do not obstruct one another”〔0187b26〕「今詳此釋,事恐不然」 tr. “examining this explanation now, the matter is likely not so,” and sets up his own view〔0616c18〕does not touch itFabao refutes Puguang’s adjudication head-on
The reason the Anabhraka Heaven subtracts three「初修不變異受難」 tr. “it is difficult at first to cultivate the feeling that does not change”〔0191a11〕「此似倒也」 tr. “this seems inverted” · the reverse direction〔0619b14〕does not touch itFabao refutes Puguang head-on, and his conclusion runs in the opposite direction
The reckoning of the three seasons of day and nightadduces the two masters Tai and Paramārtha and sets up his own 「今解」 tr. “the explanation now”〔0188b11〕adduces the three, Tai, Guang, and the Tripiṭaka Master of the Tang, and reconciles them by local custom〔0618a18〕adduces the two masters Tai and Guang and says plainly 「任情取捨」 tr. “take or leave as you please”〔0881c20〕all three set out several accounts together and yet their final verdicts differ — Puguang sets up a new explanation of his own · Fabao refers it to local custom · Yuanhui expressly passes no verdict
Paramārtha’s reckoning of the measure for the cold hellsjudges it 「不然」 tr. “not so” straight off〔T41n1821 0191c14〕does not touch it (gives his own glosses of khārī and vāha)does not touch itPuguang alone criticizes the divergent translation
The relative breadth of the three circlesdoes not touch itaudits the several accounts of the Mahāvibhāṣā independently and sets down his own judgment〔0614c28〕does not touch itsupplied by Fabao alone

Where the three commentaries diverge, each is recorded in turn and right and wrong are not adjudicated. That Yuanhui does not enter into disputes among the commentaries is itself a stance of practice, and it is recorded as such.


VII. Cross-Reading with the Yogācāra Root Lineage (Link to the Yogācāra Root System · Bridge ②)

What this unit establishes is the Abhidharma map of the receptacle realm and the tables of measure for sentient beings (the measure of places · bodily measure · lifespan), and its joining on toward the Yogācāra system (each item tied to that system word for word):

  • The support of the receptacle world → the ālaya consciousness transforming outwardly into the receptacle — the phrase is 「外變為器」 tr. “transforming outwardly into the receptacle”: the Treatise on the Establishment of Consciousness-Only has word for word 「器世間是諸有情所依處故……阿賴耶識因緣力故自體生時,內變為種及有根身,外變為器,即以所變為自所緣」 tr. “because the receptacle world is the place of support of all sentient beings . . . when the ālaya consciousness, by the force of causes and conditions, produces its own entity, it transforms inwardly into seeds and a body endowed with faculties, and outwardly into the receptacle, and takes what it has transformed as its own object”〔T31n1585 0010a13〕; and the reason it is called a seed of common characteristics stands word for word in 「異熟識由共相種成熟力故,變似色等器世間相」 tr. “because of the force of the ripening of seeds of common characteristics, the maturation consciousness transforms into a semblance of form and the rest, the characteristics of the receptacle world”〔T31n1585 0010c13〕. At every point this unit takes 「諸有情業增上力」 tr. “the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings” as the cause of the arising of the receptacle realm — 「謂諸有情業增上力,先於最下依止虛空有風輪生」 tr. “that is, by the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings, lowest of all and resting upon space a wind circle arises”〔0057a15〕 · 「如是寶等從何而生?亦諸有情業增上力」 tr. “from what, then, are these jewels and the rest produced? Likewise from the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings”〔0057b16〕 · 「日月眾星依何而住?依風而住。謂諸有情業增上力共引風起」 tr. “upon what do the sun, the moon, and the host of stars rest? They rest upon wind. That is, the dominant force of the actions of sentient beings together gives rise to a wind”〔0059a24〕. The receptacle realm is not made by a single cause nor by an outer power, but is tied to the dominance of the shared action of sentient beings alone — this proposition turns, in the Yogācāra system, into a receptacle world transformed by the seeds of common characteristics within the ālaya consciousness. One and the same question with answers from two generations, the steadiest anchor for cross-reading in this unit.
  • The institution of the three-thousandfold great thousand → the establishing of the receptacle world in the Basic Section of the Yogācārabhūmi — this unit has 「千四大洲乃至梵世,如是總說為一小千,千倍小千名一中千界,千中千界總名一大千」 tr. “a thousand sets of four great continents and so on up to the Brahmā world, thus stated together, are one small thousand; a thousandfold of the small thousand is named one middling-thousand realm; a thousand middling-thousand realms are named together one great thousand”〔0061a09〕; the Basic Section of the Yogācārabhūmi has word for word 「一、小千界,謂千日月乃至梵世,總攝為一。二、中千界,謂千小千。三、大千界,謂千中千。合此名為三千大千世界」 tr. “first, the small-thousand realm, that is, a thousand suns and moons up to the Brahmā world, gathered in sum as one. Second, the middling-thousand realm, that is, a thousand small thousands. Third, the great-thousand realm, that is, a thousand middling thousands. These together are named the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-sphere”〔T30n1579 0288a17〕, and on the arising of the wind circle and the golden circle it also has 「三千大千世界,從下而起,與彼世界作所依持」 tr. “the three-thousandfold great-thousand world-sphere arises from below and serves as the support that upholds that world-sphere”〔T30n1579 0286c14〕. The institution of the threefold multiplication by a thousand is the same item by item.
  • The tables of bodily measure and lifespan → the taking up of tables of measure for sentient beings — this unit’s table of the measures of the people of the four continents (three and a half cubits · eight cubits · sixteen cubits · thirty-two cubits) and of the lifespans of the six heavens of desire (five hundred · a thousand · two thousand · four thousand · eight thousand · sixteen thousand years); the Basic Section of the Yogācārabhūmi likewise establishes the day and night of the heavens by the years of the human world and derives from them by degrees — 「北拘盧洲人壽量決定千歲。又人間五十歲是四大王眾天一日一夜。以此日夜,三十日夜為一月,十二月為一歲。彼諸天眾壽量五百歲」 tr. “the lifespan of the people of Uttarakuru in the north is fixed at a thousand years. Again, fifty human years are one day and one night of the Heaven of the Multitude of the Four Great Kings. By these days and nights, thirty days and nights make one month and twelve months one year. The lifespan of those hosts of gods is five hundred years”〔T30n1579 0295b08〕; and its general sentence for the derivation through the six heavens stands elsewhere at 「如是所餘,乃至他化自在天,日夜及壽量各增前一倍」 tr. “thus for all the rest, up to the Heaven of Sovereignty over Others’ Transformations, the day and night and the lifespan each double the one before”〔T30n1579 0295b13〕. The method of reckoning and the method of deriving the numbers may be read against each other word for word; as for the bodily measures of the four continents, both treatises present an increase continent by continent while stating the values differently, and this is recorded without adjudication. The doctrinal frameworks to which they are tied also differ.

VIII. Translation History

  • Xuanzang’s new translation (the base text of this collection): the Abhidharmakośa in thirty fascicles, 「第二出與真諦出者同本永徽二年五月十日於大慈恩寺翻經院譯至五年七月二十七日畢沙門元瑜筆受」 tr. “the second issuing, of the same original as Paramārtha’s issuing; translated from the tenth day of the fifth month of the second year of Yonghui at the Scripture-Translating Cloister of the Great Ci’en Monastery, completed on the twenty-seventh day of the seventh month of the fifth year, the monk Yuanyu taking it down” — the Kaiyuan Catalogue of the Teachings〔T55n2154 0557a22–23〕. The fascicle-opening title of this unit is 「阿毘達磨俱舍論卷第十一」 tr. “the Abhidharmakośa, Fascicle Eleven”〔T29 0057a02〕, and the chapter continuation title 「分別世品第三之四」 tr. “Chapter Three, the Analysis of the World, Part Four”〔0057a06〕.
  • Paramārtha’s older translation (the divergent-translation collating text): the Expository Treatise on the Treasury of Abhidharma in twenty-two fascicles, the first translation〔T55n2154 0545c16 著錄〕. His chapter on the world is titled 「釋論中分別世間品第三」 tr. “Chapter Three of the Expository Treatise, the Analysis of the World,” and the whole passage〔T29n1559 0198a24–0225a10〕 is divided into four fascicles, different from Xuanzang’s division into five — the passage corresponding to this unit straddles the boundary between his 「之三」 tr. “part three” and 「之四」 tr. “part four” (see section IV).
  • The translation of the two treatises of debate: the Kaiyuan Catalogue〔T55n2154 0620c25〕 「阿毘達磨順正理論八十卷大唐三藏玄奘譯阿毘達磨顯宗論四十卷大唐三藏玄奘譯右二部論與俱舍論頌同釋異並眾賢造」 tr. “the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle in eighty fascicles, translated by the Tripiṭaka Master Xuanzang of the Great Tang; the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine in forty fascicles, translated by the Tripiṭaka Master Xuanzang of the Great Tang; these two treatises are alike in stanzas and different in explanation from the Abhidharmakośa, and both are composed by Saṅghabhadra”; the Zhenyuan Catalogue〔T55n2157 0954b02〕 records the same and adds 「尊者眾賢造」 tr. “composed by the Venerable Saṅghabhadra.” The four graphs 「頌同釋異」 tr. “alike in stanzas and different in explanation” are the very warrant for the practice of section V — the two treatises use the Kośa’s root stanzas and compose their own prose commentaries. The chapter name in both treatises is 「辯緣起品」 tr. “the chapter analyzing dependent origination,” not 「世品」 tr. “the chapter on the world.”
  • Collateral evidence on the work of translation: Xuanzang’s reply in the spring of the fifth year of Yonghui, 「其《俱舍》、《順正理》,見譯未周,今年必了」 tr. “the Kośa and the Correct Principle, whose translation I see is not yet complete, will certainly be finished this year” — the Biography of the Tripiṭaka Master of the Great Ci’en Monastery〔T50n2053 0261c20〕. ⇒ The Kośa and the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle were translated in the same period.
  • The order of the commentaries and what survives of them for this unit: Puguang’s Record, T41n1821 (Puguang · the principal · his verse-by-verse citation and explanation of this unit is the fullest) · Fabao’s Commentary, T41n1822 (Fabao · the secondary · independent auditing is his character) · Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary, T41n1823 (Yuanhui · outlines · the passage of this unit has no chapter title, and the fascicle title reads 「俱舍論頌疏論本第十一」 tr. “the Verse Commentary on the Root Text of the Abhidharmakośa, Eleven”〔T41n1823 0878c16〕) · Shentai’s Commentary, X53n0836 (incomplete · the Chapter on the World wholly wanting). The words on the Chapter on the World cited by the three masters from 「泰法師」 tr. “Master Tai” occur four times in all (see section VI), collateral evidence that the original compilation of Shentai’s commentary did explain the Chapter on the World.
  • A mark of period in the divergent translation (bearing on the reckoning of the three seasons): in the passage on the increase and decrease of day and night Puguang cites Master Paramārtha’s establishing of the three seasons〔T41n1821 0188a15〕, and Fabao cites the oral teaching of Xuanzang himself〔T41n1822 0618a05〕 — the two translators each had an oral teaching on one and the same calendrical question, recorded by way of the ancient masters; this is collateral evidence for the history of translation, and only the fact is recorded · no verdict of cause and effect is passed.

IX. Edition Location Register

  • Xuanzang T1558, Fascicle Eleven (base text)〔0057a02–0062a07〕: fascicle-opening title 0057a02 · chapter continuation title 0057a06 · the transitional sentence at the opening 0057a07 · Roots 45–47 0057a08 · Roots 48–51 0057b02 · Root 52 · Root 53 0057c06 · Roots 54–57 0057c19 · Root 58 0058a16 · Root 59 · Root 60 0058a28 · quoted stanza one 0058b16 · quoted stanza two 0058c21 · Roots 61–63 0059a18 · Root 64 · Root 65 0059b22 · Roots 66–69 0059c11 · quoted stanza three 0060a18 · first half of Root 70 0060a26 · second half of Root 70 0060b03 · first half of Root 71 0060b14 · second half of Root 71 0060b20 · first half of Root 72 0060c06 · second half of Root 72 0060c19 · Root 73 · Root 74 0061a05 · Root 75 · Root 76 · first half of Root 77 0061a14 · second half of Root 77 · Roots 78–80 0061a28 · Roots 81–83 0061c05 · first half of Root 84 0061c28. The anchor of the chapter title 0040c22 (the head of the chapter on the world). The boundary of the next fascicle (Unit 5) 0062a12 · its first sentence 0062a13.
  • The separately circulated root stanzas, T29n1560: the anchors of the five variant graphs corresponding to this unit 0315a11 · 0315a27 · 0315b01 · 0315b04 · 0315b08 (see honest record one in section III); the beginning of this unit’s stanza passage 0314c11 · its end 0315c02.
  • Paramārtha T1559: the corresponding passage 0214a14–0219c14. Principal items 0214a14 · 0214a15 · 0214b07 · 0214b08 · 0214b09 · 0214b28 · 0214c17 · 0214c19 · 0215a06 · 0215a10 · 0215a13 · 0215a22 · 0215b07 · 0215b13 · 0215b24 · 0215c08 · 0216a13 · 0216a15 · 0216b19 · 0216c24 · 0217a10 · 0217a13 · 0217b08 · 0217b22 · 0217b25 · 0217b29 · 0217c07 · 0217c18 · 0217c25 · 0218a05 · 0218a12 · 0218a26 · 0218b21 · 0218c03 · 0218c23 · 0219b08 · 0219c09 · 0219c14. The boundaries of the whole passage of the chapter on the world 0198a24–0225a10 (fascicle divisions 0198a24 · 0204c02 · 0211c02 · 0218b09) — the closing anchor is taken at the last line of the text proper: the last graph of that chapter’s closing sentence 「六十四劫是遍淨天壽量」 tr. “sixty-four aeons is the lifespan of the Śubhakṛtsna Heaven”〔T29n1559 0225a09〕 falls at 0225a10, below which 0225a11 is the end title of Fascicle Nine, 0225a12–17 is the signature at the opening of Fascicle Ten, and at 0225a18 begins the chapter title 「分別業品第四」 tr. “Chapter Four, the Analysis of Action.”
  • Saṅghabhadra T1562〔辯緣起品第三 0456a16–0527b18〕: the beginning of the passage corresponding to this unit 0514c23 · 0515a01 · 0515c26 · 0517a27 · 0520a11; the boundary markers of Unit 5 0521b19 · 0521b23. T1563〔辯緣起品第四 0829a22–0859b21〕: 0850b28 · 0850c01 · 0852a02 · 0854a18.
  • Puguang’s Record, T41n1821〔0185b11–0192b10〕: 0185b12 · 0185b14 · 0185b19 · 0185b23 · 0185c07 · 0185c08 · 0185c09 · 0185c11 · 0185c13 · 0185c14 · 0185c15 · 0185c16 · 0185c17 · 0185c22 · 0186a03 · 0186b01 · 0186b11 · 0186b16 · 0186b22 · 0186b29 · 0186c03 · 0186c11 · 0186c28 · 0187a05 · 0187a08 · 0187a09 · 0187a21 · 0187a28 · 0187a29 · 0187b12 · 0187b23 · 0187c22 · 0188a15 · 0188a21 · 0188b11 · 0189a20 · 0189a27 · 0189b10 · 0189b12 · 0189b15 · 0189c28 · 0190a05 · 0190a12 · 0190b09 · 0190c03 · 0190c18 · 0191a01 · 0191a11 · 0191b28 · 0191c13 · 0191c14 · 0191c18 · 0192a15 · 0192a16 · 0192a19 · 0192b11; the boundary of Unit 5 0192b11.
  • Fabao’s Commentary, T41n1822〔0614b24–0620a04〕: 0614b24 · 0614b25 · 0614c11 · 0614c20 · 0614c28 · 0615c22 · 0616a01 · 0616b02 · 0616b14 · 0616c18 · 0618a05 · 0618a07 · 0618a18 · 0619b10 · 0619b12 · 0619b14 · 0619c12 · 0619c13 · 0619c14 · 0620a05; the boundary of Unit 5 0620a05.
  • Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary, T41n1823〔0878c16–0885a11〕: the fascicle title 0878c16 · the general heading of the outline 0878c18 · the first sentence of the text at the head of the fascicle 0878c24 · 0881b20 · 0881b27 · 0881c18 · 0882b18 · 0882c07 · 0882c08; the boundary of Unit 5 0885a18. The passage of this unit has no chapter title (in the whole treatise only 「破我品」 tr. “the chapter refuting the self” and 「分別根品二之一」 tr. “the Chapter on the Analysis of the Faculties, Part Two, Section One” have chapter titles).
  • Shentai’s Commentary, X53n0836 (taking the ed="X" line): the Chapter on the World is wholly wanting; the anchors of the collateral examples in other chapters 0038b23 · 0039a09 — not entered into the verse-by-verse explanation of this unit (the lacuna marked as it stands · nothing supplied).
  • Anchors for cross-reading with the Yogācāra system: T31n1585 0010a13 · 0010c13; T30n1579 0288a17 · 0295b08 · 0295b13.
  • Catalogues and biographies: T55n2154 0545c16 · 0557a22–23 · 0620c25; T55n2157 0954b02; T50n2053 0261c20.
  • Collation: thirty-two Taishō original notes in Fascicle Eleven (twenty-one variant readings enumerated in full · eleven notes of Sanskrit transcription not entered in the table) · no case for emending the established text; three CBETA restorations recorded alongside (and one further CBETA collation of another witness · the base text unchanged). The five variant graphs found in comparison with T1560 are recorded separately at honest record one in section III.

Translator · 釋慧鏡 Shi Huijing — with AI-assisted rendering, translator-ruled

License · CC BY-NC-SA 4.0